diff options
| author | Roger Frank <rfrank@pglaf.org> | 2025-10-15 04:47:20 -0700 |
|---|---|---|
| committer | Roger Frank <rfrank@pglaf.org> | 2025-10-15 04:47:20 -0700 |
| commit | dd5c9f6cbf85e2f2b01a9c54c2d8b15ddeaf7e1b (patch) | |
| tree | f01c4e58df443586163c6fd0cd50a7aededd42a9 /15697-0.txt | |
Diffstat (limited to '15697-0.txt')
| -rw-r--r-- | 15697-0.txt | 8908 |
1 files changed, 8908 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/15697-0.txt b/15697-0.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e0f7352 --- /dev/null +++ b/15697-0.txt @@ -0,0 +1,8908 @@ +The Project Gutenberg EBook of True Stories from History and Biography by +Nathaniel Hawthorne + + + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with almost no +restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under +the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or +online at http://www.gutenberg.org/license + + + +Title: True Stories from History and Biography + +Author: Nathaniel Hawthorne + +Release Date: April 2005 [Ebook #15697] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: UTF-8 + + +***START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK TRUE STORIES FROM HISTORY AND BIOGRAPHY*** + + + + + +True Stories from History and Biography +by Nathaniel Hawthorne +BOSTON: +TICKNOR, REED, AND FIELDS. +MDCCCLI. + +Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1850, by NATHANIEL +HAWTHORNE, in the Clerk’s Office of the District Court of the District of +Massachusetts. + +CAMBRIDGE: +PRINTED BY BOLLES AND HOUGHTON. + + + + + + [Frontispiece] + + + + + +Preface +THE WHOLE HISTORY OF GRANDFATHER’S CHAIR +Part I + Chapter I + Chapter II + THE LADY ARBELLA + Chapter III + Chapter IV + Chapter V + Chapter VI + THE PINE-TREE SHILLINGS + Chapter VII + Chapter VIII + THE INDIAN BIBLE + Chapter IX + Chapter X + THE SUNKEN TREASURE + Chapter XI +Part II + Chapter I + Chapter II + Chapter III + THE OLD-FASHIONED SCHOOL + Chapter IV + Chapter VI + THE REJECTED BLESSING + Chapter VII + Chapter VIII + THE PROVINCIAL MUSTER + Chapter IX + THE ACADIAN EXILES + Chapter X + Chapter XI +Part III + Chapter I + Chapter II + Chapter III + THE HUTCHINSON MOB + Chapter IV + Chapter V + THE BOSTON MASSACRE + Chapter VI + Chapter VII + Chapter VIII + Chapter IX + THE TORY’S FAREWELL + Chapter X + Chapter XI + GRANDFATHER’S DREAM +Biographical Stories + Chapter I + Chapter II + BENJAMIN WEST + Chapter III + SIR ISAAC NEWTON + Chapter IV + SAMUEL JOHNSON + Chapter V + SAMUEL JOHNSON—CONTINUED. + Chapter VI + OLIVER CROMWELL + Chapter VII + BENJAMIN FRANKLIN + Chapter VIII + BENJAMIN FRANKLIN—CONTINUED + Chapter IX + QUEEN CHRISTINA + + + + + +PREFACE + + +In writing this ponderous tome, the author’s desire has been to describe +the eminent characters and remarkable events of our annals, in such a form +and style, that the YOUNG might make acquaintance with them of their own +accord. For this purpose, while ostensibly relating the adventures of a +Chair, he has endeavored to keep a distinct and unbroken thread of +authentic history. The Chair is made to pass from one to another of those +personages, of whom he thought it most desirable for the young reader to +have vivid and familiar ideas, and whose lives and actions would best +enable him to give picturesque sketches of the times. On its sturdy oaken +legs, it trudges diligently from one scene to another, and seems always to +thrust itself in the way, with most benign complacency, whenever a +historical personage happens to be looking round for a seat. + +There is certainly no method, by which the shadowy outlines of departed +men and women can he made to assume the hues of life more effectually, +than by connecting their images with the substantial and homely reality of +a fireside chair. It causes us to feel at once, that these characters of +history had a private and familiar existence, and were not wholly +contained within that cold array of outward action, which we are compelled +to receive as the adequate representation of their lives. If this +impression can be given, much is accomplished. + +Setting aside Grandfather and his auditors, and excepting the adventures +of the Chair, which form the machinery of the work, nothing in the ensuing +pages can be termed fictitious. The author, it is true, has sometimes +assumed the license of filling up the outline of history with details, for +which he has none but imaginative authority, but which, he hopes, do not +violate nor give a false coloring to the truth. He believes that, in this +respect, his narrative will not be found to convey ideas and impressions, +of which the reader may hereafter find it necessary to purge his mind. + +The author’s great doubt is, whether he has succeeded in writing a book +which will be readable by the class for whom he intends it. To make a +lively and entertaining narrative for children, with such unmalleable +material as is presented by the sombre, stern, and rigid characteristics +of the Puritans and their descendants, is quite as difficult an attempt, +as to manufacture delicate playthings out of the granite rocks on which +New England is founded. + + + + + + + THE WHOLE HISTORY OF GRANDFATHER’S CHAIR + + + COMPLETE IN THREE PARTS. + + + + + +PART I + + + + +Chapter I + + +Grandfather had been sitting in his old arm-chair, all that pleasant +afternoon, while the children were pursuing their various sports, far off +or near at hand. Sometimes you would have said, "Grandfather is asleep;" +but still, even when his eyes were closed, his thoughts were with the +young people, playing among the flowers and shrubbery of the garden. + +He heard the voice of Laurence, who had taken possession of a heap of +decayed branches which the gardener had lopped from the fruit trees, and +was building a little hut for his cousin Clara and himself. He heard +Clara’s gladsome voice, too, as she weeded and watered the flower-bed +which had been given her for her own. He could have counted every footstep +that Charley took, as he trundled his wheelbarrow along the gravel walk. +And though Grandfather was old and gray-haired, yet his heart leaped with +joy whenever little Alice came fluttering, like a butterfly, into the +room. She had made each of the children her playmate in turn, and now made +Grandfather her playmate too, and thought him the merriest of them all. + +At last the children grew weary of their sports; because a summer +afternoon is like a long lifetime to the young. So they came into the room +together, and clustered round Grandfather’s great chair. Little Alice, who +was hardly five years old, took the privilege of the youngest, and climbed +his knee. It was a pleasant thing to behold that fair and golden-haired +child in the lap of the old man, and to think that, different as they +were, the hearts of both could be gladdened with the same joys. + +"Grandfather," said little Alice, laying her head back upon his arm, "I am +very tired now. You must tell me a story to make me go to sleep." + +"That is not what story-tellers like," answered Grandfather, smiling. +"They are better satisfied when they can keep their auditors awake." + +"But here are Laurence, and Charley, and I," cried cousin Clara, who was +twice as old as little Alice. "We will all three keep wide awake. And +pray, Grandfather, tell us a story about this strange-looking old chair." + +Now, the chair in which Grandfather sat was made of oak, which had grown +dark with age, but had been rubbed and polished till it shone as bright as +mahogany. It was very large and heavy, and had a back that rose high above +Grandfather’s white head. This back was curiously carved in open work, so +as to represent flowers and foliage and other devices; which the children +had often gazed at, but could never understand what they meant. On the +very tiptop of the chair, over the head of Grandfather himself, was a +likeness of a lion’s head, which had such a savage grin that you would +almost expect to hear it growl and snarl. + +The children had seen Grandfather sitting in this chair ever since they +could remember any thing. Perhaps the younger of them supposed that he and +the chair had come into the world together, and that both had always been +as old as they were now. At this time, however, it happened to be the +fashion for ladies to adorn their drawing-rooms with the oldest and oddest +chairs that could be found. It seemed to cousin Clara that if these ladies +could have seen Grandfather’s old chair, they would have thought it worth +all the rest together. She wondered if it were not even older than +Grandfather himself, and longed to know all about its history. + +"Do, Grandfather, talk to us about this chair," she repeated. + +"Well, child," said Grandfather, patting Clara’s cheek, "I can tell you a +great many stories of my chair. Perhaps your cousin Laurence would like to +hear them too. They would teach him something about the history and +distinguished people of his country, which he has never read in any of his +school-books." + +Cousin Laurence was a boy of twelve, a bright scholar, in whom an early +thoughtfulness and sensibility began to show themselves. His young fancy +kindled at the idea of knowing all the adventures of this venerable chair. +He looked eagerly in Grandfather’s face; and even Charley, a bold, brisk, +restless little fellow of nine, sat himself down on the carpet, and +resolved to be quiet for at least ten minutes, should the story last so +long. + +Meantime, little Alice was already asleep; so Grandfather, being much +pleased with such an attentive audience, began to talk about matters that +had happened long ago. + + + + +Chapter II + + +But, before relating the adventures of the chair, Grandfather found it +necessary to speak of the circumstances that caused the first settlement +of New England. For it will soon be perceived that the story of this +remarkable chair cannot be told without telling a great deal of the +history of the country. + +So, Grandfather talked about the Puritans, as those persons were called +who thought it sinful to practise the religious forms and ceremonies which +the Church of England had borrowed from the Roman Catholics. These +Puritans suffered so much persecution in England that, in 1607, many of +them went over to Holland, and lived ten or twelve years at Amsterdam and +Leyden. But they feared that, if they continued there much longer, they +should cease to be English, and should adopt all the manners and ideas and +feelings of the Dutch. For this and other reasons, in the year 1620, they +embarked on board of the ship Mayflower, and crossed the ocean to the +shores of Cape Cod. There they made a settlement, and called it Plymouth; +which, though now a part of Massachusetts, was for a long time a colony by +itself. And thus was formed the earliest settlement of the Puritans in +America. + +Meantime, those of the Puritans who remained in England continued to +suffer grievous persecution on account of their religious opinions. They +began to look around them for some spot where they might worship God, not +as the king and bishops thought fit, but according to the dictates of +their own consciences. When their brethren had gone from Holland to +America, they bethought themselves that they likewise might find refuge +from persecution there. Several gentlemen among them purchased a tract of +country on the coast of Massachusetts Bay, and obtained a charter from +King Charles, which authorized them to make laws for the settlers. In the +year 1628, they sent over a few people, with John Endicott at their head, +to commence a plantation at Salem. Peter Palfrey, Roger Conant, and one or +two more, had built houses there in 1626, and may be considered as the +first settlers of that ancient town. Many other Puritans prepared to +follow Endicott. + +"And now we come to the chair, my dear children," said Grandfather. "This +chair is supposed to have been made of an oak tree which grew in the park +of the English earl of Lincoln, between two and three centuries ago. In +its younger days it used, probably, to stand in the hall of the earl’s +castle. Do not you see the coat of arms of the family of Lincoln, carved +in the open work of the back? But when his daughter, the Lady Arbella, was +married to a certain Mr. Johnson, the earl gave her this valuable chair." + +"Who was Mr. Johnson?" inquired Clara. + +"He was a gentleman of great wealth, who agreed with the Puritans in their +religious opinions," answered Grandfather. "And as his belief was the same +as theirs, he resolved that he would live and die with them. Accordingly, +in the month of April, 1630, he left his pleasant abode and all his +comforts in England, and embarked with the Lady Arbella, on board of a +ship bound for America." + +As Grandfather was frequently impeded by the questions and observations of +his young auditors, we deem it advisable to omit all such prattle as is +not essential to the story. We have taken some pains to find out exactly +what Grandfather said, and here offer to our readers, as nearly as +possible in his own words, the story of + + + +THE LADY ARBELLA + + +The ship in which Mr. Johnson and his lady embarked, taking Grandfather’s +chair along with them, was called the Arbella, in honor of the lady +herself. A fleet of ten or twelve vessels, with many hundred passengers, +left England about the same time; for a multitude of people, who were +discontented with the king’s government and oppressed by the bishops, were +flocking over to the new world. One of the vessels in the fleet was that +same Mayflower which had carried the Puritan pilgrims to Plymouth. And +now, my children, I would have you fancy yourselves in the cabin of the +good ship Arbella; because if you could behold the passengers aboard that +vessel, you would feel what a blessing and honor it was for New England to +have such settlers. They were the best men and women of their day. + +Among the passengers was John Winthrop, who had sold the estate of his +forefathers, and was going to prepare a new home for his wife and children +in the wilderness. He had the king’s charter in his keeping, and was +appointed the first Governor of Massachusetts. Imagine him a person of +grave and benevolent aspect, dressed in a black velvet suit, with a broad +ruff around his neck and a peaked beard upon his chin. There was likewise +a minister of the Gospel, whom the English bishops had forbidden to +preach, but who knew that he should have liberty both to preach and pray +in the forests of America. He wore a black cloak, called a Geneva cloak, +and had a black velvet cap, fitting close to his head, as was the fashion +of almost all the Puritan clergymen. In their company came Sir Richard +Saltonstall, who had been one of the five first projectors of the new +colony. He soon returned to his native country. But his descendants still +remain in New England; and the good old family name is as much respected +in our days as it was in those of Sir Richard. + +Not only these, but several other men of wealth and pious ministers, were +in the cabin of the Arbella. One had banished himself for ever from the +old hall where his ancestors had lived for hundreds of years. Another had +left his quiet parsonage, in a country town of England. Others had come +from the universities of Oxford or Cambridge, where they had gained great +fame for their learning. And here they all were, tossing upon the +uncertain and dangerous sea, and bound for a home that was more dangerous +than even the sea itself. In the cabin, likewise, sat the Lady Arbella in +her chair, with a gentle and sweet expression on her face, but looking too +pale and feeble to endure the hardships of the wilderness. + +Every morning and evening the Lady Arbella gave up her great chair to one +of the ministers, who took his place in it and read passages from the +Bible to his companions. And thus, with prayers and pious conversation, +and frequent singing of hymns, which the breezes caught from their lips +and scattered far over the desolate waves, they prosecuted their voyage, +and sailed into the harbor of Salem in the month of June. + +At that period there were but six or eight dwellings in the town; and +these were miserable hovels, with roofs of straw and wooden chimneys. The +passengers in the fleet either built huts with bark and branches of trees, +or erected tents of cloth till they could provide themselves with better +shelter. Many of them went to form a settlement at Charlestown. It was +thought fit that the Lady Arbella should tarry in Salem for a time; she +was probably received as a guest into the family of John Endicott. He was +the chief person in the plantation, and had the only comfortable house +which the new comers had beheld since they left England. So now, children, +you must imagine Grandfather’s chair in the midst of a new scene. + +Suppose it a hot summer’s day, and the lattice-windows of a chamber in Mr. +Endicott’s house thrown wide open. The Lady Arbella, looking paler than +she did on shipboard, is sitting in her chair, and thinking mournfully of +far-off England. She rises and goes to the window. There, amid patches of +garden ground and cornfield, she sees the few wretched hovels of the +settlers, with the still ruder wigwams and cloth tents of the passengers +who had arrived in the same fleet with herself. Far and near stretches the +dismal forest of pine trees, which throw their black shadows over the +whole land, and likewise over the heart of this poor lady. + +All the inhabitants of the little village are busy. One is clearing a spot +on the verge of the forest for his homestead; another is hewing the trunk +of a fallen pine tree, in order to build himself a dwelling; a third is +hoeing in his field of Indian corn. Here comes a huntsman out of the +woods, dragging a bear which he has shot, and shouting to the neighbors to +lend him a hand. There goes a man to the sea-shore, with a spade and a +bucket, to dig a mess of clams, which were a principal article of food +with the first settlers. Scattered here and there are two or three dusky +figures, clad in mantles of fur, with ornaments of bone hanging from their +ears, and the feathers of wild birds in their coal black hair. They have +belts of shell-work slung across their shoulders, and are armed with bows +and arrows and flint-headed spears. These are an Indian Sagamore and his +attendants, who have come to gaze at the labors of the white men. And now +rises a cry, that a pack of wolves have seized a young calf in the +pasture; and every man snatches up his gun or pike, and runs in chase of +the marauding beasts. + +Poor Lady Arbella watches all these sights, and feels that this new world +is fit only for rough and hardy people. None should be here but those who +can struggle with wild beasts and wild men, and can toil in the heat or +cold, and can keep their hearts firm against all difficulties and dangers. +But she is not one of these. Her gentle and timid spirit sinks within her; +and turning away from the window she sits down in the great chair, and +wonders thereabouts in the wilderness her friends will dig her grave. + +Mr. Johnson had gone, with Governor Winthrop and most of the other +passengers, to Boston, where he intended to build a house for Lady Arbella +and himself. Boston was then covered with wild woods, and had fewer +inhabitants even than Salem. During her husband’s absence, poor Lady +Arbella felt herself growing ill, and was hardly able to stir from the +great chair. Whenever John Endicott noticed her despondency, he doubtless +addressed her with words of comfort. "Cheer up, my good lady!" he would +say. "In a little time, you will love this rude life of the wilderness as +I do." But Endicott’s heart was as bold and resolute as iron, and he could +not understand why a woman’s heart should not be of iron too. + +Still, however, he spoke kindly to the lady, and then hastened forth to +till his corn-field and set out fruit trees, or to bargain with the +Indians for furs, or perchance to oversee the building of a fort. Also +being a magistrate, he had often to punish some idler or evil-doer, by +ordering him to be set in the stocks or scourged at the whipping-post. +Often, too, as was the custom of the times, he and Mr. Higginson, the +minister of Salem, held long religious talks together. Thus John Endicott +was a man of multifarious business, and had no time to look back +regretfully to his native land. He felt himself fit for the new world, and +for the work that he had to do, and set himself resolutely to accomplish +it. + +What a contrast, my dear children, between this bold, rough, active man, +and the gentle Lady Arbella, who was fading away, like a pale English +flower, in the shadow of the forest! And now the great chair was often +empty, because Lady Arbella grew too weak to arise from bed. + +Meantime, her husband had pitched upon a spot for their new home. He +returned from Boston to Salem, travelling through the woods on foot, and +leaning on his pilgrim’s staff. His heart yearned within him; for he was +eager to tell his wife of the new home which he had chosen. But when he +beheld her pale and hollow cheek, and found how her strength was wasted, +he must have known that her appointed home was in a better land. Happy for +him then,—happy both for him and her,—if they remembered that there was a +path to heaven, as well from this heathen wilderness as from the Christian +land whence they had come. And so, in one short month from her arrival, +the gentle Lady Arbella faded away and died. They dug a grave for her in +the new soil, where the roots of the pine trees impeded their spades; and +when her bones had rested there nearly two hundred years, and a city had +sprung up around them, a church of stone was built upon the spot. + + + +Charley, almost at the commencement of the foregoing narrative, had +galloped away with a prodigious clatter, upon Grandfather’s stick, and was +not yet returned. So large a boy should have been ashamed to ride upon a +stick. But Laurence and Clara had listened attentively, and were affected +by this true story of the gentle lady, who had come so far to die so soon. +Grandfather had supposed that little Alice was asleep, but, towards the +close of the story, happening to look down upon her, he saw that her blue +eyes were wide open, and fixed earnestly upon his face. The tears had +gathered in them, like dew upon a delicate flower; but when Grandfather +ceased to speak, the sunshine of her smile broke forth again. + +"O, the lady must have been so glad to get to heaven!" exclaimed little +Alice. + +"Grandfather, what became of Mr. Johnson?" asked Clara. + +"His heart appears to have been quite broken," answered Grandfather; "for +he died at Boston within a month after the death of his wife. He was +buried in the very same tract of ground, where he had intended to build a +dwelling for Lady Arbella and himself. Where their house would have stood +there was his grave. + +"I never heard any thing so melancholy!" said Clara. + +"The people loved and respected Mr. Johnson so much," continued +Grandfather, "that it was the last request of many of them, when they +died, that they might be buried as near as possible to this good man’s +grave. And so the field became the first burial-ground in Boston. When you +pass through Tremont street, along by King’s Chapel, you see a +burial-ground, containing many old grave-stones and monuments. That was +Mr. Johnson’s field." + +"How sad is the thought," observed Clara, "that one of the first things +which the settlers had to do, when they came to the new world, was to set +apart a burial-ground!" + +"Perhaps," said Laurence, "if they had found no need of burial-grounds +here, they would have been glad, after a few years, to go back to +England." + +Grandfather looked at Laurence, to discover whether he knew how profound +and true a thing he had said. + + + + +Chapter III + + +Not long after Grandfather had told the story of his great chair, there +chanced to be a rainy day. Our friend Charley, after disturbing the +household with beat of drum and riotous shouts, races up and down the +staircase, overturning of chairs, and much other uproar, began to feel the +quiet and confinement within doors intolerable. But as the rain came down +in a flood, the little fellow was hopelessly a prisoner, and now stood +with sullen aspect at a window, wondering whether the sun itself were not +extinguished by so much moisture in the sky. + +Charley had already exhausted the less eager activity of the other +children; and they had betaken themselves to occupations that did not +admit of his companionship. Laurence sat in a recess near the book-case, +reading, not for the first time, the Midsummer Night’s Dream. Clara was +making a rosary of beads for a little figure of a Sister of Charity, who +was to attend the Bunker Hill Fair, and lend her aid in erecting the +Monument. Little Alice sat on Grandfather’s foot-stool, with a +picture-book in her hand; and, for every picture, the child was telling +Grandfather a story. She did not read from the book, (for little Alice had +not much skill in reading,) but told the story out of her own heart and +mind. + +Charley was too big a boy, of course, to care any thing about little +Alice’s stories, although Grandfather appeared to listen with a good deal +of interest. Often, in a young child’s ideas and fancies, there is +something which it requires the thought of a lifetime to comprehend. But +Charley was of opinion, that if a story must be told, it had better be +told by Grandfather, than little Alice. + +"Grandfather, I want to hear more about your chair," said he. + +Now Grandfather remembered that Charley had galloped away upon a stick, in +the midst of the narrative of poor Lady Arbella, and I know not whether he +would have thought it worth while to tell another story, merely to gratify +such an inattentive auditor as Charley. But Laurence laid down his book +and seconded the request. Clara drew her chair nearer to Grandfather, and +little Alice immediately closed her picture-book, and looked up into his +face. Grandfather had not the heart to disappoint them. + +He mentioned several persons who had a share in the settlement of our +country, and who would be well worthy of remembrance, if we could find +room to tell about them all. Among the rest, Grandfather spoke of the +famous Hugh Peters, a minister of the gospel, who did much good to the +inhabitants of Salem. Mr. Peters afterwards went back to England, and was +chaplain to Oliver Cromwell; but Grandfather did not tell the children +what became of this upright and zealous man, at last. In fact, his +auditors were growing impatient to hear more about the history of the +chair. + +"After the death of Mr. Johnson," said he, "Grandfather’s chair came into +the possession of Roger Williams. He was a clergyman, who arrived at +Salem, and settled there in 1631. Doubtless the good man has spent many a +studious hour in this old chair, either penning a sermon, or reading some +abstruse book of theology, till midnight came upon him unawares. At that +period, as there were few lamps or candles to be had, people used to read +or work by the light of pitchpine torches. These supplied the place of the +"midnight oil," to the learned men of New England." + +Grandfather went on to talk about Roger Williams, and told the children +several particulars, which we have not room to repeat. One incident, +however, which was connected with his life, must be related, because it +will give the reader an idea of the opinions and feelings of the first +settlers of New England. It was as follows: + + + +THE RED CROSS + + +While Roger Williams sat in Grandfather’s chair, at his humble residence +in Salem, John Endicott would often come to visit him. As the clergy had +great influence in temporal concerns, the minister and magistrate would +talk over the occurrences of the day, and consult how the people might be +governed according to scriptural laws. + +One thing especially troubled them both. In the old national banner of +England, under which her soldiers have fought for hundreds of years, there +is a Red Cross, which has been there ever since the days when England was +in subjection to the Pope. The Cross, though a holy symbol, was abhorred +by the Puritans, because they considered it a relic of Popish idolatry. +Now, whenever the train-band of Salem was mustered, the soldiers, with +Endicott at their head, had no other flag to march under than this same +old papistical banner of England, with the Red Cross in the midst of it. +The banner of the Red Cross, likewise, was flying on the walls of the fort +of Salem; and a similar one was displayed in Boston harbor, from the +fortress on Castle Island. + +"I profess, brother Williams," Captain Endicott would say, after they had +been talking of this matter, "it distresses a Christian man’s heart, to +see this idolatrous Cross flying over our heads. A stranger beholding it, +would think that we had undergone all our hardships and dangers, by sea +and in the wilderness, only to get new dominions for the Pope of Rome." + +"Truly, good Mr. Endicott," Roger Williams would answer, "you speak as an +honest man and Protestant Christian should. For mine own part, were it my +business to draw a sword, I should reckon it sinful to fight under such a +banner. Neither can I, in my pulpit, ask the blessing of Heaven upon it." + +Such, probably, was the way in which Roger Williams and John Endicott used +to talk about the banner of the Red Cross. Endicott, who was a prompt and +resolute man, soon determined that Massachusetts, if she could not have a +banner of her own, should at least be delivered from that of the Pope of +Rome. + +Not long afterwards there was a military muster at Salem. Every +able-bodied man, in the town and neighborhood, was there. All were well +armed, with steel caps upon their heads, plates of iron upon their breasts +and at their backs, and gorgets of steel around their necks. When the sun +shone upon these ranks of iron-clad men, they flashed and blazed with a +splendor that bedazzled the wild Indians, who had come out of the woods to +gaze at them. The soldiers had long pikes, swords, and muskets, which were +fired with matches, and were almost as heavy as a small cannon. + +These men had mostly a stern and rigid aspect. To judge by their looks, +you might have supposed that there was as much iron in their hearts, as +there was upon their heads and breasts. They were all devoted Puritans, +and of the same temper as those with whom Oliver Cromwell afterwards +overthrew the throne of England. They hated all the relics of Popish +superstition as much as Endicott himself; and yet, over their heads, was +displayed the banner of the Red Cross. + +Endicott was the captain of the company. While the soldiers were expecting +his orders to begin their exercise, they saw him take the banner in one +hand, holding his drawn sword in the other. Probably he addressed them in +a speech, and explained how horrible a thing it was, that men, who had +fled from Popish idolatry into the wilderness, should be compelled to +fight under its symbols here. Perhaps he concluded his address somewhat in +the following style. + +"And now, fellow soldiers, you see this old banner of England. Some of +you, I doubt not, may think it treason for a man to lay violent hands upon +it. But whether or no it be treason to man, I have good assurance in my +conscience that it is no treason to God. Wherefore I have resolved that we +will rather be God’s soldiers, than soldiers of the Pope of Rome; and in +that mind I now cut the Papal Cross out of this banner." + +And so he did. And thus, in a province belonging to the crown of England, +a captain was found bold enough to deface the King’s banner with his +sword. + +When Winthrop, and the other wise men of Massachusetts, heard of it, they +were disquieted, being afraid that Endicott’s act would bring great +trouble upon himself and them. An account of the matter was carried to +King Charles; but he was then so much engrossed by dissensions with his +people, that he had no leisure to punish the offender. In other times, it +might have cost Endicott his life, and Massachusetts her charter. + + + +"I should like to know, Grandfather," said Laurence, when the story was +ended, "whether, when Endicott cut the Red Cross out of the banner, he +meant to imply that Massachusetts was independent of England?" + +"A sense of the independence of his adopted country, must have been in +that bold man’s heart," answered Grandfather; "but I doubt whether he had +given the matter much consideration, except in its religious bearing. +However, it was a very remarkable affair, and a very strong expression of +Puritan character." + +Grandfather proceeded to speak further of Roger Williams, and of other +persons who sat in the great chair, as will be seen in the following +chapter. + + + + +Chapter IV + + +"Roger Williams," said Grandfather, "did not keep possession of the chair +a great while. His opinions of civil and religious matters differed, in +many respects, from those of the rulers and clergymen of Massachusetts. +Now the wise men of those days believed, that the country could not be +safe, unless all the inhabitants thought and felt alike." + +"Does any body believe so in our days Grandfather?" asked Laurence. + +"Possibly there are some who believe it," said Grandfather; "but they have +not so much power to act upon their belief, as the magistrates and +ministers had, in the days of Roger Williams. They had the power to +deprive this good man of his home, and to send him out from the midst of +them, in search of a new place of rest. He was banished in 1634, and went +first to Plymouth colony; but as the people there held the same opinions +as those of Massachusetts, he was not suffered to remain among them. +However, the wilderness was wide enough; so Roger Williams took his staff +and travelled into the forest, and made treaties with the Indians, and +began a plantation which he called Providence." + +"I have been to Providence on the railroad," said Charley. "It is but a +two hours’ ride." + +"Yes, Charley," replied Grandfather; "but when Roger Williams travelled +thither, over hills and valleys, and through the tangled woods, and across +swamps and streams, it was a journey of several days. Well; his little +plantation is now grown to be a populous city; and the inhabitants have a +great veneration for Roger Williams. His name is familiar in the mouths of +all because they see it on their bank bills. How it would have perplexed +this good clergyman, if he had been told that he should give his name to +the ROGER WILLIAMS BANK!" + +"When he was driven from Massachusetts," said Laurence, "and began his +journey into the woods, he must have felt as if he were burying himself +forever from the sight and knowledge of men. Yet the whole country has now +heard of him, and will remember him forever." + +"Yes," answered Grandfather, "it often happens, that the outcasts of one +generation are those, who are reverenced as the wisest and best of men by +the next. The securest fame is that which comes after a man’s death. But +let us return to our story. When Roger Williams was banished, he appears +to have given the chair to Mrs. Anne Hutchinson. At all events it was in +her possession in 1637. She was a very sharp-witted and well-instructed +lady, and was so conscious of her own wisdom and abilities, that she +thought it a pity that the world should not have the benefit of them. She +therefore used to hold lectures in Boston, once or twice a week, at which +most of the women attended. Mrs. Hutchinson presided at these meetings, +sitting, with great state and dignity, in Grandfather’s chair." + +"Grandfather, was it positively this very chair?" demanded Clara, laying +her hand upon its carved elbow. + +"Why not, my dear Clara?" said Grandfather. "Well; Mrs. Hutchinson’s +lectures soon caused a great disturbance; for the ministers of Boston did +not think it safe and proper, that a woman should publicly instruct the +people in religious doctrines. Moreover, she made the matter worse, by +declaring that the Rev. Mr. Cotton was the only sincerely pious and holy +clergyman in New England. Now the clergy of those days had quite as much +share in the government of the country, though indirectly, as the +magistrates themselves; so you may imagine what a host of powerful enemies +were raised up against Mrs. Hutchinson. A synod was convened; that is to +say, an assemblage of all the ministers in Massachusetts. They declared +that there were eighty-two erroneous opinions on religious subjects, +diffused among the people, and that Mrs. Hutchinson’s opinions were of the +number." + +"If they had eighty-two wrong opinions," observed Charley, "I don’t see +how they could have any right ones." + +"Mrs. Hutchinson had many zealous friends and converts," continued +Grandfather. "She was favored by young Henry Vane, who had come over from +England a year or two before, and had since been chosen governor of the +colony, at the age of twenty-four. But Winthrop, and most of the other +leading men, as well as the ministers, felt an abhorrence of her +doctrines. Thus two opposite parties were formed; and so fierce were the +dissensions, that it was feared the consequence would be civil war and +bloodshed. But Winthrop and the ministers being the most powerful, they +disarmed and imprisoned Mrs. Hutchinson’s adherents. She, like Roger +Williams, was banished." + +"Dear Grandfather, did they drive the poor woman into the woods?" +exclaimed little Alice, who contrived to feel a human interest even in +these discords of polemic divinity. + +"They did, my darling," replied Grandfather; "and the end of her life was +so sad, you must not hear it. At her departure, it appears from the best +authorities, that she gave the great chair to her friend, Henry Vane. He +was a young man of wonderful talents and great learning, who had imbibed +the religious opinions of the Puritans, and left England with the +intention of spending his life in Massachusetts. The people chose him +governor; but the controversy about Mrs. Hutchinson, and other troubles, +caused him to leave the country in 1637. You may read the subsequent +events of his life in the History of England." + +"Yes, Grandfather," cried Laurence; "and we may read them better in Mr. +Upham’s biography of Vane. And what a beautiful death he died, long +afterwards! beautiful, though it was on a scaffold." + +"Many of the most beautiful deaths have been there," said Grandfather. +"The enemies of a great and good man can in no other way make him so +glorious, as by giving him the crown of martyrdom." + +In order that the children might fully understand the all-important +history of the chair, Grandfather now thought fit to speak of the progress +that was made in settling several colonies. The settlement of Plymouth, in +1620, has already been mentioned. In 1635, Mr. Hooker and Mr. Stone, two +ministers, went on foot from Massachusetts to Connecticut, through the +pathless woods, taking their whole congregation along with them. They +founded the town of Hartford. In 1638, Mr. Davenport, a very celebrated +minister, went, with other people, and began a plantation at New Haven. In +the same year, some persons who had been persecuted in Massachusetts, went +to the Isle of Rhodes, since called Rhode Island, and settled there. About +this time, also, many settlers had gone to Maine, and were living without +any regular government. There were likewise settlers near Piscataqua +River, in the region which is now called New Hampshire. + +Thus, at various points along the coast of New England, there were +communities of Englishmen. Though these communities were independent of +one another, yet they had a common dependence upon England; and, at so +vast a distance from their native home, the inhabitants must all have felt +like brethren. They were fitted to become one united people, at a future +period. Perhaps their feelings of brotherhood were the stronger, because +different nations had formed settlements to the north and to the south. In +Canada and Nova Scotia were colonies of French. On the banks of the Hudson +River was a colony of Dutch, who had taken possession of that region many +years before, and called it New Netherlands. + +Grandfather, for aught I know, might have gone on to speak of Maryland and +Virginia; for the good old gentleman really seemed to suppose, that the +whole surface of the United States was not too broad a foundation to place +the four legs of his chair upon. But, happening to glance at Charley, he +perceived that this naughty boy was growing impatient, and meditating +another ride upon a stick. So here, for the present, Grandfather suspended +the history of his chair. + + + + +Chapter V + + +The Children had now learned to look upon the chair with an interest, +which was almost the same as if it were a conscious being, and could +remember the many famous people whom it had held within its arms. + +Even Charley, lawless as he was, seemed to feel that this venerable chair +must not be clambered upon nor overturned, although he had no scruple in +taking such liberties with every other chair in the house. Clara treated +it with still greater reverence, often taking occasion to smooth its +cushion, and to brush the dust from the carved flowers and grotesque +figures of its oaken back and arms. Laurence would sometimes sit a whole +hour, especially at twilight, gazing at the chair, and, by the spell of +his imaginations, summoning up its ancient occupants to appear in it +again. + +Little Alice evidently employed herself in a similar way; for once, when +Grandfather had gone abroad, the child was heard talking with the gentle +Lady Arbella, as if she were still sitting in the chair. So sweet a child +as little Alice may fitly talk with angels, such as the Lady Arbella had +long since become. + +Grandfather was soon importuned for more stories about the chair. He had +no difficulty in relating them; for it really seemed as if every person, +noted in our early history, had, on some occasion or other, found repose +within its comfortable arms. If Grandfather took pride in any thing, it +was in being the possessor of such an honorable and historic elbow chair. + +"I know not precisely who next got possession of the chair, after Governor +Vane went back to England," said Grandfather. "But there is reason to +believe that President Dunster sat in it, when he held the first +commencement at Harvard College. You have often heard, children, how +careful our forefathers were, to give their young people a good education. +They had scarcely cut down trees enough to make room for their own +dwellings, before they began to think of establishing a college. Their +principal object was, to rear up pious and learned ministers; and hence +old writers call Harvard College a school of the prophets." + +"Is the college a school of the prophets now?" asked Charley. + +"It is a long while since I took my degree, Charley. You must ask some of +the recent graduates," answered Grandfather. "As I was telling you, +President Dunster sat in Grandfather’s chair in 1642, when he conferred +the degree of bachelor of arts on nine young men. They were the first in +America, who had received that honor. And now, my dear auditors, I must +confess that there are contradictory statements and some uncertainty about +the adventures of the chair, for a period of almost ten years. Some say +that it was occupied by your own ancestor, William Hawthorne, first +Speaker of the House of Representatives. I have nearly satisfied myself, +however, that, during most of this questionable period, it was literally +the Chair of State. It gives me much pleasure to imagine, that several +successive governors of Massachusetts sat in it at the council board." + +"But, Grandfather," interposed Charley, who was a matter-of-fact little +person, "what reason have you to imagine so?" + +"Pray do imagine it, Grandfather," said Laurence. + +"With Charley’s permission, I will," replied Grandfather, smiling. "Let us +consider it settled, therefore, that Winthrop, Bellingham, Dudley, and +Endicott, each of them, when chosen governor, took his seat in our great +chair on election day. In this chair, likewise, did those excellent +governors preside, while holding consultations with the chief counsellors +of the province, who were styled Assistants. The governor sat in this +chair, too, whenever messages were brought to him from the chamber of +Representatives." + +And here Grandfather took occasion to talk, rather tediously, about the +nature and forms of government that established themselves, almost +spontaneously, in Massachusetts and the other New England colonies. +Democracies were the natural growth of the new world. As to Massachusetts, +it was at first intended that the colony should be governed by a council +in London. But, in a little while, the people had the whole power in their +own hands, and chose annually the governor, the counsellors, and the +representatives. The people of old England had never enjoyed any thing +like the liberties and privileges, which the settlers of New England now +possessed. And they did not adopt these modes of government after long +study, but in simplicity, as if there were no other way for people to be +ruled. + +"But, Laurence," continued Grandfather, "when you want instruction on +these points, you must seek it in Mr. Bancroft’s History. I am merely +telling the history of a chair. To proceed. The period during which the +governors sat in our chair, was not very full of striking incidents. The +province was now established on a secure foundation; but it did not +increase so rapidly as at first, because the Puritans were no longer +driven from England by persecution. However, there was still a quiet and +natural growth. The legislature incorporated towns, and made new purchases +of lands from the Indians. A very memorable event took place in 1643. The +colonies of Massachusetts, Plymouth, Connecticut, and New Haven, formed a +union, for the purpose of assisting each other in difficulties, and for +mutual defence against their enemies. They called themselves the United +Colonies of New England." + +"Were they under a government like that of the United States?" inquired +Laurence. + +"No," replied Grandfather, "the different colonies did not compose one +nation together; it was merely a confederacy among the governments. It +somewhat resembled the league of the Amphictyons, which you remember in +Grecian history. But to return to our chair. In 1644 it was highly +honored; for Governor Endicott sat in it, when he gave audience to an +ambassador from the French governor of Acadie, or Nova Scotia. A treaty of +peace, between Massachusetts and the French colony, was then signed." + +"Did England allow Massachusetts to make war and peace with foreign +countries?" asked Laurence. + +"Massachusetts, and the whole of New England, was then almost independent +of the mother country," said Grandfather. "There was now a civil war in +England; and the king, as you may well suppose, had his hands full at +home, and could pay but little attention to these remote colonies. When +the Parliament got the power into their hands, they likewise had enough to +do in keeping down the Cavaliers. Thus New England, like a young and hardy +lad, whose father and mother neglect it, was left to take care of itself. +In 1649, King Charles was beheaded. Oliver Cromwell then became Protector +of England; and as he was a Puritan himself, and had risen by the valor of +the English Puritans, he showed himself a loving and indulgent father to +the Puritan colonies in America." + +Grandfather might have continued to talk in this dull manner, nobody knows +how long; but, suspecting that Charley would find the subject rather dry, +he looked sideways at that vivacious little fellow, and saw him give an +involuntary yawn. Whereupon, Grandfather proceeded with the history of the +chair, and related a very entertaining incident, which will be found in +the next chapter. + + + + +Chapter VI + + +"According to the most authentic records, my dear children," said +Grandfather, "the chair, about this time, had the misfortune to break its +leg. It was probably on account of this accident, that it ceased to be the +seat of the governors of Massachusetts; for, assuredly, it would have been +ominous of evil to the commonwealth, if the Chair of State had tottered +upon three legs. Being therefore sold at auction,—alas! what a vicissitude +for a chair that had figured in such high company, our venerable friend +was knocked down to a certain Captain John Hull. This old gentleman, on +carefully examining the maimed chair, discovered that its broken leg might +be clamped with iron and made as serviceable as ever." + +"Here is the very leg that was broken!" exclaimed Charley, throwing +himself down on the floor to look at it. "And here are the iron clamps. +How well it was mended!" + +When they had all sufficiently examined the broken leg, Grandfather told +them a story about Captain John Hull and + + + +THE PINE-TREE SHILLINGS + + +The Captain John Hull, aforesaid, was the mint-master of Massachusetts, +and coined all the money that was made there. This was a new line of +business: for, in the earlier days of the colony, the current coinage +consisted of gold and silver money of England, Portugal, and Spain. These +coins being scarce, the people were often forced to barter their +commodities, instead of selling them. + +For instance, if a man wanted to buy a coat, he perhaps exchanged a +bear-skin for it. If he wished for a barrel of molasses, he might purchase +it with a pile of pine boards. Musket-bullets were used instead of +farthings. The Indians had a sort of money, called wampum, which was made +of clam-shells; and this strange sort of specie was likewise taken in +payment of debts, by the English settlers. Bank-bills had never been heard +of. There was not money enough of any kind, in many parts of the country, +to pay the salaries of the ministers; so that they sometimes had to take +quintals of fish, bushels of corn, or cords of wood, instead of silver or +gold. + +As the people grew more numerous, and their trade one with another +increased, the want of current money was still more sensibly felt. To +supply the demand, the general court passed a law for establishing a +coinage of shillings, sixpences, and threepences. Captain John Hull was +appointed to manufacture this money, and was to have about one shilling +out of every twenty to pay him for the trouble of making them. + +Hereupon, all the old silver in the colony was handed over to Captain John +Hull. The battered silver cans and tankards, I suppose, and silver +buckles, and broken spoons, and silver buttons of worn-out coats, and +silver hilts of swords that had figured at court, all such curious old +articles were doubtless thrown into the melting-pot together. But by far +the greater part of the silver consisted of bullion from the mines of +South America, which the English buccaniers—(who were little better than +pirates)—had taken from the Spaniards, and brought to Massachusetts. + +All this old and new silver being melted down and coined, the result was +an immense amount of splendid shillings, sixpences, and threepences. Each +had the date, 1652, on the one side, and the figure of a pine-tree on the +other. Hence they were called pine-tree shillings. And for every twenty +shillings that he coined, you will remember, Captain John Hull was +entitled to put one shilling into his own pocket. + +The magistrates soon began to suspect that the mint-master would have the +best of the bargain. They offered him a large sum of money, if he would +but give up that twentieth shilling, which he was continually dropping +into his own pocket. But Captain Hull declared himself perfectly satisfied +with the shilling. And well he might be; for so diligently did he labor, +that, in a few years, his pockets, his money bags, and his strong box, +were overflowing with pine-tree shillings. This was probably the case when +he came into possession of Grandfather’s chair; and, as he had worked so +hard at the mint, it was certainly proper that he should have a +comfortable chair to rest himself in. + +When the mint-master had grown very rich, a young man, Samuel Sewell by +name, came a courting to his only daughter. His daughter,—whose name I do +not know, but we will call her Betsey,—was a fine hearty damsel, by no +means so slender as some young ladies of our own days. On the contrary, +having always fed heartily on pumpkin pies, doughnuts, Indian puddings, +and other Puritan dainties, she was as round and plump as a pudding +herself. With this round, rosy Miss Betsey, did Samuel Sewell fall in +love. As he was a young man of good character, industrious in his +business, and a member of the church, the mint-master very readily gave +his consent. + +"Yes—you may take her," said he, in his rough way; "and you’ll find her a +heavy burden enough!" + +On the wedding day, we may suppose that honest John Hull dressed himself +in a plum-colored coat, all the buttons of which were made of pine-tree +shillings. The buttons of his waistcoat were sixpences; and the knees of +his smallclothes were buttoned with silver threepences. Thus attired, he +sat with great dignity in Grandfather’s chair; and, being a portly old +gentleman, he completely filled it from elbow to elbow. On the opposite +side of the room, between her bride-maids, sat Miss Betsey. She was +blushing with all her might, and looked like a full blown pæony, or a +great red apple. + +There, too, was the bridegroom, dressed in a fine purple coat, and gold +lace waistcoat, with as much other finery as the Puritan laws and customs +would allow him to put on. His hair was cropped close to his head, because +Governor Endicott had forbidden any man to wear it below the ears. But he +was a very personable young man; and so thought the bride-maids and Miss +Betsey herself. + +The mint-master also was pleased with his new son-in-law; especially as he +had courted Miss Betsey out of pure love, and had said nothing at all +about her portion. So when the marriage ceremony was over, Captain Hull +whispered a word to two of his men-servants, who immediately went out, and +soon returned, lugging in a large pair of scales. They were such a pair as +wholesale merchants use, for weighing bulky commodities; and quite a bulky +commodity was now to be weighed in them. + +"Daughter Betsey," said the mint-master, "get into one side of these +scales." + +Miss Betsey,—or Mrs. Sewell, as we must now call her,—did as she was bid, +like a dutiful child, without any question of the why and wherefore. But +what her father could mean, unless to make her husband pay for her by the +pound, (in which case she would have been a dear bargain,) she had not the +least idea. + +"And now," said honest John Hull to the servants, "bring that box hither." + +The box, to which the mint-master pointed, was a huge, square, iron bound, +oaken chest; it was big enough, my children, for all four of you to play +at hide-and-seek in. The servants tugged with might and main, but could +not lift this enormous receptacle, and were finally obliged to drag it +across the floor. Captain Hull then took a key from his girdle, unlocked +the chest, and lifted its ponderous lid. Behold! it was full to the brim +of bright pine-tree shillings, fresh from the mint; and Samuel Sewell +began to think that his father-in-law had got possession of all the money +in the Massachusetts treasury. But it was only the mint-master’s honest +share of the coinage. + +Then the servants, at Captain Hull’s command, heaped double handfulls of +shillings into one side of the scales, while Betsey remained in the other. +Jingle, jingle, went the shillings, as handful after handful was thrown +in, till, plump and ponderous as she was, they fairly weighed the young +lady from the floor. + +"There, son Sewell!" cried the honest mint-master, resuming his seat in +Grandfather’s chair. "Take these shillings for my daughter’s portion. Use +her kindly, and thank Heaven for her. It is not every wife that’s worth +her weight in silver!" + + + +The children laughed heartily at this legend, and would hardly be +convinced but that Grandfather had made it out of his own head. He assured +them faithfully, however, that he had found it in the pages of a grave +historian, and had merely tried to tell it in a somewhat funnier style. As +for Samuel Sewell, he afterwards became Chief Justice of Massachusetts. + +"Well, Grandfather," remarked Clara, "if wedding portions now-a-days were +paid as Miss Betsey’s was, young ladies would not pride themselves upon an +airy figure as many of them do." + + + + +Chapter VII + + +When his little audience next assembled round the chair, Grandfather gave +them a doleful history of the Quaker persecution, which began in 1656, and +raged for about three years in Massachusetts. + +He told them how, in the first place, twelve of the converts of George +Fox, the first Quaker in the world, had come over from England. They +seemed to be impelled by an earnest love for the souls of men, and a pure +desire to make known what they considered a revelation from Heaven. But +the rulers looked upon them as plotting the downfall of all government and +religion. They were banished from the colony. In a little while, however, +not only the first twelve had returned, but a multitude of other Quakers +had come to rebuke the rulers, and to preach against the priests and +steeple-houses. + +Grandfather described the hatred and scorn with which these enthusiasts +were received. They were thrown into dungeons; they were beaten with many +stripes, women as well as men; they were driven forth into the wilderness, +and left to the tender mercies of wild beasts and Indians. The children +were amazed to hear, that, the more the Quakers were scourged, and +imprisoned, and banished, the more did the sect increase, both by the +influx of strangers, and by converts from among the Puritans. But +Grandfather told them, that God had put something into the soul of man, +which always turned the cruelties of the persecutor to nought. + +He went on to relate, that, in 1659, two Quakers, named William Robinson +and Marmaduke Stephenson, were hanged at Boston. A woman had been +sentenced to die with them, but was reprieved, on condition of her leaving +the colony. Her name was Mary Dyer. In the year 1660 she returned to +Boston, although she knew death awaited her there; and, if Grandfather had +been correctly informed, an incident had then taken place, which connects +her with our story. This Mary Dyer had entered the mint-master’s dwelling, +clothed in sackcloth and ashes, and seated herself in our great chair, +with a sort of dignity and state. Then she proceeded to deliver what she +called a message from Heaven; but in the midst of it, they dragged her to +prison. + +"And was she executed?" asked Laurence. + +"She was," said Grandfather. + +"Grandfather," cried Charley, clenching his fist, "I would have fought for +that poor Quaker woman!" + +"Ah! but if a sword had been drawn for her," said Laurence, "it would have +taken away all the beauty of her death." + +It seemed as if hardly any of the preceding stories had thrown such an +interest around Grandfather’s chair, as did the fact, that the poor, +persecuted, wandering Quaker woman had rested in it for a moment. The +children were so much excited, that Grandfather found it necessary to +bring his account of the persecution to a close. + +"In 1660, the same year in which Mary Dyer was executed," said he, +"Charles the Second was restored to the throne of his fathers. This king +had many vices; but he would not permit blood to be shed, under pretence +of religion, in any part of his dominions. The Quakers in England told him +what had been done to their brethren in Massachusetts; and he sent orders +to Governor Endicott to forbear all such proceedings in future. And so +ended the Quaker persecution,—one of the most mournful passages in the +history of our forefathers." + +Grandfather then told his auditors, that, shortly after the above +incident, the great chair had been given by the mint-master to the Rev. +Mr. John Eliot. He was the first minister of Roxbury. But besides +attending to his pastoral duties there, he learned the language of the red +men, and often went into the woods to preach to them. So earnestly did he +labor for their conversion, that he has always been called the apostle to +the Indians. The mention of this holy man suggested to Grandfather the +propriety of giving a brief sketch of the history of the Indians, so far +as they were connected with the English colonists. + +A short period before the arrival of the first Pilgrims at Plymouth, there +had been a very grievous plague among the red men; and the sages and +ministers of that day were inclined to the opinion, that Providence had +sent this mortality, in order to make room for the settlement of the +English. But I know not why we should suppose that an Indian’s life is +less precious, in the eye of Heaven, than that of a white man. Be that as +it may, death had certainly been very busy with the savage tribes. + +In many places the English found the wigwams deserted, and the corn-fields +growing to waste, with none to harvest the grain. There were heaps of +earth also, which, being dug open, proved to be Indian graves, containing +bows and flint-headed spears and arrows; for the Indians buried the dead +warrior’s weapons along with him. In some spots, there were skulls and +other human bones, lying unburied. In 1633, and the year afterwards, the +smallpox broke out among the Massachusetts Indians, multitudes of whom +died by this terrible disease of the old world. These misfortunes made +them far less powerful than they had formerly been. + +For nearly half a century after the arrival of the English, the red men +showed themselves generally inclined to peace and amity. They often made +submission, when they might have made successful war. The Plymouth +settlers, led by the famous Captain Miles Standish, slew some of them in +1623, without any very evident necessity for so doing. In 1636, and the +following year, there was the most dreadful war that had yet occurred +between the Indians and the English. The Connecticut settlers, assisted by +a celebrated Indian chief, named Uncas, bore the brunt of this war, with +but little aid from Massachusetts. Many hundreds of the hostile Indians +were slain, or burnt in their wigwams. Sassacus, their sachem, fled to +another tribe, after his own people were defeated; but he was murdered by +them, and his head was sent to his English enemies. + +From that period, down to the time of King Philip’s war, which will be +mentioned hereafter, there was not much trouble with the Indians. But the +colonists were always on their guard, and kept their weapons ready for the +conflict. + +"I have sometimes doubted," said Grandfather, when he had told these +things to the children, "I have sometimes doubted whether there was more +than a single man, among our forefathers, who realized that an Indian +possesses a mind and a heart, and an immortal soul. That single man was +John Eliot. All the rest of the early settlers seemed to think that the +Indians were an inferior race of beings, whom the Creator had merely +allowed to keep possession of this beautiful country, till the white men +should be in want of it. + +"Did the pious men of those days never try to make Christians of them?" +asked Laurence. + +"Sometimes, it is true," answered Grandfather, "the magistrates and +ministers would talk about civilizing and converting the red people. But, +at the bottom of their hearts, they would have had almost as much +expectation of civilizing a wild bear of the woods, and making him fit for +paradise. They felt no faith in the success of any such attempts, because +they had no love for the poor Indians. Now Eliot was full of love for +them, and therefore so full of faith and hope, that he spent the labor of +a lifetime in their behalf." + +"I would have conquered them first, and then converted them," said +Charley. + +"Ah, Charley, there spoke the very spirit of our forefathers!" replied +Grandfather. "But Mr. Eliot had a better spirit. He looked upon them as +his brethren. He persuaded as many of them as he could, to leave off their +idle and wandering habits, and to build houses, and cultivate the earth, +as the English did. He established schools among them, and taught many of +the Indians how to read. He taught them, likewise, how to pray. Hence they +were called ’praying Indians.’ Finally, having spent the best years of his +life for their good, Mr. Eliot resolved to spend the remainder in doing +them a yet greater benefit." + +"I know what that was!" cried Laurence. + +"He sat down in his study," continued Grandfather, "and began a +translation of the Bible into the Indian tongue. It was while he was +engaged in this pious work, that the mint-master gave him our great chair. +His toil needed it, and deserved it." + +"O, Grandfather, tell us all about that Indian Bible!" exclaimed Laurence. +"I have seen it in the library of the Athenæum; and the tears came into my +eyes, to think that there were no Indians left to read it." + + + + +Chapter VIII + + +As Grandfather was a great admirer of the Apostle Eliot, he was glad to +comply with the earnest request which Laurence had made, at the close of +the last chapter. So he proceeded to describe how good Mr. Eliot labored, +while he was at work upon + + + +THE INDIAN BIBLE + + +My dear children, what a task would you think it, even with a long +lifetime before you, were you bidden to copy every chapter and verse, and +word, in yonder great family Bible! Would not this be a heavy toil? But if +the task were, not to write off the English Bible, but to learn a +language, utterly unlike all other tongues,—a language which hitherto had +never been learned, except by the Indians themselves, from their mothers’ +lips,—a language never written, and the strange words of which seemed +inexpressible by letters;—if the task were, first, to learn this new +variety of speech, and then to translate the Bible into it, and to do it +so carefully, that not one idea throughout the holy book should be +changed,—what would induce you to undertake this toil? Yet this was what +the Apostle Eliot did. + +It was a mighty work for a man, now growing old, to take upon himself. And +what earthly reward could he expect from it? None; no reward on earth. But +he believed that the red men were the descendants of those lost tribes of +Israel of whom history has been able to tell us nothing, for thousands of +years. He hoped that God had sent the English across the ocean, Gentiles +as they were, to enlighten this benighted portion of his once chosen race. +And when he should be summoned hence, he trusted to meet blessed spirits +in another world, whose bliss would have been earned by his patient toil, +in translating the Word of God. This hope and trust were far dearer to +him, than any thing that earth could offer. + +Sometimes, while thus at work, he was visited by learned men, who desired +to know what literary undertaking Mr. Elliot had in hand. They, like +himself, had been bred in the studious cloisters of a university, and were +supposed to possess all the erudition which mankind has hoarded up from +age to age. Greek and Latin were as familiar to them as the babble of +their childhood. Hebrew was like their mother tongue. They had grown gray +in study; their eyes were bleared with poring over print and manuscript by +the light of the midnight lamp. + +And yet, how much had they left unlearned! Mr. Eliot would put into their +hands some of the pages, which he had been writing; and behold! the +gray-headed men stammered over the long, strange words, like a little +child in his first attempts to read. Then would the apostle call to him an +Indian boy, one of his scholars, and show him the manuscript, which had so +puzzled the learned Englishmen. + +"Read this, my child," said he, "these are some brethren of mine, who +would fain hear the sound of thy native tongue." + +Then would the Indian boy cast his eyes over the mysterious page, and read +it so skilfully, that it sounded like wild music. It seemed as if the +forest leaves were singing in the ears of his auditors, and as if the roar +of distant streams were poured through the young Indian’s voice. Such were +the sounds amid which the language of the red man had been formed; and +they were still heard to echo in it. + +The lesson being over, Mr. Eliot would give the Indian boy an apple or a +cake, and bid him leap forth into the open air, which his free nature +loved. The apostle was kind to children, and even shared in their sports, +sometimes. And when his visitors had bidden him farewell, the good man +turned patiently to his toil again. + +No other Englishman had ever understood the Indian character so well, nor +possessed so great an influence over the New England tribes, as the +apostle did. His advice and assistance must often have been valuable to +his countrymen, in their transactions with the Indians. Occasionally, +perhaps, the governor and some of the counsellors came to visit Mr. Eliot. +Perchance they were seeking some method to circumvent the forest people. +They inquired, it may be, how they could obtain possession of such and +such a tract of their rich land. Or they talked of making the Indians +their servants, as if God had destined them for perpetual bondage to the +more powerful white man. + +Perhaps, too, some warlike captain, dressed in his buff-coat, with a +corslet beneath it, accompanied the governor and counsellors. Laying his +hand upon his sword hilt, he would declare, that the only method of +dealing with the red men was to meet them with the sword drawn, and the +musket presented. + +But the apostle resisted both the craft of the politician, and the +fierceness of the warrior. + +"Treat these sons of the forest as men and brethren," he would say, "and +let us endeavor to make them Christians. Their forefathers were of that +chosen race, whom God delivered from Egyptian bondage. Perchance he has +destined us to deliver the children from the more cruel bondage of +ignorance and idolatry. Chiefly for this end, it may be, we were directed +across the ocean." + +When these other visitors were gone, Mr. Eliot bent himself again over the +half written page. He dared hardly relax a moment from his toil. He felt +that, in the book which he was translating, there was a deep human, as +well as heavenly wisdom, which would of itself suffice to civilize and +refine the savage tribes. Let the Bible be diffused among them, and all +earthly good would follow. But how slight a consideration was this, when +he reflected that the eternal welfare of a whole race of men depended upon +his accomplishment of the task which he had set himself! What if his hands +should be palsied? What if his mind should lose its vigor? What if death +should come upon him, ere the work were done? Then must the red man wander +in the dark wilderness of heathenism for ever. + +Impelled by such thoughts as these, he sat writing in the great chair, +when the pleasant summer breeze came in through his open casement; and +also when the fire of forest logs sent up its blaze and smoke, through the +broad stone chimney, into the wintry air. Before the earliest bird sang, +in the morning, the apostle’s lamp was kindled; and, at midnight, his +weary head was not yet upon its pillow. And at length, leaning back in the +great chair, he could say to himself, with a holy triumph,—"The work is +finished!" + +It was finished. Here was a Bible for the Indians. Those long lost +descendants of the ten tribes of Israel would now learn the history of +their forefathers. That grace, which the ancient Israelites had forfeited, +was offered anew to their children. + +There is no impiety in believing that, when his long life was over, the +apostle of the Indians was welcomed to the celestial abodes by the +prophets of ancient days, and by those earliest apostles and evangelists, +who had drawn their inspiration from the immediate presence of the +Saviour. They first had preached truth and salvation to the world. And +Eliot, separated from them by many centuries, yet full of the same spirit, +had borne the like message to the new world of the West. Since the first +days of Christianity, there has been no man more worthy to be numbered in +the brotherhood of the apostles, than Eliot. + + + +"My heart is not satisfied to think," observed Laurence, "that Mr. Eliot’s +labors have done no good, except to a few Indians of his own time. +Doubtless, he would not have regretted his toil, if it were the means of +saving but a single soul. But it is a grievous thing to me, that he should +have toiled so hard to translate the Bible, and now the language and the +people are gone! The Indian Bible itself is almost the only relic of +both." + +"Laurence," said his Grandfather, "if ever you should doubt that man is +capable of disinterested zeal for his brother’s good, then remember how +the apostle Eliot toiled. And if you should feel your own self-interest +pressing upon your heart too closely, then think of Eliot’s Indian Bible. +It is good for the world that such a man has lived, and left this emblem +of his life." + +The tears gushed into the eyes of Laurence, and he acknowledged that Eliot +had not toiled in vain. Little Alice put up her arms to Grandfather, and +drew down his white head beside her own golden locks. + +"Grandfather," whispered she, "I want to kiss good Mr. Eliot!" + +And, doubtless, good Mr. Eliot would gladly receive the kiss of so sweet a +child as little Alice, and would think it a portion of his reward in +heaven. + +Grandfather now observed, that Dr. Francis had written a very beautiful +Life of Eliot, which he advised Laurence to peruse. He then spoke of King +Philip’s war, which began in 1675, and terminated with the death of King +Philip, in the following year. Philip was a proud, fierce Indian, whom Mr. +Eliot had vainly endeavored to convert to the Christian faith. + +"It must have been a great anguish to the apostle," continued Grandfather, +"to hear of mutual slaughter and outrage between his own countrymen, and +those for whom he felt the affection of a father. A few of the praying +Indians joined the followers of King Philip. A greater number fought on +the side of the English. In the course of the war, the little community of +red people whom Mr. Eliot had begun to civilize, was scattered, and +probably never was restored to a flourishing condition. But his zeal did +not grow cold; and only about five years before his death he took great +pains in preparing a new edition of the Indian Bible." + +"I do wish Grandfather," cried Charley, "you would tell us all about the +battles in King Philip’s war." + +"O, no!" exclaimed Clara. "Who wants to hear about tomahawks and scalping +knives!" + +"No, Charley," replied Grandfather, "I have no time to spare in talking +about battles. You must be content with knowing that it was the bloodiest +war that the Indians had ever waged against the white men; and that, at +its close, the English set King Philip’s head upon a pole." + +"Who was the captain of the English?" asked Charley. + +"Their most noted captain was Benjamin Church,—a very famous warrior," +said Grandfather. "But I assure you, Charley, that neither Captain Church, +nor any of the officers and soldiers who fought in King Philip’s war, did +any thing a thousandth part so glorious, as Mr. Eliot did, when he +translated the Bible for the Indians." + +"Let Laurence be the apostle," said Charley to himself, "and I will be the +captain." + + + + +Chapter IX + + +The children were now accustomed to assemble round Grandfather’s chair, at +all their unoccupied moments; and often it was a striking picture to +behold the white-headed old sire, with this flowery wreath of young people +around him. When he talked to them, it was the past speaking to the +present,—or rather to the future, for the children were of a generation +which had not become actual. Their part in life, thus far, was only to be +happy, and to draw knowledge from a thousand sources. As yet, it was not +their time to do. + +Sometimes, as Grandfather gazed at their fair, unworldly countenances, a +mist of tears bedimmed his spectacles. He almost regretted that it was +necessary for them to know any thing of the past, or to provide aught for +the future. He could have wished that they might be always the happy, +youthful creatures, who had hitherto sported around his chair, without +inquiring whether it had a history. It grieved him to think that his +little Alice, who was a flower-bud fresh from paradise, must open her +leaves to the rough breezes of the world, or ever open them in any clime. +So sweet a child she was, that it seemed fit her infancy should be +immortal! + +But such repinings were merely flitting shadows across the old man’s +heart. He had faith enough to believe, and wisdom enough to know, that the +bloom of the flower would be even holier and happier than its bud. Even +within himself,—though Grandfather was now at that period of life, when +the veil of mortality is apt to hang heavily over the soul,—still, in his +inmost being, he was conscious of something that he would not have +exchanged for the best happiness of childhood. It was a bliss to which +every sort of earthly experience,—all that he had enjoyed or suffered, or +seen, or heard, or acted, with the broodings of his soul upon the +whole,—had contributed somewhat. In the same manner must a bliss, of which +now they could have no conception, grow up within these children, and form +a part of their sustenance for immortality. + +So Grandfather, with renewed cheerfulness, continued his history of the +chair, trusting that a profounder wisdom than his own would extract, from +these flowers and weeds of Time, a fragrance that might last beyond all +time. + +At this period of the story, Grandfather threw a glance backward, as far +as the year 1660. He spoke of the ill-concealed reluctance with which the +Puritans in America had acknowledged the sway of Charles the Second, on +his restoration to his father’s throne. When death had stricken Oliver +Cromwell, that mighty protector had no sincerer mourners than in New +England. The new king had been more than a year upon the throne before his +accession was proclaimed in Boston; although the neglect to perform the +ceremony might have subjected the rulers to the charge of treason. + +During the reign of Charles the Second, however, the American colonies had +but little reason to complain of harsh or tyrannical treatment. But when +Charles died, in 1685, and was succeeded by his brother James, the +patriarchs of New England began to tremble. King James was a bigoted Roman +Catholic, and was known to be of an arbitrary temper. It was feared by all +Protestants, and chiefly by the Puritians, that he would assume despotic +power, and attempt to establish Popery throughout his dominions. Our +forefathers felt that they had no security either for their religion or +their liberties. + +The result proved that they had reason for their apprehensions. King James +caused the charters of all the American colonies to be taken away. The old +charter of Massachusetts, which the people regarded as a holy thing, and +as the foundation of all their liberties, was declared void. The colonists +were now no longer freemen; they were entirely dependent on the king’s +pleasure. At first, in 1685, King James appointed Joseph Dudley, a native +of Massachusetts, to be president of New England. But soon afterwards, Sir +Edmund Andros, an officer of the English army, arrived, with a commission +to be governor-general of New England and New York. + +The king had given such powers to Sir Edmund Andros, that there was now no +liberty, nor scarcely any law, in the colonies over which he ruled. The +inhabitants were not allowed to choose representatives, and consequently +had no voice whatever in the government, nor control over the measures +that were adopted. The counsellors, with whom the governor consulted on +matters of state, were appointed by himself. This sort of government was +no better than an absolute despotism. + +"The people suffered much wrong, while Sir Edmund Andros ruled over them," +continued Grandfather, "and they were apprehensive of much more. He had +brought some soldiers with him from England, who took possession of the +old fortress on Castle Island, and of the fortification on Fort Hill. +Sometimes it was rumored that a general massacre of the inhabitants was to +be perpetrated by these soldiers. There were reports, too, that all the +ministers were to be slain or imprisoned." + +"For what?" inquired Charley. + +"Because they were the leaders of the people, Charley," said Grandfather. +"A minister was a more formidable man than a general, in those days. Well; +while these things were going on in America, King James had so misgoverned +the people of England, that they sent over to Holland for the Prince of +Orange. He had married the king’s daughter, and was therefore considered +to have a claim to the crown. On his arrival in England, the Prince of +Orange was proclaimed king, by the name of William the Third. Poor old +King James made his escape to France." + +Grandfather told how, at the first intelligence of the landing of the +Prince of Orange in England, the people of Massachusetts rose in their +strength, and overthrew the government of Sir Edmund Andros. He, with +Joseph Dudley, Edmund Randolph, and his other principal adherents, were +thrown into prison. Old Simon Bradstreet, who had been governor, when King +James took away the charter, was called by the people to govern them +again. + +"Governor Bradstreet was a venerable old man, nearly ninety years of age," +said Grandfather. "He came over with the first settlers, and had been the +intimate companion of all those excellent and famous men who laid the +foundation of our country. They were all gone before him to the grave; and +Bradstreet was the last of the Puritans." + +Grandfather paused a moment, and smiled, as if he had something very +interesting to tell his auditors. He then proceeded: + +"And now, Laurence,—now, Clara,—now, Charley,—now, my dear little +Alice,—what chair do you think had been placed in the council chamber, for +old Governor Bradstreet to take his seat in? Would you believe that it was +this very chair in which grandfather now sits, and of which he is telling +you the history?" + +"I am glad to hear it, with all my heart!" cried Charley, after a shout of +delight. "I thought Grandfather had quite forgotten the chair." + +"It was a solemn and affecting sight," said Grandfather, "when this +venerable patriarch, with his white beard flowing down upon his breast, +took his seat in his Chair of State. Within his remembrance, and even +since his mature age, the site where now stood the populous town, had been +a wild and forest-covered peninsula. The province, now so fertile, and +spotted with thriving villages, had been a desert wilderness. He was +surrounded by a shouting multitude, most of whom had been born in the +country which he had helped to found. They were of one generation, and he +of another. As the old man looked upon them, and beheld new faces +everywhere, he must have felt that it was now time for him to go, whither +his brethren had gone before him." + +"Were the former governors all dead and gone?" asked Laurence. + +"All of them," replied Grandfather. "Winthrop had been dead forty years. +Endicott died, a very old man, in 1665. Sir Henry Vane was beheaded in +London, at the beginning of the reign of Charles the Second. And Haynes, +Dudley, Bellingham and Leverett, who had all been governors of +Massachusetts, were now likewise in their graves. Old Simon Bradstreet was +the sole representative of that departed brotherhood. There was no other +public man remaining to connect the ancient system of government and +manners with the new system, which was about to take its place. The era of +the Puritans was now completed." + +"I am sorry for it," observed Laurence; "for, though they were so stern, +yet it seems to me that there was something warm and real about them. I +think, Grandfather, that each of these old governors should have his +statue set up in our State House, sculptured out of the hardest of New +England granite." + +"It would not be amiss, Laurence," said Grandfather; "but perhaps clay, or +some other perishable material, might suffice for some of their +successors. But let us go back to our chair. It was occupied by Governor +Bradstreet from April, 1689, until May, 1692. Sir William Phips then +arrived in Boston, with a new charter from King William, and a commission +to be governor." + + + + +Chapter X + + +"And what became of the chair," inquired Clara. + +"The outward aspect of our chair," replied Grandfather, "was now somewhat +the worse for its long and arduous services. It was considered hardly +magnificent enough to be allowed to keep its place in the council chamber +of Massachusetts. In fact, it was banished as an article of useless +lumber. But Sir William Phips happened to see it and being much pleased +with its construction, resolved to take the good old chair into his +private mansion. Accordingly, with his own gubernatorial hands, he +repaired one of its arms, which had been slightly damaged". + +"Why, Grandfather, here is the very arm!" interrupted Charley, in great +wonderment. "And did Sir William Phips put in these screws with his own +hands? I am sure, he did it beautifully! But how came a governor to know +how to mend a chair?" + +"I will tell you a story about the early life of Sir William Phips," said +Grandfather. "You will then perceive, that he well knew how to use his +hands." + +So Grandfather related the wonderful and true tale of + + + +THE SUNKEN TREASURE + + +Picture to yourselves, my dear children, a handsome, old-fashioned room, +with a large, open cupboard at one end, in which is displayed a +magnificent gold cup, with some other splendid articles of gold and silver +plate. In another part of the room, opposite to a tall looking-glass, +stands our beloved chair, newly polished, and adorned with a gorgeous +cushion of crimson velvet tufted with gold. + +In the chair sits a man of strong and sturdy frame, whose face has been +roughened by northern tempests, and blackened by the burning sun of the +West Indies. He wears an immense periwig, flowing down over his shoulders. +His coat has a wide embroidery of golden foliage; and his waistcoat, +likewise, is all flowered over and bedizened with gold. His red, rough +hands, which have done many a good day’s work with the hammer and adze, +are half covered by the delicate lace ruffles at his wrists. On a table +lies his silver-hilted sword, and in a corner of the room stands his +gold-headed cane, made of a beautifully polished West Indian wood. + +Somewhat such an aspect as this, did Sir William Phips present, when he +sat in Grandfather’s chair, after the king had appointed him governor of +Massachusetts. Truly, there was need that the old chair should be +varnished, and decorated with a crimson cushion, in order to make it +suitable for such a magnificent looking personage. + +But Sir William Phips had not always worn a gold embroidered coat, nor +always sat so much at his ease as he did in Grandfather’s chair. He was a +poor man’s son, and was born in the province of Maine, where he used to +tend sheep upon the hills, in his boyhood and youth. Until he had grown to +be a man, he did not even know how to read and write. Tired of tending +sheep, he next apprenticed himself to a ship-carpenter, and spent about +four years in hewing the crooked limbs of oak trees into knees for +vessels. + +In 1673, when he was twenty-two years old, he came to Boston, and soon +afterwards was married to a widow lady, who had property enough to set him +up in business. It was not long, however, before he lost all the money +that he had acquired by his marriage, and became a poor man again. Still, +he was not discouraged. He often told his wife that, some time or other, +he should be very rich, and would build a "fair brick house" in the Green +Lane of Boston. + +Do not suppose, children, that he had been to a fortune-teller to inquire +his destiny. It was his own energy and spirit of enterprise, and his +resolution to lead an industrious life, that made him look forward with so +much confidence to better days. + +Several years passed away; and William Phips had not yet gained the riches +which he promised to himself. During this time he had begun to follow the +sea for a living. In the year 1684, he happened to hear of a Spanish ship, +which had been cast away near the Bahama Islands, and which was supposed +to contain a great deal of gold and silver. Phips went to the place in a +small vessel, hoping that he should be able to recover some of the +treasure from the wreck. He did not succeed, however, in fishing up gold +and silver enough to pay the expenses of his voyage. + +But, before he returned, he was told of another Spanish ship or galleon, +which had been cast away near Porto de la Plata. She had now lain as much +as fifty years beneath the waves. This old ship had been laden with +immense wealth; and, hitherto, nobody had thought of the possibility of +recovering any part of it from the deep sea, which was rolling and tossing +it about. But though it was now an old story, and the most aged people had +almost forgotten that such a vessel had been wrecked. William Phips +resolved that the sunken treasure should again be brought to light. + +He went to London, and obtained admittance to King James, who had not yet +been driven from his throne. He told the king of the vast wealth that was +lying at the bottom of the sea. King James listened with attention, and +thought this a fine opportunity to fill his treasury with Spanish gold. He +appointed William Phips to be captain of a vessel, called the Rose Algier, +carrying eighteen guns and ninety-five men. So now he was Captain Phips of +the English navy. + +Captain Phips sailed from England in the Rose Algier, and cruised for +nearly two years in the West Indies, endeavoring to find the wreck of the +Spanish ship. But the sea is so wide and deep, that it is no easy matter +to discover the exact spot where a sunken vessel lies. The prospect of +success seemed very small; and most people would have thought that Captain +Phips was as far from having money enough to build a "fair brick house," +as he was while he tended sheep. + +The seamen of the Rose Algier became discouraged, and gave up all hope of +making their fortunes by discovering the Spanish wreck. They wanted to +compel Captain Phips to turn pirate. There was a much better prospect, +they thought, of growing rich by plundering vessels, which still sailed +the sea, than by seeking for a ship that had lain beneath the waves full +half a century. They broke out in open mutiny, but were finally mastered +by Phips, and compelled to obey his orders. It would have been dangerous, +however, to continue much longer at sea with such a crew of mutinous +sailors; and, besides, the Rose Algier was leaky and unseaworthy. So +Captain Phips judged it best to return to England. + +Before leaving the West Indies, he met with a Spaniard, an old man, who +remembered the wreck of the Spanish ship, and gave him directions how to +find the very spot. It was on a reef of rocks a few leagues from Porto de +la Plata. + +On his arrival in England, therefore, Captain Phips solicited the king to +let him have another vessel, and send him back again to the West Indies. +But King James, who had probably expected that the Rose Algier would +return laden with gold, refused to have any thing more to do with the +affair. Phips might never have been able to renew the search, if the Duke +of Albemarle, and some other noblemen had not lent their assistance. They +fitted out a ship and gave the command to Captain Phips. He sailed from +England, and arrived safely at Porto de la Plata, where he took an adze +and assisted his men to build a large boat. + +The boat was intended for the purpose of going closer to the reef of rocks +than a large vessel could safely venture. When it was finished, the +Captain sent several men in it, to examine the spot where the Spanish ship +was said to have been wrecked. They were accompanied by some Indians, who +were skilful divers, and could go down a great way into the depths of the +sea. + +The boat’s crew proceeded to the reef of rocks, and rowed round and round +it, a great many times. They gazed down into the water, which was so +transparent that it seemed as if they could have seen the gold and silver +at the bottom, had there been any of those precious metals there. Nothing, +however, could they see; nothing more valuable than a curious sea shrub, +which was growing beneath the water, in a crevice of the reef of rocks. It +flaunted to and fro with the swell and reflux of the waves, and looked as +bright and beautiful as if its leaves were gold. + +"We won’t go back empty-handed," cried an English sailor; and then he +spoke to one of the Indian divers. "Dive down and bring me that pretty sea +shrub there. That’s the only treasure we shall find!" + +Down plunged the diver, and soon rose dripping from the water, holding the +sea shrub in his hand. But he had learnt some news at the bottom of the +sea. + +"There are some ship’s guns," said he, the moment he had drawn breath, +"some great cannon among the rocks, near where the shrub was growing." + +No sooner had he spoken, than the English sailors knew that they had found +the very spot where the Spanish galleon had been wrecked so many years +before. The other Indian divers immediately plunged over the boat’s side, +and swam headlong down, groping among the rocks and sunken cannon. In a +few moments one of them rose above the water, with a heavy lump of silver +in his arms. That single lump was worth more than a thousand dollars. The +sailors took it into the boat, and then rowed back as speedily as they +could, being in haste to inform Captain Phips of their good luck. + +But, confidently as the Captain had hoped to find the Spanish wreck, yet +now that it was really found, the news seemed too good to be true. He +could not believe it till the sailors showed him the lump of silver. + +"Thanks be to God!" then cries Captain Phips. "We shall every man of us +make our fortunes!" + +Hereupon the Captain and all the crew set to work, with iron rakes and +great hooks and lines, fishing for gold and silver at the bottom of the +sea. Up came the treasure in abundance. Now they beheld a table of solid +silver, once the property of an old Spanish Grandee. Now they found a +sacramental vessel, which had been destined as a gift to some Catholic +church. Now they drew up a golden cup, fit for the king of Spain to drink +his wine out of. Perhaps the bony hand of its former owner had been +grasping the precious cup, and was drawn up along with it. Now their rakes +or fishing lines were loaded with masses of silver bullion. There were +also precious stones among the treasure, glittering and sparkling, so that +it is a wonder how their radiance could have been concealed. + +There is something sad and terrible in the idea of snatching all this +wealth from the devouring ocean, which had possessed it for such a length +of years. It seems as if men had no right to make themselves rich with it. +It ought to have been left with the skeletons of the ancient Spaniards, +who had been drowned when the ship was wrecked, and whose bones were now +scattered among the gold and silver. + +But Captain Phips and his crew were troubled with no such thoughts as +these. After a day or two they lighted on another part of the wreck, where +they found a great many bags of silver dollars. But nobody could have +guessed that these were money-bags. By remaining so long in the +salt-water, they had become covered over with a crust which had the +appearance of stone, so that it was necessary to break them in pieces with +hammers and axes. When this was done, a stream of silver dollars gushed +out upon the deck of the vessel. + +The whole value of the recovered treasure, plate, bullion, precious +stones, and all, was estimated at more than two millions of dollars. It +was dangerous even to look at such a vast amount of wealth. A sea captain, +who had assisted Phips in the enterprise, utterly lost his reason at the +sight of it. He died two years afterwards, still raving about the +treasures that lie at the bottom of the sea. It would have been better for +this man, if he had left the skeletons of the shipwrecked Spaniards in +quiet possession of their wealth. + +Captain Phips and his men continued to fish up plate, bullion, and +dollars, as plentifully as ever, till their provisions grew short. Then, +as they could not feed upon gold and silver any more than old King Midas +could, they found it necessary to go in search of better sustenance. Phips +resolved to return to England. He arrived there in 1687, and was received +with great joy by the Duke of Albemarle and the other English lords, who +had fitted out the vessel. Well they might rejoice; for they took by far +the greater part of the treasure to themselves. + +The Captain’s share, however, was enough to make him comfortable for the +rest of his days. It also enabled him to fulfil his promise to his wife, +by building a "fair brick house," in the Green Lane of Boston. The Duke of +Albemarle sent Mrs. Phips a magnificent gold cup, worth at least five +thousand dollars. Before Captain Phips left London, King James made him a +knight; so that, instead of the obscure ship-carpenter who had formerly +dwelt among them, the inhabitants of Boston welcomed him on his return, as +the rich and famous Sir William Phips. + + + + +Chapter XI + + +"Sir William Phips," continued Grandfather, "was too active and +adventurous a man to sit still in the quiet enjoyment of his good fortune. +In the year 1690, he went on a military expedition against the French +colonies in America, conquered the whole province of Acadie, and returned +to Boston with a great deal of plunder." + +"Why, grandfather, he was the greatest man that ever sat in the chair!" +cried Charley. + +"Ask Laurence what he thinks," replied Grandfather with a smile. "Well; in +the same year, Sir William took command of an expedition against Quebec, +but did not succeed in capturing the city. In 1692, being then in London, +King William the Third appointed him governor of Massachusetts. And now, +my dear children, having followed Sir William Phips through all his +adventures and hardships, till we find him comfortably seated in +Grandfather’s chair, we will here bid him farewell. May he be as happy in +ruling a people, as he was while he tended sheep!" + +Charley, whose fancy had been greatly taken by the adventurous disposition +of Sir William Phips, was eager to know how he had acted, and what +happened to him while he held the office of governor. But Grandfather had +made up his mind to tell no more stories for the present. + +"Possibly, one of these days, I may go on with the adventures of the +chair," said he. "But its history becomes very obscure just at this point; +and I must search into some old books and manuscripts, before proceeding +further. Besides, it is now a good time to pause in our narrative; because +the new charter, which Sir William Phips brought over from England, formed +a very important epoch in the history of the province." + +"Really, Grandfather," observed Laurence, "this seems to be the most +remarkable chair in the world. Its history cannot be told without +intertwining it with the lives of distinguished men, and the great events +that have befallen the country." + +"True, Laurence," replied Grandfather, smiling, "We must write a book, +with some such title as this,—MEMOIRS OF MY OWN TIMES, BY GRANDFATHER’S +CHAIR." + +"That would be beautiful!" exclaimed Laurence, clapping his hands. + +"But, after all," continued Grandfather, "any other old chair, if it +possessed memory, and a hand to write its recollections, could record +stranger stories than any that I have told you. From generation to +generation, a chair sits familiarly in the midst of human interests, and +is witness to the most secret and confidential intercourse, that mortal +man can hold with his fellow. The human heart may best be read in the +fireside chair. And as to external events, Grief and Joy keep a continual +vicissitude around it and within it. Now we see the glad face and glowing +form of Joy, sitting merrily in the old chair, and throwing a warm +fire-light radiance over all the household. Now, while we thought not of +it, the dark clad mourner, Grief, has stolen into the place of Joy, but +not to retain it long. The imagination can hardly grasp so wide a subject, +as is embraced in the experience of a family chair." + +"It makes my breath flutter,—my heart thrill,—to think of it," said +Laurence. "Yes; a family chair must have a deeper history than a Chair of +State." + +"O, yes!" cried Clara, expressing a woman’s feeling on the point in +question, "The history of a country is not nearly so interesting as that +of a single family would be." + +"But the history of a country is more easily told," said Grandfather. "So, +if we proceed with our narrative of the chair, I shall still confine +myself to its connection with public events." + +Good old Grandfather now rose and quitted the room, while the children +remained gazing at the chair. Laurence, so vivid was his conception of +past times, would hardly have deemed it strange, if its former occupants, +one after another, had resumed the seat which they had each left vacant, +such a dim length of years ago. + +First, the gentle and lovely lady Arbella would have been seen in the old +chair, almost sinking out of its arms, for very weakness; then Roger +Williams, in his cloak and band, earnest, energetic, and benevolent; then +the figure of Anne Hutchinson, with the like gesture as when she presided +at the assemblages of women; then the dark, intellectual face of Vane, +"young in years, but in sage counsel old." Next would have appeared the +successive governors, Winthrop, Dudley, Bellingham, and Endicott, who sat +in the chair, while it was a Chair of State. Then its ample seat would +have been pressed by the comfortable, rotund corporation of the honest +mint-master. Then the half-frenzied shape of Mary Dyer, the persecuted +Quaker woman, clad in sackcloth and ashes, would have rested in it for a +moment. Then the holy apostolic form of Eliot would have sanctified it. +Then would have arisen, like the shade of departed Puritanism, the +venerable dignity of the white-bearded Governor Bradstreet. Lastly, on the +gorgeous crimson cushion of Grandfather’s chair, would have shone the +purple and golden magnificence of Sir William Phips. + +But, all these, with the other historic personages, in the midst of whom +the chair had so often stood, had passed, both in substance and shadow, +from the scene of ages. Yet here stood the chair, with the old Lincoln +coat of arms, and the oaken flowers and foliage, and the fierce lion’s +head at the summit, the whole, apparently, in as perfect preservation as +when it had first been placed in the Earl of Lincoln’s Hall. And what vast +changes of society and of nations had been wrought by sudden convulsions +or by slow degrees, since that era! + +"This chair has stood firm when the thrones of kings were overturned!" +thought Laurence. "Its oaken frame has proved stronger than many frames of +government!" + +More the thoughtful and imaginative boy might have mused; but now a large +yellow cat, a great favorite with all the children, leaped in at the open +window. Perceiving that Grandfather’s chair was empty, and having often +before experienced its comforts, puss laid herself quietly down upon the +cushion. Laurence, Clara, Charley, and little Alice, all laughed at the +idea of such a successor to the worthies of old times. + +"Pussy," said little Alice, putting out her hand, into which the cat laid +a velvet paw, "you look very wise. Do tell us a story about GRANDFATHER’S +CHAIR!" + + + + + +PART II + + + + +Chapter I + + +"O Grandfather," dear Grandfather, cried little Alice, "pray tell us some +more stories about your chair!" + +How long a time had fled, since the children had felt any curiosity to +hear the sequel of this venerable chair’s adventures! Summer was now past +and gone, and the better part of Autumn likewise. Dreary, chill November +was howling, out of doors, and vexing the atmosphere with sudden showers +of wintry rain, or sometimes with gusts of snow, that rattled like small +pebbles against the windows. + +When the weather began to grow cool, Grandfather’s chair had been removed +from the summer parlor into a smaller and snugger room. It now stood by +the side of a bright blazing wood-fire. Grandfather loved a wood-fire, far +better than a grate of glowing anthracite, or than the dull heat of an +invisible furnace, which seems to think that it has done its duty in +merely warming the house. But the wood-fire is a kindly, cheerful, +sociable spirit, sympathizing with mankind, and knowing that to create +warmth is but one of the good offices which are expected from it. +Therefore it dances on the hearth, and laughs broadly through the room, +and plays a thousand antics, and throws a joyous glow over all the faces +that encircle it. + +In the twilight of the evening, the fire grew brighter and more cheerful. +And thus, perhaps, there was something in Grandfather’s heart, that +cheered him most with its warmth and comfort in the gathering twilight of +old age. He had been gazing at the red embers, as intently as if his past +life were all pictured there, or as if it were a prospect of the future +world, when little Alice’s voice aroused him. + +"Dear Grandfather," repeated the little girl, more earnestly, "do talk to +us again about your chair." + +Laurence, and Clara, and Charley, and little Alice, had been attracted to +other objects, for two or three months past. They had sported in the +gladsome sunshine of the present, and so had forgotten the shadowy region +of the past, in the midst of which stood Grandfather’s chair. But now, in +the autumnal twilight, illuminated by the flickering blaze of the +wood-fire, they looked at the old chair and thought that it had never +before worn such an interesting aspect. There it stood, in the venerable +majesty of more than two hundred years. The light from the hearth quivered +upon the flowers and foliage, that were wrought into its oaken back; and +the lion’s head at the summit seemed almost to move its jaws and shake its +mane. + +"Does little Alice speak for all of you?" asked Grandfather. "Do you wish +me to go on with the adventures of the chair?" + +"Oh, yes, yes, Grandfather!" cried Clara. "The dear old chair! How strange +that we should have forgotten it so long!" + +"Oh, pray begin, Grandfather," said Laurence; "for I think, when we talk +about old times, it should be in the early evening before the candles are +lighted. The shapes of the famous persons, who once sat in the chair, will +be more apt to come back, and be seen among us, in this glimmer and +pleasant gloom, than they would in the vulgar daylight. And, besides, we +can make pictures of all that you tell us, among the glowing embers and +white ashes." + +Our friend Charley, too, thought the evening the best time to hear +Grandfather’s stories, because he could not then be playing out of doors. +So, finding his young auditors unanimous in their petition, the good old +gentleman took up the narrative of the historic chair, at the point where +he had dropt it. + + + + +Chapter II + + +"You recollect, my dear children," said Grandfather, "that we took leave +of the chair in 1692, while it was occupied by Sir William Phips. This +fortunate treasure-seeker, you will remember, had come over from England, +with King William’s commission to be Governor of Massachusetts. Within the +limits of this province were now included the old colony of Plymouth, and +the territories of Maine and Nova Scotia. Sir William Phips had likewise +brought a new charter from the king, which served instead of a +constitution, and set forth the method in which the province was to be +governed." + +"Did the new charter allow the people all their former liberties?" +inquired Laurence. + +"No," replied Grandfather. "Under the first charter, the people had been +the source of all power. Winthrop, Endicott, Bradstreet, and the rest of +them, had been governors by the choice of the people, without any +interference of the king. But henceforth the governor was to hold his +station solely by the king’s appointment, and during his pleasure; and the +same was the case with the lieutenant-governor, and some other high +officers. The people, however, were still allowed to choose +representatives; and the governor’s council was chosen by the general +court." + +"Would the inhabitants have elected Sir William Phips," asked Laurence, +"if the choice of governor had been left to them?" + +"He might probably have been a successful candidate," answered +Grandfather; "for his adventures and military enterprises had gained him a +sort of renown, which always goes a great way with the people. And he had +many popular characteristics, being a kind, warm-hearted man, not ashamed +of his low origin, nor haughty in his present elevation. Soon after his +arrival, he proved that he did not blush to recognize his former +associates." + +"How was that?" inquired Charley. + +"He made a grand festival at his new brick house," said Grandfather, "and +invited all the ship-carpenters of Boston to be his guests. At the head of +the table, in our great chair, sat Sir William Phips himself, treating +these hard handed men as his brethren, cracking jokes with them, and +talking familiarly about old times. I know not whether he wore his +embroidered dress, but I rather choose to imagine that he had on a suit of +rough clothes, such as he used to labor in, while he was Phips the +ship-carpenter." + +"An aristocrat need not be ashamed of the trade," observed Laurence; "for +the czar Peter the Great once served an apprenticeship to it." + +"Did Sir William Phips make as good a governor as he was a +ship-carpenter?" asked Charley. + +"History says but little about his merits as a ship-carpenter," answered +Grandfather; "but, as a governor, a great deal of fault was found with +him. Almost as soon as he assumed the government, he became engaged in a +very frightful business, which might have perplexed a wiser and better +cultivated head than his. This was the witchcraft delusion." + +And here Grandfather gave his auditors such details of this melancholy +affair, as he thought it fit for them to know. They shuddered to hear that +a frenzy, which led to the death of many innocent persons, had originated +in the wicked arts of a few children. They belonged to the Rev. Mr. +Parris, minister of Salem. These children complained of being pinched, and +pricked with pins, and otherwise tormented by the shapes of men and women, +who were supposed to have power to haunt them invisibly, both in darkness +and daylight. Often, in the midst of their family and friends, the +children would pretend to be seized with strange convulsions, and would +cry out that the witches were afflicting them. + +These stories spread abroad, and caused great tumult and alarm. From the +foundation of New England, it had been the custom of the inhabitants, in +all matters of doubt and difficulty, to look to their ministers for +council. So they did now; but, unfortunately, the ministers and wise men +were more deluded than the illiterate people. Cotton Mather, a very +learned and eminent clergyman, believed that the whole country was full of +witches and wizards, who had given up their hopes of heaven, and signed a +covenant with the Evil One. + +Nobody could be certain that his nearest neighbor, or most intimate +friend, was not guilty of this imaginary crime. The number of those who +pretended to be afflicted by witchcraft, grew daily more numerous; and +they bore testimony against many of the best and worthiest people. A +minister, named George Burroughs, was among the accused. In the months of +August and September, 1692, he, and nineteen other innocent men and women, +were put to death. The place of execution was a high hill, on the +outskirts of Salem; so that many of the sufferers, as they stood beneath +the gallows, could discern their own habitations in the town. + +The martyrdom of these guiltless persons seemed only to increase the +madness. The afflicted now grew bolder in their accusations. Many people +of rank and wealth were either thrown into prison, or compelled to flee +for their lives. Among these were two sons of old Simon Bradstreet, the +last of the Puritan governors. Mr. Willard, a pious minister of Boston, +was cried out upon as a wizard, in open court. Mrs. Hale, the wife of the +minister of Beverly, was likewise accused. Philip English, a rich merchant +of Salem, found it necessary to take flight, leaving his property and +business in confusion. But a short time afterwards, the Salem people were +glad to invite him back. + +"The boldest thing that the accusers did," continued Grandfather, "was to +cry out against the governor’s own beloved wife. Yes; the lady of Sir +William Phips was accused of being a witch, and of flying through the air +to attend witch meetings. When the governor heard this, he probably +trembled, so that our great chair shook beneath him." + +"Dear Grandfather," cried little Alice, clinging closer to his knee, "is +it true that witches ever come in the night-time to frighten little +children?" + +"No, no, dear little Alice," replied Grandfather. "Even if there were any +witches, they would flee away from the presence of a pure-hearted child. +But there are none; and our forefathers soon became convinced, that they +had been led into a terrible delusion. All the prisoners on account of +witchcraft were set free. But the innocent dead could not be restored to +life; and the hill where they were executed, will always remind people of +the saddest and most humiliating passage in our history." + +Grandfather then said, that the next remarkable event, while Sir William +Phips remained in the chair, was the arrival at Boston of an English +fleet, in 1693. It brought an army, which was intended for the conquest of +Canada. But a malignant disease, more fatal than the small-pox, broke out +among the soldiers and sailors, and destroyed the greater part of them. +The infection spread into the town of Boston, and made much havoc there. +This dreadful sickness caused the governor, and Sir Francis Wheeler, who +was commander of the British forces, to give up all thoughts of attacking +Canada. + +"Soon after this," said Grandfather, "Sir William Phips quarrelled with +the captain of an English frigate, and also with the Collector of Boston. +Being a man of violent temper, he gave each of them a sound beating with +his cane." + +"He was a bold fellow," observed Charley, who was himself somewhat +addicted to a similar mode of settling disputes. + +"More bold than wise," replied Grandfather; "for complaints were carried +to the king, and Sir William Phips was summoned to England, to make the +best answer he could. Accordingly he went to London, where, in 1695, he +was seized with a malignant fever, of which he died. Had he lived longer, +he would probably have gone again in search of sunken treasure. He had +heard of a Spanish ship, which was cast away in 1502, during the lifetime +of Columbus. Bovadilla, Roldan, and many other Spaniards, were lost in +her, together with the immense wealth of which they had robbed the South +American kings." + +"Why, Grandfather," exclaimed Laurence, "what magnificent ideas the +governor had! Only think of recovering all that old treasure, which had +lain almost two centuries under the sea! Me thinks Sir William Phips ought +to have been buried in the ocean, when he died; so that he might have gone +down among the sunken ships, and cargoes of treasure, which he was always +dreaming about in his lifetime." + +"He was buried in one of the crowded cemeteries of London," said +Grandfather. "As he left no children, his estate was inherited by his +nephew, from whom is descended the present Marquis of Normandy. The noble +Marquis is not aware, perhaps, that the prosperity of his family +originated in the successful enterprise of a New England ship carpenter." + + + + +Chapter III + + +"At the death of Sir William Phips," proceeded Grandfather, "our chair was +bequeathed to Mr. Ezekiel Cheever, a famous school-master in Boston. This +old gentleman came from London in 1637, and had been teaching school ever +since; so that there were now aged men, grandfathers like myself, to whom +Master Cheever had taught their alphabet. He was a person of venerable +aspect, and wore a long white beard. + +"Was the chair placed in his school?" asked Charley. + +"Yes, in his school," answered Grandfather; "and we may safely say that it +had never before been regarded with such awful reverence—no, not even when +the old governors of Massachusetts sat in it. Even you, Charley, my boy, +would have felt some respect for the chair, if you had seen it occupied by +this famous school-master." + +And here Grandfather endeavored to give his auditors an idea how matters +were managed in schools above a hundred years ago. As this will probably +be an interesting subject to our readers, we shall make a separate sketch +of it, and call it + + + +THE OLD-FASHIONED SCHOOL + + +Now imagine yourselves, my children, in Master Ezekiel Cheever’s +school-room. It is a large, dingy room, with a sanded floor, and is +lighted by windows that turn on hinges, and have little diamond shaped +panes of glass. The scholars sit on long benches, with desks before them. +At one end of the room is a great fire-place, so very spacious, that there +is room enough for three or four boys to stand in each of the chimney +corners. This was the good old fashion of fire-places, when there was wood +enough in the forests to keep people warm, without their digging into the +bowels of the earth for coal. + +It is a winter’s day when we take our peep into the school-room. See what +great logs of wood have been rolled into the fire-place, and what a broad, +bright blaze goes leaping up the chimney! And every few moments, a vast +cloud of smoke is puffed into the room, which sails slowly over the heads +of the scholars, until it gradually settles upon the walls and ceiling. +They are blackened with the smoke of many years already. + + [Image #2] + +Next, look at our old historic chair! It is placed, you perceive, in the +most comfortable part of the room, where the generous glow of the fire is +sufficiently felt, without being too intensely hot. How stately the old +chair looks, as if it remembered its many famous occupants, but yet were +conscious that a greater man is sitting in it now! Do you see the +venerable school-master, severe in aspect, with a black scull-cap on his +head, like an ancient Puritan, and the snow of his white beard drifting +down to his very girdle? What boy would dare to play, or whisper, or even +glance aside from his book, while Master Cheever is on the look-out, +behind his spectacles! For such offenders, if any such there be, a rod of +birch is hanging over the fire-place, and a heavy ferule lies on the +master’s desk. + +And now school is begun. What a murmur of multitudinous tongues, like the +whispering leaves of a wind-stirred oak, as the scholars con over their +various tasks! Buz, buz, buz! Amid just such a murmur has Master Cheever +spent above sixty years: and long habit has made it as pleasant to him as +the hum of a bee-hive, when the insects are busy in the sunshine. + +Now a class in Latin is called to recite. Forth steps a row of +queer-looking little fellows, wearing square-skirted coats, and small +clothes, with buttons at the knee. They look like so many grandfathers in +their second childhood. These lads are to be sent to Cambridge, and +educated for the learned professions. Old Master Cheever has lived so +long, and seen so many generations of school-boys grow up to be men, that +now he can almost prophesy what sort of a man each boy will be. One urchin +shall hereafter be a doctor, and administer pills and potions, and stalk +gravely through life, perfumed with assaf[oe]tida. Another shall wrangle +at the bar, and fight his way to wealth and honors, and in his declining +age, shall be a worshipful member of his Majesty’s council. A third—and he +is the Master’s favorite—shall be a worthy successor to the old Puritan +ministers, now in their graves; he shall preach with great unction and +effect, and leave volumes of sermons, in print and manuscript, for the +benefit of future generations. + +But, as they are merely school-boys now, their business is to construe +Virgil. Poor Virgil, whose verses, which he took so much pains to polish, +have been mis-scanned, and mis-parsed, and mis-interpreted, by so many +generations of idle school-boys! There, sit down, ye Latinists. Two or +three of you, I fear, are doomed to feel the master’s ferule. + +Next comes a class in Arithmetic. These boys are to be the merchants, +shop-keepers, and mechanics, of a future period. Hitherto, they have +traded only in marbles and apples. Hereafter, some will send vessels to +England for broadcloths and all sorts of manufactured wares, and to the +West Indies for sugar, and rum, and coffee. Others will stand behind +counters, and measure tape, and ribbon, and cambric, by the yard. Others +will upheave the blacksmith’s hammer, or drive the plane over the +carpenter’s bench, or take the lapstone and the awl, and learn the trade +of shoe-making. Many will follow the sea, and become bold, rough +sea-captains. + +This class of boys, in short, must supply the world with those active, +skilful hands, and clear, sagacious heads, without which the affairs of +life would be thrown into confusion, by the theories of studious and +visionary men. Wherefore, teach them their multiplication table, good +Master Cheever, and whip them well, when they deserve it; for much of the +country’s welfare depends on these boys! + +But, alas! while we have been thinking of other matters, Master Cheever’s +watchful eye has caught two boys at play. Now we shall see awful times! +The two malefactors are summoned before the master’s chair, wherein he +sits, with the terror of a judge upon his brow. Our old chair is now a +judgment-seat. Ah, Master Cheever has taken down that terrible birch-rod! +Short is the trial—the sentence quickly passed—and now the judge prepares +to execute it in person. Thwack! thwack! thwack! In those good old times, +a school-master’s blows were well laid on. + +See! the birch-rod has lost several of its twigs, and will hardly serve +for another execution. Mercy on us, what a bellowing the urchins make! My +ears are almost deafened, though the clamor comes through the far length +of a hundred and fifty years. There, go to your seats, poor boys; and do +not cry, sweet little Alice; for they have ceased to feel the pain, a long +time since. + +And thus the forenoon passes away. Now it is twelve o’clock. The master +looks at his great silver watch, and then with tiresome deliberation, puts +the ferule into his desk. The little multitude await the word of +dismissal, with almost irrepressible impatience. + +"You are dismissed," says Master Cheever. + +The boys retire, treading softly until they have passed the threshold; +but, fairly out of the school-room, lo, what a joyous shout!—what a +scampering and trampling of feet!—what a sense of recovered freedom, +expressed in the merry uproar of all their voices! What care they for the +ferule and birch-rod now? Were boys created merely to study Latin and +Arithmetic? No; the better purposes of their being are to sport, to leap, +to run, to shout, to slide upon the ice, to snow-ball! + +Happy boys! Enjoy your play-time now, and come again to study, and to feel +the birch-rod and the ferule, to-morrow; not till to-morrow, for to-day is +Thursday-lecture; and ever since the settlement of Massachusetts, there +has been no school on Thursday afternoons. Therefore, sport, boys, while +you may; for the morrow cometh, with the birch-rod and the ferule; and +after that, another Morrow, with troubles of its own. + +Now the master has set every thing to rights, and is ready to go home to +dinner. Yet he goes reluctantly. The old man has spent so much of his life +in the smoky, noisy, buzzing school-room, that, when he has a holiday, he +feels as if his place were lost, and himself a stranger in the world. But, +forth he goes; and there stands our old chair, vacant and solitary, till +good Master Cheever resumes his seat in it to-morrow morning. + + + +"Grandfather," said Charley, "I wonder whether the boys did not use to +upset the old chair, when the school-master was out?" + +"There is a tradition," replied Grandfather, "that one of its arms was +dislocated, in some such manner. But I cannot believe that any school-boy +would behave so naughtily." + +As it was now later than little Alice’s usual bedtime, Grandfather broke +off his narrative, promising to talk more about Master Cheever and his +scholars, some other evening. + + + + +Chapter IV + + +Accordingly the next evening, Grandfather resumed the history of his +beloved chair. + +"Master Ezekiel Cheever," said he, "died in 1707, after having taught +school about seventy years. It would require a pretty good scholar in +arithmetic to tell how many stripes he had inflicted, and how many +birch-rods he had worn out, during all that time, in his fatherly +tenderness for his pupils. Almost all the great men of that period, and +for many years back, had been whipt into eminence by Master Cheever. +Moreover, he had written a Latin Accidence, which was used in schools more +than half a century after his death; so that the good old man, even in his +grave, was still the cause of trouble and stripes to idle school-boys." + +Grandfather proceeded to say, that, when Master Cheever died, he +bequeathed the chair to the most learned man that was educated at his +school, or that had ever been born in America. This was the renowned +Cotton Mather, minister of the Old North Church in Boston. + +"And author of the Magnalia, Grandfather, which we sometimes see you +reading," said Laurence. + +"Yes, Laurence," replied Grandfather. "The Magnalia is a strange, pedantic +history, in which true events and real personages move before the reader, +with the dreamy aspect which they wore in Cotton Mather’s singular mind. +This huge volume, however, was written and published before our chair came +into his possession. But, as he was the author of more books than there +are days in the year, we may conclude that he wrote a great deal, while +sitting in this chair." + +"I am tired of these school-masters and learned men," said Charley. "I +wish some stirring man, that knew how to do something in the world, like +Sir William Phips, would set in the chair." + +"Such men seldom have leisure to sit quietly in a chair," said +Grandfather. "We must make the best of such people as we have." + +As Cotton Mather was a very distinguished man, Grandfather took some pains +to give the children a lively conception of his character. Over the door +of his library were painted these words—BE SHORT—as a warning to visitors +that they must not do the world so much harm, as needlessly to interrupt +this great man’s wonderful labors. On entering the room you would probably +behold it crowded, and piled, and heaped with books. There were huge, +ponderous folios and quartos, and little duodecimos, in English, Latin, +Greek, Hebrew, Chaldaic, and all other languages, that either originated +at the confusion of Babel, or have since come into use. + +All these books, no doubt, were tossed about in confusion, thus forming a +visible emblem of the manner in which their contents were crowded into +Cotton Mather’s brain. And in the middle of the room stood a table, on +which, besides printed volumes, were strewn manuscript sermons, historical +tracts, and political pamphlets, all written in such a queer, blind, +crabbed, fantastical hand, that a writing-master would have gone raving +mad at the sight of them. By this table stood Grandfather’s chair, which +seemed already to have contracted an air of deep erudition, as if its +cushion were stuffed with Latin, Greek, and Hebrew, and other hard +matters. + +In this chair, from one year’s end to another, sat that prodigious +book-worm, Cotton Mather, sometimes devouring a great book, and sometimes +scribbling one as big. In Grandfather’s younger days, there used to be a +wax figure of him in one of the Boston museums, representing a solemn, +dark-visaged person, in a minister’s black gown, and with a black-letter +volume before him. + +"It is difficult, my children," observed Grandfather, "to make you +understand such a character as Cotton Mather’s, in whom there was so much +good, and yet so many failings and frailties. Undoubtedly, he was a pious +man. Often he kept fasts; and once, for three whole days, he allowed +himself not a morsel of food, but spent the time in prayer and religious +meditation. Many a live-long night did he watch and pray. These fasts and +vigils made him meagre and haggard, and probably caused him to appear as +if he hardly belonged to the world." + +"Was not the witchcraft delusion partly caused by Cotton Mather?" inquired +Laurence. + +"He was the chief agent of the mischief," answered Grandfather; "but we +will not suppose that he acted otherwise than conscientiously. He believed +that there were evil spirits all about the world. Doubtless he imagined +that they were hidden in the corners and crevices of his library, and that +they peeped out from among the leaves of many of his books, as he turned +them over, at midnight. He supposed that these unlovely demons were +everywhere, in the sunshine as well as in the darkness, and that they were +hidden in men’s hearts, and stole into their most secret thoughts." + +Here Grandfather was interrupted by little Alice, who hid her face in his +lap, and murmured a wish that he would not talk any more about Cotton +Mather and the evil spirits. Grandfather kissed her, and told her that +angels were the only spirits whom she had any thing to do with. He then +spoke of the public affairs of the period. + +A new war between France and England had broken out in 1702, and had been +raging ever since. In the course of it, New England suffered much injury +from the French and Indians, who often came through the woods from Canada, +and assaulted the frontier towns. Villages were sometimes burnt, and the +inhabitants slaughtered, within a day’s ride of Boston. The people of New +England had a bitter hatred against the French, not only for the mischief +which they did with their own hands, but because they incited the Indians +to hostility. + +The New Englanders knew that they could never dwell in security, until the +provinces of France should be subdued, and brought under the English +government. They frequently, in time of war, undertook military +expeditions against Acadia and Canada, and sometimes besieged the +fortresses, by which those territories were defended. But the most earnest +wish of their hearts was, to take Quebec, and so get possession of the +whole province of Canada. Sir William Phips had once attempted it, but +without success. + +Fleets and soldiers were often sent from England, to assist the colonists +in their warlike undertakings. In 1710, Port Royal, a fortress of Acadia, +was taken by the English. The next year, in the month of June, a fleet, +commanded by Admiral Sir Hovenden Walker, arrived in Boston Harbor. On +board of this fleet was the English General Hill, with seven regiments of +soldiers, who had been fighting under the Duke of Marlborough, in +Flanders. The government of Massachusetts was called upon to find +provisions for the army and fleet, and to raise more men to assist in +taking Canada. + +What with recruiting and drilling of soldiers, there was now nothing but +warlike bustle in the streets of Boston. The drum and fife, the rattle of +arms, and the shouts of boys, were heard from morning till night. In about +a month, the fleet set sail, carrying four regiments from New England and +New York, besides the English soldiers. The whole army amounted to at +least seven thousand men. They steered for the mouth of the river St. +Lawrence. + +"Cotton Mather prayed most fervently for their success," continued +Grandfather, "both in his pulpit, and when he kneeled down in the solitude +of his library, resting his face on our old chair. But Providence ordered +the result otherwise. In a few weeks, tidings were received, that eight or +nine of the vessels had been wrecked in the St. Lawrence, and that above a +thousand drowned soldiers had been washed ashore, on the banks of that +mighty river. After this misfortune, Sir Hovenden Walker set sail for +England; and many pious people began to think it a sin, even to wish for +the conquest of Canada." + +"I would never give it up so," cried Charley. + +"Nor did they, as we shall see," replied Grandfather. "However, no more +attempts were made during this war, which came to a close in 1713. The +people of New England were probably glad of some repose; for their young +men had been made soldiers, till many of them were fit for nothing else. +And those, who remained at home, had been heavily taxed to pay for the +arms, ammunition, fortifications, and all the other endless expenses of a +war. There was great need of the prayers of Cotton Mather, and of all +pious men, not only on account of the sufferings of the people, but +because the old moral and religious character of New England was in danger +of being utterly lost." + +"How glorious it would have been," remarked Laurence, "if our forefathers +could have kept the country unspotted with blood." + +"Yes," said Grandfather; "but there was a stern warlike spirit in them, +from the beginning. They seem never to have thought of questioning either +the morality or piety of war." + +The next event, which Grandfather spoke of, was one that Cotton Mather, as +well as most of the other inhabitants of New England, heartily rejoiced +at. This was the accession of the Elector of Hanover to the throne of +England, in 1714, on the death of Queen Anne. Hitherto, the people had +been in continual dread that the male line of the Stuarts, who were +descended from the beheaded King Charles and the banished King James, +would be restored to the throne. In that case, as the Stuart family were +Roman Catholics, it was supposed that they would attempt to establish +their own religion throughout the British dominions. But the Elector of +Hanover, and all his race, were Protestants; so that now the descendants +of the old Puritans were relieved from many fears and disquietudes. + +"The importance of this event," observed Grandfather, "was a thousand +times greater than that of a Presidential Election, in our own days. If +the people dislike their president, they may get rid of him in four years; +whereas, a dynasty of kings may wear the crown for an unlimited period." + +The German elector was proclaimed king from the balcony of the town-house, +in Boston, by the title of George the First, while the trumpets sounded, +and the people cried Amen. That night, the town was illuminated; and +Cotton Mather threw aside book and pen, and left Grandfather’s chair +vacant, while he walked hither and thither to witness the rejoicings. + + + + +Chapter VI + + +"Cotton Mather," continued Grandfather, "was a bitter enemy to Governor +Dudley; and nobody exulted more than he, when that crafty politician was +removed from the government, and succeeded by Colonel Shute. This took +place in 1716. The new governor had been an officer in the renowned Duke +of Marlborough’s army, and had fought in some of the great battles in +Flanders." + +"Now, I hope," said Charley, "we shall hear of his doing great things." + +"I am afraid you will be disappointed, Charley," answered Grandfather. "It +is true, that Colonel Shute had probably never led so unquiet a life while +fighting the French, as he did now, while governing this province of +Massachusetts Bay. But his troubles consisted almost entirely of +dissensions with the legislature. The king had ordered him to lay claim to +a fixed salary; but the representatives of the people insisted upon paying +him only such sums, from year to year, as they saw fit." + +Grandfather here explained some of the circumstances, that made the +situation of a colonial governor so difficult and irksome. There was not +the same feeling towards the chief magistrate, now, that had existed, +while he was chosen by the free suffrages of the people. It was felt, +that, as the king appointed the governor, and as he held his office during +the king’s pleasure, it would be his great object to please the king. But +the people thought, that a governor ought to have nothing in view, but the +best interests of those whom he governed. + +"The governor," remarked Grandfather, "had two masters to serve—the king, +who appointed him, and the people, on whom he depended for his pay. Few +men, in this position, would have ingenuity enough to satisfy either +party. Colonel Shute, though a good-natured, well-meaning man, succeeded +so ill with the people, that in 1722, he suddenly went away to England, +and made complaint to King George. In the mean time, Lieutenant-Governor +Dummer directed the affairs of the province, and carried on a long and +bloody war with the Indians." + +"But where was our chair, all this time?" asked Clara. + +"It still remained in Cotton Mather’s library," replied Grandfather; "and +I must not omit to tell you an incident, which is very much to the honor +of this celebrated man. It is the more proper, too, that you should hear +it, because it will show you what a terrible calamity the small pox was to +our forefathers. The history of the province, (and, of course, the history +of our chair,) would be incomplete, without particular mention of it." +Accordingly, Grandfather told the children a story, to which, for want of +a better title, we shall give that of + + + +THE REJECTED BLESSING + + +One day, in 1721, Doctor Cotton Mather sat in his library, reading a book +that had been published by the Royal Society of London. But, every few +moments, he laid the book upon the table, and leaned back in Grandfather’s +chair, with an aspect of deep care and disquietude. There were certain +things which troubled him exceedingly, so that he could hardly fix his +thoughts upon what he read. + +It was now a gloomy time in Boston. That terrible disease, the small pox, +had recently made its appearance in the town. Ever since the first +settlement of the country, this awful pestilence had come, at intervals, +and swept away multitudes of the inhabitants. Whenever it commenced its +ravages, nothing seemed to stay its progress, until there were no more +victims for it to seize upon. Oftentimes, hundreds of people, at once, lay +groaning with its agony; and when it departed, its deep footsteps were +always to be traced in many graves. + +The people never felt secure from this calamity. Sometimes, perhaps, it +was brought into the country by a poor sailor, who had caught the +infection in foreign parts, and came hither to die, and to be the cause of +many deaths. Sometimes, no doubt, it followed in the train of the pompous +governors, when they came over from England. Sometimes, the disease lay +hidden in the cargoes of ships, among silks and brocades, and other costly +merchandise, which was imported for the rich people to wear. And, +sometimes, it started up, seemingly of its own accord; and nobody could +tell whence it came. The physician, being called to attend the sick +person, would look at him, and say,—"It is the small pox! let the patient +be carried to the hospital." + +And now, this dreadful sickness had shown itself again in Boston. Cotton +Mather was greatly afflicted, for the sake of the whole province. He had +children, too, who were exposed to the danger. At that very moment, he +heard the voice of his youngest son, for whom his heart was moved with +apprehension. + +"Alas! I fear for that poor child," said Cotton Mather to himself. "What +shall I do for my son Samuel?" + +Again, he attempted to drive away these thoughts, by taking up the book +which he had been reading. And now, all of a sudden, his attention became +fixed. The book contained a printed letter that an Italian physician had +written upon the very subject, about which Cotton Mather was so anxiously +meditating. He ran his eye eagerly over the pages; and, behold! a method +was disclosed to him, by which the small pox might be robbed of its worst +terrors. Such a method was known in Greece. The physicians of Turkey, too, +those long-bearded Eastern sages, had been acquainted with it for many +years. The negroes of Africa, ignorant as they were, had likewise +practised it, and thus had shown themselves wiser than the white men. + +"Of a truth," ejaculated Cotton Mather, clasping his hands and looking up +to Heaven, "it was a merciful Providence that brought this book under mine +eye! I will procure a consultation of physicians, and see whether this +wondrous Inoculation may not stay the progress of the Destroyer." + +So he arose from Grandfather’s chair, and went out of the library. Near +the door he met his son Samuel, who seemed downcast and out of spirits. +The boy had heard, probably, that some of his playmates were taken ill +with the small pox. But, as his father looked cheerfully at him, Samuel +took courage, trusting that either the wisdom of so learned a minister +would find some remedy for the danger, or else that his prayers would +secure protection from on high. + +Meanwhile, Cotton Mather took his staff and three-cornered hat, and walked +about the streets, calling at the houses of all the physicians in Boston. +They were a very wise fraternity; and their huge wigs, and black dresses, +and solemn visages, made their wisdom appear even profounder than it was. +One after another, he acquainted them with the discovery which he had hit +upon. + +But these grave and sagacious personages would scarcely listen to him. The +oldest doctor in town contented himself with remarking, that no such thing +as inoculation was mentioned by Galen or Hippocrates, and it was +impossible that modern physicians should be wiser than those old sages. A +second held up his hands in dumb astonishment and horror, at the madness +of what Cotton Mather proposed to do. A third told him, in pretty plain +terms, that he knew not what he was talking about. A fourth requested, in +the name of the whole medical fraternity, that Cotton Mather would confine +his attention to people’s souls, and leave the physicians to take care of +their bodies. + +In short, there was but a single doctor among them all, who would grant +the poor minister so much as a patient hearing. This was Doctor Zabdiel +Boylston. He looked into the matter like a man of sense, and finding, +beyond a doubt, that inoculation had rescued many from death, he resolved +to try the experiment in his own family. + +And so he did. But, when the other physicians heard of it, they arose in +great fury, and began a war of words, written, printed, and spoken, +against Cotton Mather and Doctor Boylston. To hear them talk, you would +have supposed that these two harmless and benevolent men had plotted the +ruin of the country. + +The people, also, took the alarm. Many, who thought themselves more pious +than their neighbors, contended, that, if Providence had ordained them to +die of the small pox, it was sinful to aim at preventing it. The strangest +reports were in circulation. Some said, that Doctor Boylston had contrived +a method for conveying the gout, rheumatism, sick headache, asthma, and +all other diseases, from one person to another, and diffusing them through +the whole community. Others flatly affirmed that the Evil One had got +possession of Cotton Mather, and was at the bottom of the whole business. + +You must observe, children, that Cotton Mather’s fellow citizens were +generally inclined to doubt the wisdom of any measure, which he might +propose to them. They recollected how he had led them astray in the old +witchcraft delusion; and now, if he thought and acted ever so wisely, it +was difficult for him to get the credit of it. + +The people’s wrath grew so hot at his attempt to guard them from the small +pox, that he could not walk the streets in peace. Whenever the venerable +form of the old minister, meagre and haggard with fasts and vigils, was +seen approaching, hisses were heard, and shouts of derision, and scornful +and bitter laughter. The women snatched away their children from his path, +lest he should do them a mischief. Still, however, bending his head +meekly, and perhaps stretching out his hands to bless those who reviled +him, he pursued his way. But the tears came into his eyes, to think how +blindly the people rejected the means of safety, that were offered them. + +Indeed, there were melancholy sights enough in the streets of Boston, to +draw forth the tears of a compassionate man. Over the door of almost every +dwelling, a red flag was fluttering in the air. This was the signal that +the small pox had entered the house, and attacked some member of the +family; or perhaps the whole family, old and young, were struggling at +once with the pestilence. Friends and relatives, when they met one another +in the streets, would hurry onward without a grasp of the hand, or +scarcely a word of greeting, lest they should catch or communicate the +contagion. And, often a coffin was borne hastily along. + +"Alas, alas!" said Cotton Mather to himself. "What shall be done for this +poor, misguided people? Oh, that Providence would open their eyes, and +enable them to discern good from evil!" + +So furious, however, were the people, that they threatened vengeance +against any person who should dare to practise inoculation, though it were +only in his own family. This was a hard case for Cotton Mather, who saw no +other way to rescue his poor child Samuel from the disease. But he +resolved to save him, even if his house should be burnt over his head. + +"I will not be turned aside," said he. "My townsmen shall see that I have +faith in this thing, when I make the experiment on my beloved son, whose +life is dearer to me than my own. And when I have saved Samuel, +peradventure they will be persuaded to save themselves." + +Accordingly, Samuel was inoculated; and so was Mr. Walter, a son-in-law of +Cotton Mather. Doctor Boylston, likewise, inoculated many persons; and +while hundreds died, who had caught the contagion from the garments of the +sick, almost all were preserved, who followed the wise physician’s advice. + +But the people were not yet convinced of their mistake. One night, a +destructive little instrument, called a hand-grenade, was thrown into +Cotton Mather’s window, and rolled under Grandfather’s chair. It was +supposed to be filled with gunpowder, the explosion of which would have +blown the poor minister to atoms. But the best-informed historians are of +opinion, that the grenade contained only brimstone and assaf[oe]tida, and +was meant to plague Cotton Mather with a very evil perfume. + +This is no strange thing in human experience. Men, who attempt to do the +world more good, than the world is able entirely to comprehend, are almost +invariably held in bad odor. But yet, if the wise and good man can wait +awhile, either the present generation or posterity, will do him justice. +So it proved, in the case which we have been speaking of. In after years, +when inoculation was universally practised, and thousands were saved from +death by it, the people remembered old Cotton Mather, then sleeping in his +grave. They acknowledged that the very thing, for which they had so +reviled and persecuted him, was the best and wisest thing he ever did. + + + +"Grandfather, this is not an agreeable story," observed Clara. + +"No, Clara," replied Grandfather. "But it is right that you should know +what a dark shadow this disease threw over the times of our forefathers. +And now, if you wish to learn more about Cotton Mather, you must read his +biography, written by Mr. Peabody, of Springfield. You will find it very +entertaining and instructive; but perhaps the writer is somewhat too harsh +in his judgment of this singular man. He estimates him fairly, indeed, and +understands him well; but he unriddles his character rather by acuteness +than by sympathy. Now, his life should have been written by one, who, +knowing all his faults, would nevertheless love him." + +So Grandfather made an end of Cotton Mather, telling his auditors that he +died in 1728, at the age of sixty-five, and bequeathed the chair to Elisha +Cooke. This gentleman was a famous advocate of the people’s rights. + +The same year, William Burnet, a son of the celebrated Bishop Burnet, +arrived in Boston, with the commission of governor. He was the first that +had been appointed since the departure of Colonel Shute. Governor Burnet +took up his residence with Mr. Cooke, while the Province House was +undergoing repairs. During this period, he was always complimented with a +seat in Grandfather’s chair; and so comfortable did he find it, that on +removing to the Province House, he could not bear to leave it behind him. +Mr. Cooke, therefore, requested his acceptance of it. + +"I should think," said Laurence, "that the people would have petitioned +the king always to appoint a native-born New Englander to govern them." + +"Undoubtedly it was a grievance," answered Grandfather, "to see men placed +in this station, who perhaps had neither talents nor virtues to fit them +for it, and who certainly could have no natural affection for the country. +The king generally bestowed the governorships of the American colonies +upon needy noblemen, or hangers-on at court, or disbanded officers. The +people knew that such persons would be very likely to make the good of the +country subservient to the wishes of the king. The legislature, therefore, +endeavored to keep as much power as possible in their own hands, by +refusing to settle a fixed salary upon the governors. It was thought +better to pay them according to their deserts." + +"Did Governor Burnet work well for his money?" asked Charley. + +Grandfather could not help smiling at the simplicity of Charley’s +question. Nevertheless, it put the matter in a very plain point of view. + +He then described the character of Governor Burnet, representing him as a +good scholar, possessed of much ability, and likewise of unspotted +integrity. His story affords a striking example, how unfortunate it is for +a man, who is placed as ruler over a country, to be compelled to aim at +any thing but the good of the people. Governor Burnet was so chained down +by his instructions from the king, that he could not act as he might +otherwise have wished. Consequently, his whole term of office was wasted +in quarrels with the legislature. + +"I am afraid, children," said Grandfather, "that Governor Burnet found but +little rest or comfort in our old chair. Here he used to sit, dressed in a +coat which was made of rough, shaggy cloth outside, but of smooth velvet +within. It was said that his own character resembled that coat, for his +outward manner was rough, but his inward disposition soft and kind. It is +a pity that such a man could not have been kept free from trouble. But so +harassing were his disputes with the representatives of the people, that +he fell into a fever, of which he died, in 1720. The legislature had +refused him a salary, while alive; but they appropriated money enough to +give him a splendid and pompous funeral." + +And now Grandfather perceived that little Alice had fallen fast asleep, +with her head upon his footstool. Indeed, as Clara observed, she had been +sleeping from the time of Sir Hovenden Walker’s expedition against Quebec, +until the death of Governor Burnet—a period of about eighteen years. And +yet, after so long a nap, sweet little Alice was a golden-haired child, of +scarcely five years old. + +"It puts me in mind," said Laurence, "of the story of the enchanted +princess, who slept many a hundred years, and awoke as young and beautiful +as ever." + + + + +Chapter VII + + +A few evenings afterwards, cousin Clara happened to inquire of +Grandfather, whether the old chair had never been present at a ball. At +the same time, little Alice brought forward a doll, with whom she had been +holding a long conversation. + +"See, Grandfather," cried she. "Did such a pretty lady as this ever sit in +your great chair?" + +These questions led Grandfather to talk about the fashions and manners, +which now began to be introduced from England into the provinces. The +simplicity of the good old Puritan times was fast disappearing. This was +partly owing to the increasing number and wealth of the inhabitants, and +to the additions which they continually received, by the arrival and +settlement of people from beyond the sea. + +Another cause of a pompous and artificial mode of life, among those who +could afford it, was, that the example was set by the royal governors. +Under the old charter, the governors were the representatives of the +people, and therefore their way of living had probably been marked by a +popular simplicity. But now, as they represented the person of the king, +they thought it necessary to preserve the dignity of their station, by the +practice of high and gorgeous ceremonials. And, besides, the profitable +offices under the government were filled by men who had lived in London, +and had there contracted fashionable and luxurious habits of living, which +they would not now lay aside. The wealthy people of the province imitated +them; and thus began a general change in social life. + +"So, my dear Clara," said Grandfather, "after our chair had entered the +Province House, it must often have been present at balls and festivals, +though I cannot give you a description of any particular one. But I doubt +not that they were very magnificent; and slaves in gorgeous liveries +waited on the guests, and offered them wine in goblets of massive silver." + +"Were there slaves in those days?" exclaimed Clara. + +"Yes; black slaves and white," replied Grandfather. "Our ancestors not +only bought negroes from Africa, but Indians from South America, and white +people from Ireland. These last were sold, not for life, but for a certain +number of years, in order to pay the expenses of their voyage across the +Atlantic. Nothing was more common than to see a lot of likely Irish girls, +advertised for sale in the newspapers. As for the little negro babies, +they were offered to be given away, like young kittens." + +"Perhaps Alice would have liked one to play with, instead of her doll," +said Charley, laughing. + +But little Alice clasped the waxen doll closer to her bosom. + +"Now, as for this pretty doll, my little Alice," said Grandfather, "I wish +you could have seen what splendid dresses the ladies wore in those times. +They had silks, and satins, and damasks, and brocades, and high +head-dresses, and all sorts of fine things. And they used to wear +hooped-petticoats, of such enormous size that it was quite a journey to +walk round them." + +"And how did the gentlemen dress?" asked Charley. + +"With full as much magnificence as the ladies," answered Grandfather. "For +their holiday suits, they had coats of figured velvet, crimson, green, +blue, and all other gay colors, embroidered with gold or silver lace. +Their waistcoats, which were five times as large as modern ones, were very +splendid. Sometimes, the whole waistcoat, which came down almost to the +knees, was made of gold brocade." + +"Why, the wearer must have shone like a golden image!" said Clara. + +"And, then," continued Grandfather, "they wore various sorts of periwigs, +such as the Tie, the Spencer, the Brigadier, the Major, the Albemarle, the +Ramilies, the Feather-top, and the Full-bottom! Their three-cornered hats +were laced with gold or silver. They had shining buckles at the knees of +their small clothes, and buckles likewise in their shoes. They wore +swords, with beautiful hilts, either of silver, or sometimes of polished +steel, inlaid with gold." + +"Oh, I should like to wear a sword!" cried Charley. + +"And an embroidered crimson velvet coat," said Clara, laughing, "and a +gold brocade waistcoat down to your knees!" + +"And knee-buckles and shoe-buckles," said Laurence, laughing also. + +"And a periwig," added little Alice, soberly, not knowing what was the +article of dress, which she recommended to our friend Charley. + +Grandfather smiled at the idea of Charley’s sturdy little figure in such a +grotesque caparison. He then went on with the history of the chair, and +told the children, that, in 1730, King George the Second appointed +Jonathan Belcher to be governor of Massachusetts, in place of the deceased +Governor Burnet. Mr. Belcher was a native of the province, but had spent +much of his life in Europe. + +The new governor found Grandfather’s chair in the Province House, he was +struck with its noble and stately aspect, but was of opinion, that age and +hard services had made it scarcely so fit for courtly company, as when it +stood in the Earl of Lincoln’s hall. Wherefore, as Governor Belcher was +fond of splendor, he employed a skilful artist to beautify the chair. This +was done by polishing and varnishing it, and by gilding the carved work of +the elbows, and likewise the oaken flowers of the back. The lion’s head +now shone like a veritable lump of gold. Finally, Governor Belcher gave +the chair a cushion of blue damask, with a rich golden fringe. + +"Our good old chair being thus glorified," proceeded Grandfather, "it +glittered with a great deal more splendor than it had exhibited just a +century before, when the Lady Arbella brought it over from England. Most +people mistook it for a chair of the latest London fashion. And this may +serve for an example, that there is almost always an old and time-worn +substance under all the glittering show of new invention." + +"Grandfather, I cannot see any of the gilding," remarked Charley, who had +been examining the chair very minutely. + +"You will not wonder that it has been rubbed off," replied Grandfather, +"when you hear all the adventures that have since befallen the chair. +Gilded it was; and the handsomest room in the Province House was adorned +by it." + +There was not much to interest the children, in what happened during the +years that Governor Belcher remained in the chair. At first, like Colonel +Shute and Governor Burnet, he was engaged in disputing with the +legislature about his salary. But, as he found it impossible to get a +fixed sum, he finally obtained the king’s leave to accept whatever the +legislature chose to give him. And thus the people triumphed, after this +long contest for the privilege of expending their own money as they saw +fit. + +The remainder of Governor Belcher’s term of office was principally taken +up in endeavoring to settle the currency. Honest John Hull’s pine-tree +shillings had long ago been worn out, or lost, or melted down again, and +their place was supplied by bills of paper or parchment, which were +nominally valued at three pence and upwards. The value of these bills kept +continually sinking, because the real hard money could not be obtained for +them. They were a great deal worse than the old Indian currency of +clam-shells. These disorders of the circulating medium were a source of +endless plague and perplexity to the rulers and legislators, not only in +Governor Belcher’s days, but for many years before and afterwards. + +Finally, the people suspected that Governor Belcher was secretly +endeavoring to establish the Episcopal mode of worship in the provinces. +There was enough of the old Puritan spirit remaining, to cause most of the +true sons of New England to look with horror upon such an attempt. Great +exertions were made, to induce the king to remove the governor. +Accordingly, in 1740, he was compelled to resign his office, and +Grandfather’s chair into the bargain, to Mr. Shirley. + + + + +Chapter VIII + + +"William Shirley," said Grandfather, "had come from England a few years +before, and begun to practise law in Boston. You will think, perhaps, +that, as he had been a lawyer, the new governor used to sit in our great +chair, reading heavy law-books from morning till night. On the contrary, +he was as stirring and active a governor as Massachusetts ever had. Even +Sir William Phips hardly equalled him. The first year or two of his +administration was spent in trying to regulate the currency. But, in 1744, +after a peace of more than thirty years, war broke out between France and +England." + +"And I suppose," said Charley, "the governor went to take Canada." + +"Not exactly, Charley," said Grandfather, "though you have made a pretty +shrewd conjecture. He planned, in 1745, an expedition against Louisbourg. +This was a fortified city, on the Island of Cape Breton, near Nova Scotia. +Its walls were of immense height and strength, and were defended by +hundreds of heavy cannon. It was the strongest fortress which the French +possessed in America; and if the king of France had guessed Governor +Shirley’s intentions, he would have sent all the ships he could muster, to +protect it." + +As the siege of Louisbourg was one of the most remarkable events that ever +the inhabitants of New England were engaged in, Grandfather endeavored to +give his auditors a lively idea of the spirit with which they set about +it. We shall call his description + + + +THE PROVINCIAL MUSTER + + +The expedition against Louisbourg first began to be thought of in the +month of January. From that time, the governor’s chair was continually +surrounded by counsellors, representatives, clergymen, captains, pilots, +and all manner of people, with whom he consulted about this wonderful +project. + +First of all, it was necessary to provide men and arms. The legislature +immediately sent out a huge quantity of paper money, with which, as if by +magic spell, the governor hoped to get possession of all the old cannon, +powder and balls, rusty swords and muskets, and every thing else that +would be serviceable in killing Frenchmen. Drums were beaten in all the +villages of Massachusetts, to enlist soldiers for the service. Messages +were sent to the other governors of New England, and to New York and +Pennsylvania, entreating them to unite in this crusade against the French. +All these provinces agreed to give what assistance they could. + +But there was one very important thing to be decided. Who shall be the +General of this great army? Peace had continued such an unusual length of +time, that there was now less military experience among the colonists, +than at any former period. The old Puritans had always kept their weapons +bright, and were never destitute of warlike captains, who were skilful in +assault or defence. But the swords of their descendants had grown rusty by +disuse. There was nobody in New England that knew any thing about sieges, +or any other regular fighting. The only persons, at all acquainted with +warlike business, were a few elderly men, who had hunted Indians through +the underbrush of the forest, in old Governor Dummer’s war. + +In this dilemma, Governor Shirley fixed upon a wealthy merchant, named +William Pepperell, who was pretty well known and liked among the people. +As to military skill, he had no more of it than his neighbors. But, as the +governor urged him very pressingly, Mr. Pepperell consented to shut up his +leger, gird on a sword, and assume the title of General. + +Meantime, what a hubbub was raised by this scheme! Rub-a-dub-dub! +Rub-a-dub-dub! The rattle of drums, beaten out of all manner of time, was +heard above every other sound. + +Nothing now was so valuable as arms, of whatever style and fashion they +might be. The bellows blew, and the hammer clanged continually upon the +anvil, while the blacksmiths were repairing the broken weapons of other +wars. Doubtless, some of the soldiers lugged out those enormous, heavy +muskets, which used to be fired with rests, in the time of the early +Puritans. Great horse-pistols, too, were found, which would go off with a +bang like a cannon. Old cannon, with touch-holes almost as big as their +muzzles, were looked upon as inestimable treasures. Pikes, which perhaps, +had been handled by Miles Standish’s soldiers, now made their appearance +again. Many a young man ransacked the garret, and brought forth his +great-grandfather’s sword, corroded with rust, and stained with the blood +of King Philip’s war. + +Never had there been seen such an arming as this, when a people, so long +peaceful, rose to the war, with the best weapons that they could lay their +hands upon. And still the drums were heard—Rub-a-dub-dub! +Rub-a-dub-dub!—in all the towns and villages; and louder and more numerous +grew the trampling footsteps of the recruits that marched behind. + +And now the army began to gather into Boston. Tall, lanky, awkward, +fellows, came in squads, and companies, and regiments, swaggering along, +dressed in their brown homespun clothes and blue yarn stockings. They +stooped, as if they still had hold of the plough-handles, and marched +without any time or tune. Hither they came, from the corn-fields, from the +clearing in the forest, from the blacksmith’s forge, from the carpenter’s +workshop, and from the shoemaker’s seat. They were an army of rough faces +and sturdy frames. A trained officer of Europe would have laughed at them, +till his sides had ached. But there was a spirit in their bosoms, which is +more essential to soldiership than to wear red coats, and march in stately +ranks to the sound of regular music. + +Still was heard the beat of the drum—rub-a-dub-dub!—and now a host of +three or four thousand men had found their way to Boston. Little quiet was +there then! Forth scampered the school-boys, shouting behind the drums. +The whole town—the whole land—was on fire with war. + +After the arrival of the troops, they were probably reviewed upon the +Common. We may imagine Governor Shirley and General Pepperell riding +slowly along the line, while the drummers beat strange old tunes, like +psalm-tunes, and all the officers and soldiers put on their most warlike +looks. It would have been a terrible sight for the Frenchmen, could they +but have witnessed it! + +At length, on the twenty-fourth of March, 1745, the army gave a parting +shout, and set sail from Boston in ten or twelve vessels, which had been +hired by the governor. A few days afterwards, an English fleet, commanded +by Commodore Peter Warren, sailed also for Louisbourg, to assist the +provincial army. So, now, after all this bustle of preparation, the town +and province were left in stillness and repose. + +But, stillness and repose, at such a time of anxious expectation, are hard +to bear. The hearts of the old people and women sunk within them, when +they reflected what perils they had sent their sons, and husbands, and +brothers, to encounter. The boys loitered heavily to school, missing the +rub-a-dub-dub, and the trampling march, in the rear of which they had so +lately run and shouted. All the ministers prayed earnestly, in their +pulpits, for a blessing on the army of New England. In every family, when +the good man lifted up his heart in domestic worship, the burthen of his +petition was for the safety of those dear ones, who were fighting under +the walls of Louisbourg. + +Governor Shirley, all this time, was probably in an ecstasy of impatience. +He could not sit still a moment. He found no quiet, not even in +Grandfather’s chair, but hurried to-and-fro, and up and down the staircase +of the Province House. Now, he mounted to the cupola, and looked sea-ward, +straining his eyes to discover if there were a sail upon the horizon. Now, +he hastened down the stairs, and stood beneath the portal, on the red +freestone steps, to receive some mud-bespattered courtier, from whom he +hoped to hear tidings of the army. + +A few weeks after the departure of the troops, Commodore Warren sent a +small vessel to Boston, with two French prisoners. One of them was +Monsieur Bouladrie, who had been commander of a battery, outside of the +walls of Louisbourg. The other was the Marquis de la Maison Forte, captain +of a French frigate, which had been taken by Commodore Warren’s fleet. +These prisoners assured Governor Shirley, that the fortifications of +Louisbourg were far too strong ever to be stormed by the provincial army. + +Day after day, and week after week, went on. The people grew almost +heart-sick with anxiety; for the flower of the country was at peril in +this adventurous expedition. It was now day-break, on the morning of the +third of July. + +But, hark! what sound is this? The hurried clang of a bell! There is the +Old North, pealing suddenly out!—there, the Old South strikes in!—now, the +peal comes from the church in Brattle street!—the bells of nine or ten +steeples are all flinging their iron voices, at once, upon the morning +breeze! Is it joy or alarm? There goes the roar of a cannon, too! A royal +salute is thundered forth. And, now, we hear the loud exulting shout of a +multitude, assembled in the street. Huzza, Huzza! Louisbourg has +surrendered! Huzza! + + + +"O Grandfather, how glad I should have been to live in those times!" cried +Charley. "And what reward did the king give to General Pepperell and +Governor Shirley?" + +"He made Pepperell a baronet; so that he was now to be called Sir William +Pepperell," replied Grandfather. "He likewise appointed both Pepperell and +Shirley to be colonels in the royal army. These rewards, and higher ones, +were well deserved; for this was the greatest triumph that the English met +with, in the whole course of that war. General Pepperell became a man of +great fame. I have seen a full length portrait of him, representing him in +a splendid scarlet uniform, standing before the walls of Louisbourg, while +several bombs are falling through the air." + +"But, did the country gain any real good by the conquest of Louisbourg?" +asked Laurence. "Or was all the benefit reaped by Pepperell and Shirley?" + +"The English Parliament," said Grandfather, "agreed to pay the colonists +for all the expenses of the siege. Accordingly, in 1749, two hundred and +fifteen chests of Spanish dollars, and one hundred casks of copper coin, +were brought from England to Boston. The whole amount was about a million +of dollars. Twenty-seven carts and trucks carried this money from the +wharf to the provincial treasury. Was not this a pretty liberal reward?" + +"The mothers of the young men, who were killed at the siege of Louisbourg, +would not have thought it so," said Laurence. + +"No, Laurence," rejoined Grandfather; "and every warlike achievement +involves an amount of physical and moral evil, for which all the gold in +the Spanish mines would not be the slightest recompense. But, we are to +consider that this siege was one of the occasions, on which the colonists +tested their ability for war, and thus were prepared for the great contest +of the Revolution. In that point of view, the valor of our forefathers was +its own reward." + +Grandfather went on to say, that the success of the expedition against +Louisbourg, induced Shirley and Pepperell to form a scheme for conquering +Canada. This plan, however, was not carried into execution. + +In the year 1746, great terror was excited by the arrival of a formidable +French fleet upon the coast. It was commanded by the Duke d’Anville, and +consisted of forty ships of war, besides vessels with soldiers on board. +With this force, the French intended to retake Louisbourg, and afterwards +to ravage the whole of New England. Many people were ready to give up the +country for lost. + +But the hostile fleet met with so many disasters and losses, by storm and +shipwreck, that the Duke d’Anville is said to have poisoned himself in +despair. The officer next in command threw himself upon his sword and +perished. Thus deprived of their commanders, the remainder of the ships +returned to France. This was as great a deliverance for New England, as +that which old England had experienced in the days of Queen Elizabeth, +when the Spanish Armada was wrecked upon her coast. + +"In 1747," proceeded Grandfather, "Governor Shirley was driven from the +Province House, not by a hostile fleet and army, but by a mob of the +Boston people. They were so incensed at the conduct of the British +Commodore Knowles, who had impressed some of their fellow-citizens, that +several thousands of them surrounded the council-chamber, and threw stones +and brick-bats into the windows. The governor attempted to pacify them; +but, not succeeding, he thought it necessary to leave the town, and take +refuge within the walls of Castle William. Quiet was not restored, until +Commodore Knowles had sent back the impressed men. This affair was a flash +of spirit, that might have warned the English not to venture upon any +oppressive measures against their colonial brethren." + +Peace being declared between France and England in 1748, the governor had +now an opportunity to sit at his ease in Grandfather’s chair. Such repose, +however, appears not to have suited his disposition; for, in the following +year, he went to England, and thence was dispatched to France, on public +business. Meanwhile, as Shirley had not resigned his office, +Lieutenant-Governor Phips acted as chief magistrate in his stead. + + + + +Chapter IX + + +In the early twilight of Thanksgiving eve, came Laurence, and Clara, and +Charley, and little Alice, hand in hand, and stood in a semi-circle round +Grandfather’s chair. They had been joyous, throughout that day of +festivity, mingling together in all kinds of play, so that the house had +echoed with their airy mirth. + +Grandfather, too, had been happy, though not mirthful. He felt that this +was to be set down as one of the good Thanksgivings of his life. In truth, +all his former Thanksgivings had borne their part in the present one; for, +his years of infancy, and youth, and manhood with their blessings and +their griefs, had flitted before him, while he sat silently in the great +chair. Vanished scenes had been pictured in the air. The forms of departed +friends had visited him. Voices, to be heard no more on earth, had sent an +echo from the infinite and the eternal. These shadows, if such they were, +seemed almost as real to him, as what was actually present—as the merry +shouts and laughter of the children—as their figures, dancing like +sunshine before his eyes. + +He felt that the past was not taken from him. The happiness of former days +was a possession forever. And there was something in the mingled sorrow of +his lifetime, that became akin to happiness, after being long treasured in +the depths of his heart. There it underwent a change, and grew more +precious than pure gold. + +And now came the children, somewhat aweary with their wild play, and +sought the quiet enjoyment of Grandfather’s talk. The good old gentleman +rubbed his eyes, and smiled round upon them all. He was glad, as most aged +people are, to find that he was yet of consequence, and could give +pleasure to the world. After being so merry, all day long, did these +children desire to hear his sober talk? Oh, then, old Grandfather had yet +a place to fill among living men,—or at least among boys and girls! + +"Begin quick, Grandfather," cried little Alice; "for Pussy wants to hear +you." + +And, truly, our yellow friend, the cat, lay upon the hearth rug, basking +in the warmth of the fire, pricking up her ears, and turning her head from +the children to Grandfather, and from Grandfather to the children, as if +she felt herself very sympathetic with them all. A loud purr, like the +singing of a tea-kettle, or the hum of a spinning-wheel, testified that +she was as comfortable and happy as a cat could be. For Puss had feasted, +and therefore, like Grandfather and the children, had kept a good +Thanksgiving. + +"Does Pussy want to hear me?" said Grandfather, smiling. "Well; we must +please Pussy, if we can!" + +And so he took up the history of the chair, from the epoch of the peace of +1748. By one of the provisions of the treaty, Louisbourg, which the New +Englanders had been at so much pains to take, was restored to the king of +France. + +The French were afraid, that, unless their colonies should be better +defended than heretofore, another war might deprive them of the whole. +Almost as soon as peace was declared, therefore, they began to build +strong fortifications in the interior of North America. It was strange to +behold these warlike castles, on the banks of solitary lakes, and far in +the midst of woods. The Indian, paddling his birch-canoe on Lake +Champlain, looked up at the high ramparts of Ticonderoga, stone piled on +stone, bristling with cannon, and the white flag of France floating above. +There were similar fortifications on Lake Ontario, and near the great +Falls of Niagara, and at the sources of the Ohio River. And all around +these forts and castles lay the eternal forest; and the roll of the drum +died away in those deep solitudes. + +The truth was, that the French intended to build forts, all the way from +Canada to Louisiana. They would then have had a wall of military strength, +at the back of the English settlements, so as completely to hem them in. +The king of England considered the building of these forts as a sufficient +cause of war, which was accordingly commenced in 1754. + +"Governor Shirley," said Grandfather, "had returned to Boston in 1753. +While in Paris, he had married a second wife, a young French girl, and now +brought her to the Province House. But, when war was breaking out, it was +impossible for such a bustling man to stay quietly at home, sitting in our +old chair, with his wife and children round about him. He therefore +obtained a command in the English forces." + +"And what did Sir William Pepperell do?" asked Charley. + +"He staid at home," said Grandfather, "and was general of the militia. The +veteran regiments of the English army, which were now sent across the +Atlantic, would have scorned to fight under the orders of an old American +merchant. And now began what aged people call the Old French War. It would +be going too far astray from the history of our chair, to tell you one +half of the battles that were fought. I cannot even allow myself to +describe the bloody defeat of General Braddock, near the sources of the +Ohio River, in 1755. But, I must not omit to mention, that when the +English general was mortally wounded, and his army routed, the remains of +it were preserved by the skill and valor of GEORGE WASHINGTON." + +At the mention of this illustrious name, the children started, as if a +sudden sunlight had gleamed upon the history of their country, now that +the great Deliverer had arisen above the horizon. + +Among all the events of the Old French War, Grandfather thought that there +was none more interesting than the removal of the inhabitants of Acadia. +From the first settlement of this ancient province of the French, in 1604, +until the present time, its people could scarcely ever know what kingdom +held dominion over them. They were a peaceful race, taking no delight in +warfare, and caring nothing for military renown. And yet, in every war, +their region was infested with iron-hearted soldiers, both French and +English, who fought one another for the privilege of ill treating these +poor harmless Acadians. Sometimes the treaty of peace made them subjects +of one king, sometimes of another. + +At the peace of 1748, Acadia had been ceded to England. But the French +still claimed a large portion of it, and built forts for its defence. In +1755, these forts were taken, and the whole of Acadia was conquered, by +three thousand men from Massachusetts, under the command of General +Winslow. The inhabitants were accused of supplying the French with +provisions, and of doing other things that violated their neutrality. + +"These accusations were probably true," observed Grandfather; "for the +Acadians were descended from the French, and had the same friendly +feelings towards them, that the people of Massachusetts had for the +English. But their punishment was severe. The English determined to tear +these poor people from their native homes and scatter them abroad." + +The Acadians were about seven thousand in number. A considerable part of +them were made prisoners, and transported to the English colonies. All +their dwellings and churches were burnt, their cattle were killed, and the +whole country was laid waste, so that none of them might find shelter or +food in their old homes, after the departure of the English. One thousand +of the prisoners were sent to Massachusetts; and Grandfather allowed his +fancy to follow them thither, and tried to give his auditors an idea of +their situation. + +We shall call this passage the story of + + + +THE ACADIAN EXILES + + +A sad day it was for the poor Acadians, when the armed soldiers drove +them, at the point of the bayonet, down to the sea-shore. Very sad were +they, likewise, while tossing upon the ocean, in the crowded transport +vessels. But, methinks, it must have been sadder still, when they were +landed on the Long Wharf, in Boston, and left to themselves, on a foreign +strand. + +Then, probably, they huddled together, and looked into one another’s faces +for the comfort which was not there. Hitherto, they had been confined on +board of separate vessels, so that they could not tell whether their +relatives and friends were prisoners along with them. But, now, at least, +they could tell that many had been left behind, or transported to other +regions. + +Now, a desolate wife might be heard calling for her husband. He, alas! had +gone, she knew not whither, or perhaps had fled into the woods of Acadia, +and had now returned to weep over the ashes of their dwelling. An aged +widow was crying out, in a querulous, lamentable tone, for her son, whose +affectionate toil had supported her for many a year. He was not in the +crowd of exiles; and what could this aged widow do but sink down and die? +Young men and maidens, whose hearts had been torn asunder by separation, +had hoped, during the voyage, to meet their beloved ones at its close. +Now, they began to feel that they were separated forever. And, perhaps, a +lonesome little girl, a golden-haired child of five years old, the very +picture of our little Alice, was weeping and wailing for her mother, and +found not a soul to give her a kind word. + +Oh, how many broken bonds of affection were here! Country lost!—friends +lost!—their rural wealth of cottage, field, and herds, all lost together! +Every tie between these poor exiles and the world seemed to be cut off at +once. They must have regretted that they had not died before their exile; +for even the English would not have been so pitiless as to deny them +graves in their native soil. The dead were happy; for they were not +exiles! + +While they thus stood upon the wharf, the curiosity and inquisitiveness of +the New England people would naturally lead them into the midst of the +poor Acadians. Prying busy-bodies thrust their heads into the circle, +wherever two or three of the exiles were conversing together. How puzzled +did they look, at the outlandish sound of the French tongue! There were +seen the New England women, too. They had just come out of their warm, +safe homes, where every thing was regular and comfortable, and where their +husbands and children would be with them at night-fall. Surely, they could +pity the wretched wives and mothers of Acadia! Or, did the sign of the +cross, which the Acadians continually made upon their breasts, and which +was abhorred by the descendants of the Puritans—did that sign exclude all +pity? + +Among the spectators, too, was the noisy brood of Boston school-boys, who +came running, with laughter and shouts, to gaze at this crowd of oddly +dressed foreigners. At first they danced and capered around them, full of +merriment and mischief. But the despair of the Acadians soon had its +effect upon these thoughtless lads, and melted them into tearful sympathy. + +At a little distance from the throng, might be seen the wealthy and +pompous merchants, whose warehouses stood on Long Wharf. It was difficult +to touch these rich men’s hearts; for they had all the comforts of the +world at their command; and when they walked abroad, their feelings were +seldom moved, except by the roughness of the pavement, irritating their +gouty toes. Leaning upon their gold-headed canes, they watched the scene +with an aspect of composure. But, let us hope, they distributed some of +their superfluous coin among these hapless exiles, to purchase food and a +night’s lodging. + +After standing a long time at the end of the wharf, gazing seaward, as if +to catch a glimpse of their lost Acadia, the strangers began to stray into +the town. + +They went, we will suppose, in parties and groups, here a hundred, there a +score, there ten, there three or four, who possessed some bond of unity +among themselves. Here and there was one, who, utterly desolate, stole +away by himself, seeking no companionship. + +Whither did they go? I imagine them wandering about the streets, telling +the town’s-people, in outlandish, unintelligible words, that no earthly +affliction ever equalled what had befallen them. Man’s brotherhood with +man was sufficient to make the New Englanders understand this language. +The strangers wanted food. Some of them sought hospitality at the doors of +the stately mansions, which then stood in the vicinity of Hanover Street +and the North Square. Others were applicants at the humble wooden +tenements, where dwelt the petty shop-keepers and mechanics. Pray Heaven, +that no family in Boston turned one of these poor exiles from their door! +It would be a reproach upon New England—a crime worthy of heavy +retribution—if the aged women and children, or even the strong men, were +allowed to feel the pinch of hunger. + +Perhaps some of the Acadians, in their aimless wanderings through the +town, found themselves near a large brick edifice, which was fenced in +from the street by an iron railing, wrought with fantastic figures. They +saw a flight of red freestone steps, ascending to a portal, above which +was a balcony and balustrade. Misery and desolation give men the right of +free passage everywhere. Let us suppose, then, that they mounted the +flight of steps, and passed into the Province House. Making their way into +one of the apartments, they beheld a richly clad gentleman, seated in a +stately chair, with gilding upon the carved work of its back, and a gilded +lion’s head at the summit. This was Governor Shirley, meditating upon +matters of war and state, in Grandfather’s chair! + +If such an incident did happen, Shirley, reflecting what a ruin of +peaceful and humble hopes had been wrought by the cold policy of the +statesman, and the iron hand of the warrior, might have drawn a deep moral +from it. It should have taught him that the poor man’s hearth is sacred, +and that armies and nations have no right to violate it. It should have +made him feel, that England’s triumph, and increased dominion, could not +compensate to mankind, nor atone to Heaven, for the ashes of a single +Acadian cottage. But it is not thus that statesmen and warriors moralize. + +"Grandfather," cried Laurence, with emotion trembling in his voice, "did +iron-hearted War itself ever do so hard and cruel a thing as this before?" + +"You have rend in history, Laurence, of whole regions wantonly laid +waste," said Grandfather. "In the removal of the Acadians, the troops were +guilty of no cruelty or outrage, except what was inseparable from the +measure." + +Little Alice, whose eyes had, all along, been brimming full of tears, now +burst forth a-sobbing; for Grandfather had touched her sympathies more +than he intended. + +"To think of a whole people, homeless in the world!" said Clara, with +moistened eyes. "There never was any thing so sad!" + +"It was their own fault," cried Charley, energetically. "Why did not they +fight for the country where they were born? Then, if the worst had +happened to them they could only have been killed and buried there. They +would not have been exiles then!" + +"Certainly, their lot was as hard as death," said Grandfather. "All that +could be done for them, in the English provinces, was to send them to the +alms-houses, or bind them out to task-masters. And this was the fate of +persons, who had possessed a comfortable property in their native country. +Some of them found means to embark for France; but though it was the land +of their forefathers, it must have been a foreign land to them. Those, who +remained behind, always cherished a belief, that the king of France would +never make peace with England, till his poor Acadians were restored their +country and their homes." + +"And did he?" inquired Clara. + +"Alas, my dear Clara," said Grandfather, "it is improbable that the +slightest whisper of the woes of Acadia ever reached the ears of Louis the +Fifteenth. The exiles grew old in the British provinces, and never saw +Acadia again. Their descendants remain among us, to this day. They have +forgotten the language of their ancestors, and probably retain no +tradition of their misfortunes. But, methinks, if I were an American poet, +I would choose Acadia for the subject of my song." + +Since Grandfather first spoke these words, the most famous of American +poets has drawn sweet tears from all of us, by his beautiful poem of +Evangeline. + +And now, having thrown a gentle gloom around the Thanksgiving fire-side, +by a story that made the children feel the blessing of a secure and +peaceful hearth, Grandfather put off the other events of the Old French +War till the next evening. + + + + +Chapter X + + +In the twilight of the succeeding eve, when the red beams of the fire were +dancing upon the wall, the children besought Grandfather to tell them what +had next happened to the old chair. + +"Our chair," said Grandfather, "stood all this time in the Province House. +But, Governor Shirley had seldom an opportunity to repose within its arms. +He was loading his troops through the forest, or sailing in a flat-boat on +Lake Ontario, or sleeping in his tent, while the awful cataract of Niagara +sent its roar through his dreams. At one period, in the early part of the +war, Shirley had the chief command of all the king’s forces in America." + +"Did his young wife go with him to the war?" asked Clara. + +"I rather imagine," replied Grandfather, "that she remained in Boston. +This lady, I suppose, had our chair all to herself, and used to sit in it, +during those brief intervals when a young French woman can be quiet enough +to sit in a chair. The people of Massachusetts were never fond of Governor +Shirley’s young French wife. They had a suspicion that she betrayed the +military plans of the English to the generals of the French armies." + +"And was it true?" inquired Clara. + +"Probably not," said Grandfather. "But the mere suspicion did Shirley a +great deal of harm. Partly, perhaps, for this reason, but much more on +account of his inefficiency as a general, he was deprived of his command, +in 1756, and recalled to England. He never afterwards made any figure in +public life." + +As Grandfather’s chair had no locomotive properties, and did not even run +on castors, it cannot be supposed to have marched in person to the Old +French War. But Grandfather delayed its momentous history, while he +touched briefly upon some of the bloody battles, sieges, and onslaughts, +the tidings of which kept continually coming to the ears of the old +inhabitants of Boston. The woods of the north were populous with fighting +men. All the Indian tribes uplifted their tomahawks, and took part either +with the French or English. The rattle of musketry and roar of cannon +disturbed the ancient quiet of the forest, and actually drove the bears +and other wild beasts to the more cultivated portion of the country in the +vicinity of the sea-ports. The children felt as if they were transported +back to those forgotten times, and that the couriers from the army, with +the news of a battle lost or won, might even now be heard galloping +through the streets. Grandfather told them about the battle of Lake +George, in 1755, when the gallant Colonel Williams, a Massachusetts +officer, was slain, with many of his countrymen. But General Johnson and +General Lyman, with their army, drove back the enemy, and mortally wounded +the French leader, who was called the Baron Dieskau. A gold watch, +pilfered from the poor Baron, is still in existence, and still marks each +moment of time, without complaining of weariness, although its hands have +been in motion ever since the hour of battle. + +In the first years of the war, there were many disasters on the English +side. Among these was the loss of Fort Oswego, in 1756, and of Fort +William Henry, in the following year. But the greatest misfortune that +befell the English, during the whole war, was the repulse of General +Abercrombie, with his army, from the ramparts of Ticonderoga, in 1758. He +attempted to storm the walls; but a terrible conflict ensued, in which +more than two thousand Englishmen and New Englanders were killed or +wounded. The slain soldiers now lie buried around that ancient fortress. +When the plough passes over the soil, it turns up here and there a +mouldering bone. + +Up to this period, none of the English generals had shown any military +talent. Shirley, the Earl of Loudon, and General Abercrombie, had each +held the chief command, at different times; but not one of them had won a +single important triumph for the British arms. This ill success was not +owing to the want of means; for, in 1758, General Abercrombie had fifty +thousand soldiers under his command. But the French general, the famous +Marquis de Montcalm, possessed a great genius for war, and had something +within him, that taught him how battles were to be won. + +At length, in 1759, Sir Jeffrey Amherst was appointed commander-in-chief +of all the British forces in America. He was a man of ability, and a +skilful soldier. A plan was now formed for accomplishing that object, +which had so long been the darling wish of the New Englanders, and which +their fathers had so many times attempted. This was the conquest of +Canada. + +Three separate armies were to enter Canada, from different quarters. One +of the three, commanded by General Prideaux, was to embark on Lake +Ontario, and proceed to Montreal. The second, at the head of which was Sir +Jeffrey Amherst himself, was destined to reach the River St. Lawrence, by +the way of Lake Champlain, and then go down the river to meet the third +army. This last, led by General Wolfe, was to enter the St. Lawrence from +the sea, and ascend the river to Quebec. It is to Wolfe and his army that +England owes one of the most splendid triumphs, ever written in her +history. + +Grandfather described the siege of Quebec, and told how Wolfe led his +soldiers up a rugged and lofty precipice, that rose from the shore of the +river to the plain on which the city stood. This bold adventure was +achieved in the darkness of night. At day-break, tidings were carried to +the Marquis de Montcalm, that the English army was waiting to give him +battle on the plains of Abraham. This brave French general ordered his +drums to strike up, and immediately marched to encounter Wolfe. + +He marched to his own death. The battle was the most fierce and terrible, +that had ever been fought in America. General Wolfe was at the head of his +soldiers, and while encouraging them onward, received a mortal wound. He +reclined against a stone, in the agonies of death; but it seemed as if his +spirit could not pass away, while the fight yet raged so doubtfully. +Suddenly, a shout came pealing across the battle-field—"They flee! they +flee!" and, for a moment, Wolfe lifted his languid head. "Who flee?" he +inquired. "The French," replied an officer. "Then I die satisfied!" said +Wolfe, and expired in the arms of victory. + +"If ever a warrior’s death were glorious, Wolfe’s was so!" said +Grandfather; and his eye kindled, though he was a man of peaceful +thoughts, and gentle spirit. "His life-blood streamed to baptize the soil +which he had added to the dominion of Britain! His dying breath was +mingled with his army’s shout of victory!" + +"Oh, it was a good death to die!" cried Charley, with glistening eyes. +"Was it not a good death, Laurence?" + +Laurence made no reply; for his heart burned within him, as the picture of +Wolfe, dying on the blood-stained field of victory, arose to his +imagination; and yet, he had a deep inward consciousness, that, after all, +there was a truer glory than could thus be won. + +"There were other battles in Canada, after Wolfe’s victory," resumed +Grandfather; "but we may consider the Old French War as having terminated +with this great event. The treaty of peace, however, was not signed until +1763. The terms of the treaty were very disadvantageous to the French; for +all Canada, and all Acadia, and the island of Cape Breton, in short, all +the territories that France and England had been fighting about, for +nearly a hundred years—were surrendered to the English." + +"So, now, at last," said Laurence, "New England had gained her wish. +Canada was taken!" + +"And now there was nobody to fight with, but the Indians," said Charley. + +Grandfather mentioned two other important events. The first was the great +fire of Boston, in 1700, when the glare from nearly three hundred +buildings, all in flames at once, shone through the windows of the +Province House, and threw a fierce lustre upon the gilded foliage and +lion’s head of our old chair. The second event was the proclamation, in +the same year, of George the Third as king of Great Britain. The blast of +the trumpet sounded from the balcony of the Town House, and awoke the +echoes far and wide, as if to challenge all mankind to dispute King +George’s title. + +Seven times, as the successive monarchs of Britain ascended the throne, +the trumpet-peal of proclamation had been heard by those who sat in our +venerable chair. But, when the next king put on his father’s crown, no +trumpet-peal proclaimed it to New England! Long before that day, America +had shaken off the royal government. + + + + +Chapter XI + + +Now that Grandfather had fought through the Old French War, in which our +chair made no very distinguished figure, he thought it high time to tell +the children some of the more private history of that praiseworthy old +piece of furniture. + +"In 1757," said Grandfather, "after Shirley had been summoned to England, +Thomas Pownall was appointed governor of Massachusetts. He was a gay and +fashionable English gentleman, who had spent much of his life in London, +but had a considerable acquaintance with America. The new governor appears +to have taken no active part in the war that was going on; although, at +one period, he talked of marching against the enemy, at the head of his +company of cadets. But, on the whole, he probably concluded that it was +more befitting a governor to remain quietly in our chair, reading the +newspapers and official documents." + +"Did the people like Pownall?" asked Charley. + +"They found no fault with him," replied Grandfather. "It was no time to +quarrel with the governor, when the utmost harmony was required, in order +to defend the country against the French. But Pownall did not remain long +in Massachusetts. In 1759, he was sent to be governor of South Carolina. +In thus exchanging one government for another, I suppose he felt no +regret, except at the necessity of leaving Grandfather’s chair behind +him." + +"He might have taken it to South Carolina," observed Clara. + +"It appears to me," said Laurence, giving the rein to his fancy, "that the +fate of this ancient chair was, somehow or other, mysteriously connected +with the fortunes of old Massachusetts. If Governor Pownall had put it +aboard the vessel in which he sailed for South Carolina, she would +probably have lain wind-bound in Boston harbor. It was ordained that the +chair should not be taken away. Don’t you think so, Grandfather?" + +"It was kept here for Grandfather and me to sit in together," said little +Alice, "and for Grandfather to tell stories about." + +"And Grandfather is very glad of such a companion, and such a theme," said +the old gentleman, with a smile. "Well, Laurence, if our oaken chair, like +the wooden Palladium of Troy, was connected with the country’s fate, yet +there appears to have been no supernatural obstacle to its removal from +the Province House. In 1760, Sir Francis Bernard, who had been governor of +New Jersey, was appointed to the same office in Massachusetts. He looked +at the old chair, and thought it quite too shabby to keep company with a +new set of mahogany chairs, and an aristocratic sofa, which had just +arrived from London. He therefore ordered it to be put away in the +garret." + +The children were loud in their exclamations against this irreverent +conduct of Sir Francis Bernard. But Grandfather defended him, as well as +he could. He observed, that it was then thirty years since the chair had +been beautified by Governor Belcher. Most of the gilding was worn off by +the frequent scourings which it had undergone, beneath the hands of a +black slave. The damask cushion, once so splendid, was now squeezed out of +all shape, and absolutely in tatters, so many were the ponderous gentlemen +who had deposited their weight upon it, during these thirty years. + +Moreover, at a council held by the Earl of Loudon with the governors of +New England, in 1757, his lordship, in a moment of passion, had kicked +over the chair with his military boot. By this unprovoked and +unjustifiable act, our venerable friend had suffered a fracture of one of +its rungs. + +"But," said Grandfather, "our chair, after all, was not destined to spend +the remainder of its days in the inglorious obscurity of a garret. Thomas +Hutchinson, lieutenant-governor of the province, was told of Sir Francis +Bernard’s design. This gentleman was more familiar with the history of New +England than any other man alive. He knew all the adventures and +vicissitudes through which the old chair had passed, and could have told, +as accurately as your own Grandfather, who were the personages that had +occupied it. Often, while visiting at the Province House, he had eyed the +chair with admiration, and felt a longing desire to become the possessor +of it. He now waited upon Sir Francis Bernard, and easily obtained leave +to carry it home." + +"And I hope," said Clara, "he had it varnished and gilded anew." + +"No," answered Grandfather. "What Mr. Hutchinson desired was to restore +the chair, as much as possible, to its original aspect, such as it had +appeared, when it was first made out of the Earl of Lincoln’s oak-tree. +For this purpose he ordered it to be well scoured with soap and sand and +polished with wax, and then provided it with a substantial leather +cushion. When all was completed to his mind, he sat down in the old chair, +and began to write his History of Massachusetts." + +"Oh, that was a bright thought in Mr. Hutchinson!" exclaimed Laurence. +"And, no doubt, the dim figures of the former possessors of the chair +flitted around him, as he wrote, and inspired him with a knowledge of all +that they had done and suffered while on earth." + +"Why, my dear Laurence," replied Grandfather, smiling, "if Mr. Hutchinson +was favored with any such extraordinary inspiration, he made but a poor +use of it in his History; for a duller piece of composition never came +from any man’s pen. However, he was accurate, at least, though far from +possessing the brilliancy or philosophy of Mr. Bancroft." + +"But, if Hutchinson knew the history of the chair," rejoined Laurence, +"his heart must have been stirred by it." + +"It must, indeed," said Grandfather. "It would be entertaining and +instructive, at the present day, to imagine what were Mr. Hutchinson’s +thoughts, as he looked back upon the long vista of events with which this +chair was so remarkably connected." + +And Grandfather allowed his fancy to shape out an image of +Lieutenant-Governor Hutchinson, sitting in an evening reverie by his +fireside, and meditating on the changes that had slowly passed around the +chair. + +A devoted monarchist, Hutchinson would heave no sigh for the subversion of +the original republican government, the purest that the world had seen, +with which the colony began its existence. While reverencing the grim and +stern old Puritans as the founders of his native land, he would not wish +to recall them from their graves, nor to awaken again that king-resisting +spirit, which he imagined to be laid asleep with them forever. Winthrop, +Dudley, Bellingham, Endicott, Leverett, and Bradstreet! All these had had +their day. Ages might come and go, but never again would the people’s +suffrages place a republican governor in their ancient Chair of State! + +Coming down to the epoch of the second charter, Hutchinson thought of the +ship-carpenter Phips, springing from the lowest of the people, and +attaining to the loftiest station in the land. But, he smiled to perceive +that this governor’s example would awaken no turbulent ambition in the +lower orders, for it was a king’s gracious boon alone that made the +ship-carpenter a ruler. Hutchinson rejoiced to mark the gradual growth of +an aristocratic class, to whom the common people, as in duty bound, were +learning humbly to resign the honors, emoluments, and authority of state. +He saw,—or else deceived himself—that, throughout this epoch, the people’s +disposition to self-government had been growing weaker, through long +disuse, and now existed only as a faint traditionary feeling. + +The Lieutenant-Governor’s reverie had now come down to the period at which +he himself was sitting in the historic chair. He endeavored to throw his +glance forward, over the coming years. There, probably, he saw visions of +hereditary rank, for himself and other aristocratic colonists. He saw the +fertile fields of New England, portioned out among a few great +landholders, and descending by entail from generation to generation. He +saw the people a race of tenantry, dependent on their lords. He saw stars, +garters, coronets, and castles. + +"But," added Grandfather, turning to Laurence, "the Lieutenant-Governor’s +castles were built nowhere but among the red embers of the fire, before +which he was sitting. And, just as he had constructed a baronial residence +for himself and his posterity, the fire rolled down upon the hearth, and +crumbled it to ashes!" + +Grandfather now looked at his watch, which hung within a beautiful little +ebony Temple, supported by four Ionic columns. He then laid his hand on +the golden locks of little Alice, whose head had sunk down upon the arm of +our illustrious chair. + +"To bed, to bed, dear child!" said he. "Grandfather has put you to sleep, +already, by his stories about these FAMOUS OLD PEOPLE!" + + + + + +PART III + + + + +Chapter I + + +On the evening of New Year’s day, Grandfather was walking to and fro, +across the carpet, listening to the rain which beat hard against the +curtained windows. The riotous blast shook the casement, as if a strong +man were striving to force his entrance into the comfortable room. With +every puff of the wind, the fire leaped upward from the hearth, laughing +and rejoicing at the shrieks of the wintry storm. + +Meanwhile, Grandfather’s chair stood in its customary place by the +fireside. The bright blaze gleamed upon the fantastic figures of its oaken +back, and shone through the open-work, so that a complete pattern was +thrown upon the opposite side of the room. Sometimes, for a moment or two, +the shadow remained immovable, as if it were painted on the wall. Then, +all at once, it began to quiver, and leap, and dance, with a frisky +motion. Anon, seeming to remember that these antics were unworthy of such +a dignified and venerable chair, it suddenly stood still. But soon it +began to dance anew. + +"Only see how grandfather’s chair is dancing!" cried little Alice. + +And she ran to the wall, and tried to catch hold of the flickering shadow; +for to children of five years old, a shadow seems almost as real as a +substance. + +"I wish," said Clara, "Grandfather would sit down in the chair, and finish +its history." + +If the children had been looking at Grandfather, they would have noticed +that he paused in his walk across the room, when Clara made this remark. +The kind old gentleman was ready and willing to resume his stories of +departed times. But he had resolved to wait till his auditors should +request him to proceed, in order that they might find the instructive +history of the chair a pleasure, and not a task. + +"Grandfather," said Charley, "I am tired to death of this dismal rain, and +of hearing the wind roar in the chimney. I have had no good time all day. +It would be better to hear stories about the chair, than to sit doing +nothing, and thinking of nothing." + +To say the truth, our friend Charley was very much out of humor with the +storm, because it had kept him all day within doors, and hindered him from +making trial of a splendid sled, which Grandfather had given him for a New +Year’s gift. As all sleds, now-a-days, must have a name, the one in +question had been honored with the title of Grandfather’s Chair, which was +painted in golden letters, on each of the sides. Charley greatly admired +the construction of the new vehicle, and felt certain that it would +outstrip any other sled that ever dashed adown the long slopes of the +Common. + +As for Laurence, he happened to be thinking, just at this moment, about +the history of the chair. Kind old Grandfather had made him a present of a +volume of engraved portraits, representing the features of eminent and +famous people of all countries. Among them Laurence found several who had +formerly occupied our chair, or been connected with its adventures. While +Grandfather walked to and fro across the room, the imaginative boy was +gazing at the historic chair. He endeavored to summon up the portraits +which he had seen in his volume, and to place them, like living figures, +in the empty seat. + +"The old chair has begun another year of its existence, to-day," said +Laurence. "We must make haste, or it will have a new history to be told +before we finish the old one." + +"Yes, my children," replied Grandfather, with a smile and a sigh, "another +year has been added to those of the two centuries, and upward, which have +passed since the Lady Arbella brought this chair over from England. It is +three times as old as your Grandfather; but a year makes no impression on +its oaken frame, while it bends the old man nearer and nearer to the +earth; so let me go on with my stories while I may." + +Accordingly, Grandfather came to the fireside, and seated himself in the +venerable chair. The lion’s head looked down with a grimly good-natured +aspect, as the children clustered around the old gentleman’s knees. It +almost seemed as if a real lion were peeping over the back of the chair, +and smiling at the group of auditors, with a sort of lion-like +complaisance. Little Alice, whose fancy often inspired her with singular +ideas, exclaimed that the lion’s head was nodding at her, and that it +looked as if it were going to open its wide jaws and tell a story. + +But, as the lion’s head appeared to be in no haste to speak, and as there +was no record or tradition of its having spoken, during the whole +existence of the chair, Grandfather did not consider it worth while to +wait. + + + + +Chapter II + + +"Charley, my boy," said Grandfather, "do you remember who was the last +occupant of the chair?" + +"It was Lieutenant-Governor Hutchinson," answered Charley. "Sir Francis +Bernard, the new governor, had given him the chair, instead of putting it +away in the garret of the Province House. And when we took leave of +Hutchinson, he was sitting by his fireside, and thinking of the past +adventures of the chair, and of what was to come." + +"Very well," said Grandfather; "and you recollect that this was in 1763, +or thereabouts, at the close of the Old French War. Now, that you may +fully comprehend the remaining adventures of the chair, I must make some +brief remarks on the situation and character of the New England colonies +at this period." + +So Grandfather spoke of the earnest loyalty of our fathers during the Old +French War, and after the conquest of Canada had brought that war to a +triumphant close. + +The people loved and reverenced the king of England, even more than if the +ocean had not rolled its waves between him and them; for, at the distance +of three thousand miles, they could not discover his bad qualities and +imperfections. Their love was increased by the dangers which they had +encountered in order to heighten his glory and extend his dominion. +Throughout the war, the American colonists had fought side by side with +the soldiers of Old England; and nearly thirty thousand young men had laid +down their lives for the honor of King George. And the survivors loved him +the better, because they had done and suffered so much for his sake. + +But, there were some circumstances, that caused America to feel more +independent of England than at an earlier period. Canada and Acadia had +now become British provinces; and our fathers were no longer afraid of the +bands of French and Indians, who used to assault them in old times. For a +century and a half this had been the great terror of New England. Now, the +old French soldier was driven from the north forever. And, even had it +been otherwise the English colonies were growing so populous and powerful, +that they might have felt fully able to protect themselves without any +help from England. + +There were thoughtful and sagacious men, who began to doubt, whether a +great country like America, would always be content to remain under the +government of an island three thousand miles away. This was the more +doubtful, because the English Parliament had long ago made laws which were +intended to be very beneficial to England, at the expense of America. By +these laws, the colonists were forbidden to manufacture articles for their +own use, or to carry on trade with any nation but the English. + +"Now," continued Grandfather, "if King George the Third and his +counsellors had considered these things wisely, they would have taken +another course than they did. But, when they saw how rich and populous the +colonies had grown, their first thought was, how they might make more +profit out of them than heretofore. England was enormously in debt, at the +close of the Old French War, and it was pretended, that this debt had been +contracted for the defence of the American colonies, and that therefore a +part of it ought to be paid by them." + +"Why, this was nonsense," exclaimed Charley; "did not our fathers spend +their lives and their money too, to get Canada for King George?" + +"True, they did," said Grandfather; "and they told the English rulers so. +But the king and his ministers would not listen to good advice. In 1765, +the British Parliament passed a Stamp Act." + +"What was that?" inquired Charley. + +"The Stamp Act," replied Grandfather, "was a law by which all deeds, +bonds, and other papers of the same kind, were ordered to be marked with +the king’s stamp; and without this mark, they were declared illegal and +void. Now, in order to get a blank sheet of paper, with the king’s stamp +upon it, people were obliged to pay three pence more than the actual value +of the paper. And this extra sum of three pence was a tax, and was to be +paid into the king’s treasury." + +"I am sure three pence was not worth quarrelling about!" remarked Clara. + +"It was not for three pence, nor for any amount of money, that America +quarrelled with England," replied Grandfather; "it was for a great +principle. The colonists were determined not to be taxed, except by their +own representatives. They said that neither the king and Parliament nor +any other power on earth, had a right to take their money out of their +pockets, unless they freely gave it. And, rather than pay three pence when +it was unjustly demanded, they resolved to sacrifice all the wealth of the +country, and their lives along with it. They therefore made a most +stubborn resistance to the Stamp Act." + +"That was noble!" exclaimed Laurence. "I understand how it was. If they +had quietly paid this tax of three pence, they would have ceased to be +freemen, and would have become tributaries of England. And so they +contended about a great question of right and wrong, and put every thing +at stake for it." + +"You are right, Laurence," said Grandfather; "and it was really amazing +and terrible to see what a change came over the aspect of the people, the +moment the English Parliament had passed this oppressive act. The former +history of our chair, my children, has given you some idea of what a +harsh, unyielding, stern set of men the old Puritans were. For a good many +years back, however, it had seemed as if these characteristics were +disappearing. But no sooner did England offer wrong to the colonies, than +the descendants of the early settlers proved that they had the same kind +of temper as their forefathers. The moment before, New England appeared +like an humble and loyal subject of the crown; the next instant, she +showed the grim, dark features of an old king-resisting Puritan." + +Grandfather spoke briefly of the public measures that were taken in +opposition to the Stamp Act. As this law affected all the American +colonies alike, it naturally led them to think of consulting together in +order to procure its repeal. For this purpose, the legislature of +Massachusetts proposed that delegates from every colony should meet in +Congress. Accordingly nine colonies, both northern and southern, sent +delegates to the city of New York. + +"And did they consult about going to war with England?" asked Charley. + +"No, Charley," answered Grandfather; "a great deal of talking was yet to +be done, before England and America could come to blows. The Congress +stated the rights and the grievances of the colonists. They sent an humble +petition to the king, and a memorial to the Parliament, beseeching that +the Stamp Act might be repealed. This was all that the delegates had it in +their power to do." + +"They might as well have staid at home, then," said Charley. + +"By no means," replied Grandfather. "It was a most important and memorable +event—this first coming together of the American people, by their +representatives from the north and south. If England had been wise, she +would have trembled at the first word that was spoken in such an +assembly!" + +These remonstrances and petitions, as Grandfather observed, were the work +of grave, thoughtful, and prudent men. Meantime, the young and hot-headed +people went to work in their own way. It is probable that the petitions of +Congress would have had little or no effect on the British statesmen, if +the violent deeds of the American people had not shown how much excited +the people were. LIBERTY TREE was soon heard of in England. + +"What was Liberty Tree?" inquired Clara. + +"It was an old elm tree," answered Grandfather, "which stood near the +corner of Essex street, opposite the Boylston market. Under the spreading +branches of this great tree, the people used to assemble, whenever they +wished to express their feelings and opinions. Thus, after a while, it +seemed as if the liberty of the country was connected with Liberty Tree." + +"It was glorious fruit for a tree to bear," remarked Laurence. + + [Image #3] + +"It bore strange fruit, sometimes," said Grandfather. "One morning in +August, 1765, two figures were found hanging on the sturdy branches of +Liberty Tree. They were dressed in square-skirted coats and small-clothes; +and, as their wigs hung down over their faces, they looked like real men. +One was intended to represent the Earl of Bute, who was supposed to have +advised the king to tax America. The other was meant for the effigy of +Andrew Oliver, a gentleman belonging to one of the most respectable +families in Massachusetts." + +"What harm had he done?" inquired Charley. + +"The king had appointed him to be distributor of the stamps," answered +Grandfather. "Mr. Oliver would have made a great deal of money by this +business. But the people frightened him so much by hanging him in effigy, +and afterwards by breaking into his house, that he promised to have +nothing to do with the stamps. And all the king’s friends throughout +America were compelled to make the same promise." + + + + +Chapter III + + +"Lieutenant-Governor Hutchinson," continued Grandfather, "now began to be +unquiet in our old chair. He had formerly been much respected and beloved +by the people, and had often proved himself a friend to their interests. +But the time was come, when he could not be a friend to the people, +without ceasing to be a friend to the king. It was pretty generally +understood, that Hutchinson would act according to the king’s wishes, +right or wrong, like most of the other gentlemen who held offices under +the crown. Besides, as he was brother-in-law of Andrew Oliver, the people +now felt a particular dislike to him." + +"I should think," said Laurence, "as Mr. Hutchinson had written the +history of our Puritan forefathers, he would have known what the temper of +the people was, and so have taken care not to wrong them." + +"He trusted in the might of the king of England," replied Grandfather, +"and thought himself safe under the shelter of the throne. If no dispute +had arisen between the king and the people, Hutchinson would have had the +character of a wise, good, and patriotic magistrate. But, from the time +that he took part against the rights of his country, the people’s love and +respect were turned to scorn and hatred; and he never had another hour of +peace." + +In order to show what a fierce and dangerous spirit was now aroused among +the inhabitants, Grandfather related a passage from history, which we +shall call + + + +THE HUTCHINSON MOB + + +On the evening of the twenty-sixth of August, 1765, a bonfire was kindled +in King Street. It flamed high upward, and threw a ruddy light over the +front of the town house, on which was displayed a carved representation of +the royal arms. The gilded vane of the cupola glittered in the blaze. The +kindling of this bonfire was the well known signal for the populace of +Boston to assemble in the street. + +Before the tar-barrels, of which the bonfire was made, were half burnt +out, a great crowd had come together. They were chiefly laborers and +seafaring men, together with many young apprentices, and all those idle +people about town who are ready for any kind of mischief. Doubtless some +school-boys were among them. + +While these rough figures stood round the blazing bonfire, you might hear +them speaking bitter words against the high officers of the province. +Governor Bernard, Hutchinson, Oliver, Storey, Hallowell, and other men +whom King George delighted to honor, were reviled as traitors to the +country. Now and then, perhaps, an officer of the crown passed along the +street, wearing the gold-laced hat, white wig, and embroidered waistcoat, +which were the fashion of the day. But, when the people beheld him, they +set up a wild and angry howl, and their faces had an evil aspect, which +was made more terrible by the flickering blaze of the bonfire. + +"I should like to throw the traitor right into that blaze!" perhaps one +fierce rioter would say. + +"Yes; and all his brethren too!" another might reply; "and the governor +and old Tommy Hutchinson into the hottest of it!" + +"And the Earl of Bute along with them," muttered a third; "and burn the +whole pack of them under King George’s nose! No matter if it singed him!" + +Some such expressions as these, either shouted aloud, or muttered under +the breath, were doubtless heard in King Street. The mob, meanwhile, were +growing fiercer, and fiercer, and seemed ready even to set the town on +fire, for the sake of burning the king’s friends out of house and home. +And yet, angry as they were, they sometimes broke into a loud roar of +laughter, as if mischief and destruction were their sport. + +But we must now leave the rioters for a time, and take a peep into the +lieutenant-governor’s splendid mansion. It was a large brick house, +decorated with Ionic pilasters, and stood in Garden Court Street, near the +North Square. + +While the angry mob in King Street were shouting his name, +Lieutenant-Governor Hutchinson sat quietly in Grandfather’s chair, +unsuspicious of the evil that was about to fall upon his head. His beloved +family were in the room with him. He had thrown off his embroidered coat +and powdered wig, and had on a loose flowing gown and purple velvet cap. +He had likewise laid aside the cares of state, and all the thoughts that +had wearied and perplexed him throughout the day. + +Perhaps, in the enjoyment of his home, he had forgotten all about the +Stamp Act, and scarcely remembered that there was a king, across the +ocean, who had resolved to make tributaries of the New Englanders. +Possibly, too, he had forgotten his own ambition, and would not have +exchanged his situation, at that moment, to be governor, or even a lord. + +The wax candles were now lighted, and showed a handsome room, well +provided with rich furniture. On the walls hung the pictures of +Hutchinson’s ancestors, who had been eminent men in their day, and were +honorably remembered in the history of the country. Every object served to +mark the residence of a rich, aristocratic gentleman, who held himself +high above the common people, and could have nothing to fear from them. In +a corner of the room, thrown carelessly upon a chair, were the scarlet +robes of the chief justice. This high office, as well as those of +lieutenant-governor, counsellor, and judge of probate, was filled by +Hutchinson. + +Who or what could disturb the domestic quiet of such a great and powerful +personage as now sat in Grandfather’s chair. + +The lieutenant-governor’s favorite daughter sat by his side. She leaned on +the arm of our great chair, and looked up affectionately into her father’s +face, rejoicing to perceive that a quiet smile was on his lips. But +suddenly a shade came across her countenance. She seemed to listen +attentively, as if to catch a distant sound. + +"What is the matter, my child?" inquired Hutchinson. + +"Father, do not you hear a tumult in the streets?" said she. + +The lieutenant-governor listened. But his ears were duller than those of +his daughter; he could hear nothing more terrible than the sound of a +summer breeze, sighing among the tops of the elm trees. + +"No, foolish child!" he replied, playfully patting her cheek. "There is no +tumult. Our Boston mobs are satisfied with what mischief they have already +done. The king’s friends need not tremble." + +So Hutchinson resumed his pleasant and peaceful meditations, and again +forgot that there were any troubles in the world. But his family were +alarmed, and could not help straining their ears to catch the slightest +sound. More and more distinctly they heard shouts, and then the trampling +of many feet. While they were listening, one of the neighbors rushed +breathless into the room. + +"A mob!—a terrible mob!" cried he: "they have broken into Mr. Storey’s +house, and into Mr. Hallowell’s, and have made themselves drunk with the +liquors in his cellar, and now they are coming hither, as wild as so many +tigers. Flee, lieutenant-governor, for your life! for your life!" + +"Father, dear father, make haste!" shrieked his children. + +But Hutchinson would not hearken to them. He was an old lawyer; and he +could not realize that the people would do any thing so utterly lawless as +to assault him in his peaceful home. He was one of King George’s chief +officers; and it would be an insult and outrage upon the king himself, if +the lieutenant-governor should suffer any wrong. + +"Have no fears on my account," said he; "I am perfectly safe. The king’s +name shall be my protection." + +Yet he bade his family retire into one of the neighboring houses. His +daughter would have remained, but he forced her away. + +The huzzas and riotous uproar of the mob were now heard, close at hand. +The sound was terrible, and struck Hutchinson with the same sort of dread +as if an enraged wild beast had broken loose, and were roaring for its +prey. He crept softly to the window. There he beheld an immense concourse +of people, filling all the street, and rolling onward to his house. It was +like a tempestuous flood, that had swelled beyond its bounds, and would +sweep every thing before it. Hutchinson trembled; he felt, at that moment, +that the wrath of the people was a thousand-fold more terrible than the +wrath of a king. + +That was a moment when a loyalist and an aristocrat, like Hutchinson, +might have learned how powerless are kings, nobles, and great men, when +the low and humble range themselves against them. King George could do +nothing for his servant now. Had King George been there, he could have +done nothing for himself. If Hutchinson had understood this lesson, and +remembered it, he need not, in after years, have been an exile from his +native country, nor finally have laid his bones in a distant land. + +There was now a rush against the doors of the house. The people sent up a +hoarse cry. At this instant, the lieutenant-governor’s daughter, whom he +had supposed to be in a place of safety, ran into the room, and threw her +arms around him. She had returned by a private entrance. + +"Father, are you mad!" cried she. "Will the king’s name protect you now? +Come with me, or they will have your life." + +"True," muttered Hutchinson to himself; "what care these roarers for the +name of king? I must flee, or they will trample me down, on the door of my +own dwelling!" + +Hurrying away, he and his daughter made their escape by the private +passage, at the moment when the rioters broke into the house. The foremost +of them rushed up the stair-case, and entered the room which Hutchinson +had just quitted. There they beheld our good old chair, facing them with +quiet dignity, while the lion’s head seemed to move its jaws in the +unsteady light of their torches. Perhaps the stately aspect of our +venerable friend, which had stood firm through a century and a half of +trouble, arrested them for an instant. But they were thrust forward by +those behind, and the chair lay overthrown. + +Then began the work of destruction. The carved and polished mahogany +tables were shattered with heavy clubs, and hewn to splinters with axes. +The marble hearths and mantel pieces were broken. The volumes of +Hutchinson’s library, so precious to a studious man, were torn out of +their covers, and the leaves sent flying out of the windows. Manuscripts, +containing secrets of our country’s history, which are now lost forever, +were scattered to the winds. + +The old ancestral portraits, whose fixed countenances looked down on the +wild scene, were rent from the walls. The mob triumphed in their downfall +and destruction, as if these pictures of Hutchinson’s forefathers had +committed the same offences as their descendant. A tall looking-glass, +which had hitherto presented a reflection of the enraged and drunken +multitude, was now smashed into a thousand fragments. We gladly dismiss +the scene from the mirror of our fancy. + +Before morning dawned, the walls of the house were all that remained. The +interior was a dismal scene of ruin. A shower pattered in at the broken +windows, and when Hutchinson and his family returned, they stood shivering +in the same room, where the last evening had seen them so peaceful and +happy. + + + +"Grandfather," said Laurence indignantly, "if the people acted in this +manner, they were not worthy of even so much liberty as the king of +England was willing to allow them." + +"It was a most unjustifiable act, like many other popular movements at +that time," replied Grandfather. "But we must not decide against the +justice of the people’s cause, merely because an excited mob was guilty of +outrageous violence. Besides, all these things were done in the first fury +of resentment. Afterwards, the people grew more calm, and were more +influenced by the counsel of those wise and good men who conducted them +safely and gloriously through the Revolution." + +Little Alice, with tears in her blue eyes, said that she hoped the +neighbors had not let Lieutenant-Governor Hutchinson and his family be +homeless in the street, but had taken them into their houses, and been +kind to them. Cousin Clara, recollecting the perilous situation of our +beloved chair, inquired what had become of it. + +"Nothing was heard of our chair for sometime afterwards," answered +Grandfather. "One day in September, the same Andrew Oliver, of whom I +before told you, was summoned to appear at high noon, under Liberty Tree. +This was the strangest summons that had ever been heard of; for it was +issued in the name of the whole people, who thus took upon themselves the +authority of a sovereign power. Mr. Oliver dared not disobey. Accordingly, +at the appointed hour, he went, much against his will, to Liberty Tree." + +Here Charley interposed a remark that poor Mr. Oliver found but little +liberty under Liberty Tree. Grandfather assented. + +"It was a stormy day," continued he. "The equinoctial gale blew violently, +and scattered the yellow leaves of Liberty Tree all along the street. Mr. +Oliver’s wig was dripping with water-drops, and he probably looked +haggard, disconsolate, and humbled to the earth. Beneath the tree, in +Grandfather’s chair,—our own venerable chair,—sat Mr. Richard Dana, a +justice of the peace. He administered an oath to Mr. Oliver, that he would +never have any thing to do with distributing the stamps. A vast concourse +of people heard the oath, and shouted when it was taken." + +"There is something grand in this," said Laurence. "I like it, because the +people seem to have acted with thoughtfulness and dignity; and this proud +gentleman, one of his Majesty’s high officers, was made to feel that King +George could not protect him in doing wrong." + +"But it was a sad day for poor Mr. Oliver," observed Grandfather. "From +his youth upward, it had probably been the great principle of his life, to +be faithful and obedient to the king. And now, in his old age, it must +have puzzled and distracted him, to find the sovereign people setting up a +claim to his faith and obedience." + +Grandfather closed the evening’s conversation by saying that the +discontent of America was so great, that, in 1766, the British Parliament +was compelled to repeal the Stamp Act. The people made great rejoicings, +but took care to keep Liberty Tree well pruned, and free from caterpillars +and canker worms. They foresaw, that there might yet be occasion for them +to assemble under its far projecting shadow. + + + + +Chapter IV + + +The next evening, Clara, who remembered that our chair had been left +standing in the rain, under Liberty Tree, earnestly besought Grandfather +to tell when and where it had next found shelter. Perhaps she was afraid +that the venerable chair, by being exposed to the inclemency of a +September gale, might get the rheumatism in its aged joints. + +"The chair," said Grandfather, "after the ceremony of Mr. Oliver’s oath, +appears to have been quite forgotten by the multitude. Indeed, being much +bruised and rather rickety, owing to the violent treatment it had suffered +from the Hutchinson mob, most people would have thought that its days of +usefulness were over. Nevertheless, it was conveyed away, under cover of +the night, and committed to the care of a skilful joiner. He doctored our +old friend so successfully, that, in the course of a few days, it made its +appearance in the public room of the British Coffee House in King Street." + +"But why did not Mr. Hutchinson get possession of it again?" inquired +Charley. + +"I know not," answered Grandfather, "unless he considered it a dishonor +and disgrace to the chair to have stood under Liberty Tree. At all events, +he suffered it to remain at the British Coffee House, which was the +principal hotel in Boston. It could not possibly have found a situation, +where it would be more in the midst of business and bustle, or would +witness more important events, or be occupied by a greater variety of +persons." + +Grandfather went on to tell the proceedings of the despotic king and +ministry of England, after the repeal of the Stamp Act. They could not +bear to think, that their right to tax America should be disputed by the +people. In the year 1767, therefore, they caused Parliament to pass an act +for laying a duty on tea, and some other articles that were in general +use. Nobody could now buy a pound of tea, without paying a tax to King +George. This scheme was pretty craftily contrived; for the women of +America were very fond of tea, and did not like to give up the use of it. + +But the people were as much opposed to this new act of Parliament, as they +had been to the Stamp Act. England, however, was determined that they +should submit. In order to compel their obedience, two regiments, +consisting of more than seven hundred British soldiers, were sent to +Boston. They arrived in September, 1768, and were landed on Long Wharf. +Thence they marched to the Common, with loaded muskets, fixed bayonets, +and great pomp and parade. So now, at last, the free town of Boston was +guarded and over-awed by red-coats, as it had been in the days of old Sir +Edmund Andros. + +In the month of November, more regiments arrived. There were now four +thousand troops in Boston. The Common was whitened with their tents. Some +of the soldiers were lodged in Faneuil Hall, which the inhabitants looked +upon as a consecrated place, because it had been the scene of a great many +meetings in favor of liberty. One regiment was placed in the town house, +which we now call the Old State House. The lower floor of this edifice had +hitherto been used by the merchants as an exchange. In the upper stories +were the chambers of the judges, the representatives, and the governor’s +council. The venerable counsellors could not assemble to consult about the +welfare of the province, without being challenged by sentinels, and +passing among the bayonets of the British soldiers. + +Sentinels, likewise, were posted at the lodgings of the officers, in many +parts of the town. When the inhabitants approached, they were greeted by +the sharp question—"Who goes there?" while the rattle of the soldier’s +musket was heard, as he presented it against their breasts. There was no +quiet, even on the Sabbath day. The pious descendants of the Puritans were +shocked by the uproar of military music, the drum, fife, and bugle, +drowning the holy organ peal and the voices of the singers. It would +appear as if the British took every method to insult the feelings of the +people. + +"Grandfather," cried Charley, impatiently, "the people did not go to +fighting half soon enough! These British red-coats ought to have been +driven back to their vessels, the very moment they landed on Long Wharf." + +"Many a hot-headed young man said the same as you do, Charley," answered +Grandfather. "But the elder and wiser people saw that the time was not yet +come. Meanwhile, let us take another peep at our old chair." + +"Ah, it drooped its head, I know," said Charley, "when it saw how the +province was disgraced. Its old Puritan friends never would have borne +such doings." + +"The chair," proceeded Grandfather, "was now continually occupied by some +of the high tories, as the king’s friends were called, who frequented the +British Coffee House. Officers of the custom-house, too, which stood on +the opposite side of King Street, often sat in the chair, wagging their +tongues against John Hancock." + +"Why against him?" asked Charley. + +"Because he was a great merchant, and contended against paying duties to +the king," said Grandfather. + +"Well, frequently, no doubt, the officers of the British regiments, when +not on duty, used to fling themselves into the arms of our venerable +chair. Fancy one of them, a red nosed captain, in his scarlet uniform, +playing with the hilt of his sword, and making a circle of his brother +officers merry with ridiculous jokes at the expense of the poor Yankees. +And perhaps he would call for a bottle of wine, or a steaming bowl of +punch, and drink confusion to all rebels." + +"Our grave old chair must have been scandalized at such scenes," observed +Laurence. "The chair that had been the Lady Arbella’s, and which the holy +Apostle Eliot had consecrated." + +"It certainly was little less than sacrilege," replied Grandfather; "but +the time was coming, when even the churches, where hallowed pastors had +long preached the word of God, were to be torn down or desecrated by the +British troops. Some years passed, however, before such things were done." + +Grandfather now told his auditors, that, in 1769, Sir Francis Bernard went +to England, after having been governor of Massachusetts ten years. He was +a gentleman of many good qualities, an excellent scholar, and a friend to +learning. But he was naturally of an arbitrary disposition; and he had +been bred at the University of Oxford, where young men were taught that +the divine right of kings was the only thing to be regarded in matters of +government. Such ideas were ill adapted to please the people of +Massachusetts. They rejoiced to get rid of Sir Francis Bernard, but liked +his successor, Lieutenant-Governor Hutchinson, no better than himself. + +About this period, the people were much incensed at an act, committed by a +person who held an office in the custom-house. Some lads, or young men, +were snow-balling his windows. He fired a musket at them and killed a poor +German boy, only eleven years old. This event made a great noise in town +and country, and much increased the resentment that was already felt +against the servants of the crown. + +"Now, children," said Grandfather, "I wish to make you comprehend the +position of the British troops in King Street. This is the same which we +now call State Street. On the south side of the town-house, or Old State +House, was what military men call a court of guard, defended by two brass +cannons, which pointed directly at one of the doors of the above edifice. +A large party of soldiers were always stationed in the court of guard. The +custom-house stood at a little distance down King Street, nearly where the +Suffolk bank now stands; and a sentinel was continually pacing before its +front." + +"I shall remember this, to-morrow," said Charley; "and I will go to State +Street, so as to see exactly where the British troops were stationed." + +"And, before long," observed Grandfather, "I shall have to relate an +event, which made King Street sadly famous on both sides of the Atlantic. +The history of our chair will soon bring us to this melancholy business." + +Here Grandfather described the state of things, which arose from the +ill-will that existed between the inhabitants and the red-coats. The old +and sober part of the town’s-people were very angry at the government, for +sending soldiers to overawe them. But those gray-headed men were cautious, +and kept their thoughts and feelings in their own breasts, without putting +themselves in the way of the British bayonets. + +The younger people, however, could hardly be kept within such prudent +limits. They reddened with wrath at the very sight of a soldier, and would +have been willing to come to blows with them, at any moment. For it was +their opinion, that every tap of a British drum within the peninsula of +Boston, was an insult to the brave old town. + +"It was sometimes the case," continued Grandfather, "that affrays happened +between such wild young men as these, and small parties of the soldiers. +No weapons had hitherto been used, except fists or cudgels. But, when men +have loaded muskets in their hands, it is easy to foretell, that they will +soon be turned against the bosoms of those who provoke their anger." + +"Grandfather," said little Alice, looking fearfully into his face, "your +voice sounds as though you were going to tell us something awful!" + + + + +Chapter V + + +Little Alice, by her last remark, proved herself a good judge of what was +expressed by the tones of Grandfather’s voice. He had given the above +description of the enmity between the town’s-people and the soldiers, in +order to prepare the minds of his auditors for a very terrible event. It +was one that did more to heighten the quarrel between England and America, +than any thing that had yet occurred. + +Without further preface, Grandfather began the story of + + + +THE BOSTON MASSACRE + + +It was now the 3d of March, 1770. The sunset music of the British +regiments was heard, as usual, throughout the town. The shrill fife and +rattling drum awoke the echoes in King Street, while the last ray of +sunshine was lingering on the cupola of the town-house. And now, all the +sentinels were posted. One of them marched up and down before the +custom-house, treading a short path through the snow, and longing for the +time when he would be dismissed to the warm fire-side of the guard-room. +Meanwhile, Captain Preston was perhaps sitting in our great chair, before +the hearth of the British Coffee House. In the course of the evening, +there were two or three slight commotions, which seemed to indicate that +trouble was at hand. Small parties of young men stood at the corners of +the streets, or walked along the narrow pavements. Squads of soldiers, who +were dismissed from duty, passed by them, shoulder to shoulder, with the +regular step which they had learned at the drill. Whenever these +encounters took place, it appeared to be the object of the young men to +treat the soldiers with as much incivility as possible. + +"Turn out, you lobster-backs!" one would say. "Crowd them off the +side-walks!" another would cry. "A red-coat has no right in Boston +streets." + +"Oh, you rebel rascals!" perhaps the soldiers would reply, glaring +fiercely at the young men. "Some day or other, we’ll make our way through +Boston streets, at the point of the bayonet!" + +Once or twice, such disputes as these brought on a scuffle; which passed +off, however, without attracting much notice. About eight o’clock, for +some unknown cause, an alarm bell rang loudly and hurriedly. + +At the sound, many people ran out of their houses, supposing it to be an +alarm of fire. But there were no flames to be seen; nor was there any +smell of smoke in the clear, frosty air; so that most of the townsmen went +back to their own fire-sides, and sat talking with their wives and +children about the calamities of the times. Others, who were younger and +less prudent, remained in the streets; for there seems to have been a +presentiment that some strange event was on the eve of taking place. + +Later in the evening, not far from nine o’clock, several young men passed +by the town-house, and walked down King Street. The sentinel was still on +his post, in front of the custom-house, pacing to and fro, while, as he +turned, a gleam of light, from some neighboring window, glittered on the +barrel of his musket. At no great distance were the barracks and the +guard-house, where his comrades were probably telling stories of battle +and bloodshed. + +Down towards the custom-house, as I told you, came a party of wild young +men. When they drew near the sentinel, he halted on his post, and took his +musket from his shoulder, ready to present the bayonet at their breasts. + +"Who goes there?" he cried, in the gruff, peremptory tones of a soldier’s +challenge. + +The young men, being Boston boys, felt as if they had a right to walk +their own streets, without being accountable to a British red-coat, even +though he challenged them in King George’s name. They made some rude +answer to the sentinel. There was a dispute, or, perhaps a scuffle. Other +soldiers heard the noise, and ran hastily from the barracks, to assist +their comrade. At the same time, many of the town’s-people rushed into +King Street, by various avenues, and gathered in a crowd round about the +custom-house. It seemed wonderful how such a multitude had started up, all +of a sudden. + +The wrongs and insults, which the people had been suffering for many +months, now kindled them into a rage. They threw snow-balls and lumps of +ice at the soldiers. As the tumult grew louder, it reached the ears of +Captain Preston, the officer of the day. He immediately ordered eight +soldiers of the main guard to take their muskets and follow him. They +marched across the street, forcing their way roughly through the crowd, +and pricking the town’s-people with their bayonets. + +A gentleman, (it was Henry Knox, afterwards general of the American +artillery,) caught Captain Preston’s arm. + +"For Heaven’s sake, sir," exclaimed he, take heed what you do, or here +will be bloodshed." + +"Stand aside!" answered Captain Preston, haughtily. "Do not interfere, +sir. Leave me to manage the affair." + +Arriving at the sentinel’s post, Captain Preston drew up his men in a +semi-circle, with their faces to the crowd and their rear to the +custom-house. "When the people saw the officer, and beheld the threatening +attitude with which the soldiers fronted them, their rage became almost +uncontrollable. + +"Fire, you lobster-backs!" bellowed some. + +"You dare not fire, you cowardly red-coats," cried others. + +"Rush upon them!" shouted many voices. "Drive the rascals to their +barracks! Down with them! Down with them! Let them fire, if they dare!" + +Amid the uproar, the soldiers stood glaring at the people, with the +fierceness of men whose trade was to shed blood. + +Oh, what a crisis had now arrived! Up to this very moment, the angry +feelings between England and America might have been pacified. England had +but to stretch out the hand of reconciliation, and acknowledge that she +had hitherto mistaken her rights but would do so no more. Then, the +ancient bonds of brotherhood would again have been knit together, as +firmly as in old times. The habit of loyalty, which had grown as strong as +instinct, was not utterly overcome. The perils shared, the victories won, +in the Old French War, when the soldiers of the colonies fought side by +side with their comrades from beyond the sea, were unforgotten yet. +England was still that beloved country which the colonists called their +home. King George, though he had frowned upon America, was still +reverenced as a father. + +But, should the king’s soldiers shed one drop of American blood, then it +was a quarrel to the death. Never—never would America rest satisfied, +until she had torn down the royal authority, and trampled it in the dust. + +"Fire, if you dare, villains!" hoarsely shouted the people, while the +muzzles of the muskets were turned upon them; "you dare not fire!" + +They appeared ready to rush upon the levelled bayonets. Captain Preston +waved his sword, and uttered a command which could not be distinctly +heard, amid the uproar of shouts that issued from a hundred throats. But +his soldiers deemed that he had spoken the fatal mandate—"fire!" The flash +of their muskets lighted up the street, and the report rang loudly between +the edifices. It was said, too, that the figure of a man with a cloth +hanging down over his face, was seen to step into the balcony of the +custom-house, and discharge a musket at the crowd. + +A gush of smoke had overspread the scene. It rose heavily, as if it were +loath to reveal the dreadful spectacle beneath it. Eleven of the sons of +New England lay stretched upon the street. Some, sorely wounded, were +struggling to rise again. Others stirred not, nor groaned, for they were +past all pain. Blood was streaming upon the snow; and that purple stain, +in the midst of King Street, though it melted away in the next day’s sun, +was never forgotten nor forgiven by the people. + + + +Grandfather was interrupted by the violent sobs of little Alice. In his +earnestness, he had neglected to soften down the narrative, so that it +might not terrify the heart of this unworldly infant. Since Grandfather +began the history of our chair, little Alice had listened to many tales of +war. But, probably, the idea had never really impressed itself upon her +mind, that men have shed the blood of their fellow-creatures. And now that +this idea was forcibly presented to her, it affected the sweet child with +bewilderment and horror. + +"I ought to have remembered our dear little Alice," said Grandfather +reproachfully to himself. "Oh, what a pity! Her heavenly nature has now +received its first impression of earthly sin and violence. Well, Clara, +take her to bed, and comfort her. Heaven grant that she may dream away the +recollection of the Boston Massacre!" + +"Grandfather," said Charley, when Clara and little Alice had retired, "did +not the people rush upon the soldiers, and take revenge?" + +"The town drums beat to arms," replied Grandfather, "the alarm bells rang, +and an immense multitude rushed into King Street. Many of them had weapons +in their hands. The British prepared to defend themselves. A whole +regiment was drawn up in the street, expecting an attack; for the townsmen +appeared ready to throw themselves upon the bayonets." + +"And how did it end?" asked Charley. + +"Governor Hutchinson hurried to the spot," said Grandfather, "and besought +the people to have patience, promising that strict justice should be done. +A day or two afterward, the British troops were withdrawn from town, and +stationed at Castle William. Captain Preston and the eight soldiers were +tried for murder. But none of them were found guilty. The judges told the +jury that the insults and violence which had been offered to the soldiers, +justified them in firing at the mob." + +"The Revolution," observed Laurence, who had said but little during the +evening, "was not such a calm, majestic movement as I supposed. I do not +love to hear of mobs and broils in the street. These things were unworthy +of the people, when they had such a great object to accomplish." + +"Nevertheless, the world has seen no grander movement than that of our +Revolution, from first to last," said Grandfather. "The people, to a man, +were full of a great and noble sentiment. True, there may be much fault to +find with their mode of expressing this sentiment; but they knew no +better—the necessity was upon them to act out their feelings, in the best +manner they could. We must forgive what was wrong in their actions, and +look into their hearts and minds for the honorable motives that impelled +them." + +"And I suppose," said Laurence, "there were men who knew how to act +worthily of what they felt." + +"There were many such," replied Grandfather, "and we will speak of some of +them, hereafter." + +Grandfather here made a pause. That night, Charley had a dream about the +Boston Massacre, and thought that he himself was in the crowd, and struck +down Captain Preston with a great club. Laurence dreamed that he was +sitting in our great chair, at the window of the British Coffee House, and +beheld the whole scene which Grandfather had described. It seemed to him, +in his dream, that if the town’s-people and the soldiers would but have +heard him speak a single word, all the slaughter might have been averted. +But there was such an uproar that it drowned his voice. + +The next morning, the two boys went together to State Street, and stood on +the very spot where the first blood of the Revolution had been shed. The +Old State House was still there, presenting almost the same aspect that it +had worn on that memorable evening, one-and-seventy years ago. It is the +sole remaining witness of the Boston Massacre. + + + + +Chapter VI + + +The next evening the astral lamp was lighted earlier than usual, because +Laurence was very much engaged in looking over the collection of portraits +which had been his New Year’s gift from Grandfather. + +Among them he found the features of more than one famous personage who had +been connected with the adventures of our old chair. Grandfather bade him +draw the table nearer to the fire-side; and they looked over the portraits +together, while Clara and Charley likewise lent their attention. As for +little Alice, she sat in Grandfather’s lap, and seemed to see the very men +alive, whose faces were there represented. + +Turning over the volume, Laurence came to the portrait of a stern, +grim-looking man, in plain attire, of much more modern fashion than that +of the old Puritans. But the face might well have befitted one of those +iron-hearted men. Beneath the portrait was the name of Samuel Adams. + +"He was a man of great note in all the doings that brought about the +Revolution," said Grandfather. "His character was such, that it seemed as +if one of the ancient Puritans had been sent back to earth, to animate the +people’s hearts with the same abhorrence of tyranny, that had +distinguished the earliest settlers. He was as religious as they, as stern +and inflexible, and as deeply imbued with democratic principles. He, +better than any one else, may be taken as a representative of the people +of New England, and of the spirit with which they engaged in the +revolutionary struggle. He was a poor man, and earned his bread by an +humble occupation; but with his tongue and pen, he made the king of +England tremble on his throne. Remember him, my children, as one of the +strong men of our country." + +"Here is one whose looks show a very different character," observed +Laurence, turning to the portrait of John Hancock. "I should think, by his +splendid dress and courtly aspect, that he was one of the king’s friends." + +"There never was a greater contrast than between Samuel Adams and John +Hancock," said Grandfather. "Yet they were of the same side in politics, +and had an equal agency in the Revolution. Hancock was born to the +inheritance of the largest fortune in New England. His tastes and habits +were aristocratic. He loved gorgeous attire, a splendid mansion, +magnificent furniture, stately festivals, and all that was glittering and +pompous in external things. His manners were so polished, that there stood +not a nobleman at the footstool of King George’s throne, who was a more +skilful courtier than John Hancock might have been. Nevertheless, he, in +his embroidered clothes, and Samuel Adams in his threadbare coat, wrought +together in the cause of liberty. Adams acted from pure and rigid +principle. Hancock, though he loved his country, yet thought quite as much +of his own popularity as he did of the people’s rights. It is remarkable, +that these two men, so very different as I describe them, were the only +two exempted from pardon by the king’s proclamation." + +On the next leaf of the book, was the portrait of General Joseph Warren. +Charley recognized the name, and said that here was a greater man than +either Hancock or Adams. + +"Warren was an eloquent and able patriot," replied Grandfather. "He +deserves a lasting memory for his zealous efforts in behalf of liberty. No +man’s voice was more powerful in Faneuil Hall than Joseph Warren’s. If his +death had not happened so early in the contest, he would probably have +gained a high name as a soldier." + +The next portrait was a venerable man, who held his thumb under his chin, +and, through his spectacles, appeared to be attentively reading a +manuscript. + +"Here we see the most illustrious Boston boy that ever lived," said +Grandfather. "This is Benjamin Franklin! But I will not try to compress, +into a few sentences, the character of the sage, who, as a Frenchman +expressed it, snatched the lightning from the sky, and the sceptre from a +tyrant. Mr. Sparks must help you to the knowledge of Franklin." + +The book likewise contained portraits of James Otis and Josiah Quincy. +Both of them, Grandfather observed, were men of wonderful talents and true +patriotism. Their voices were like the stirring tones of a trumpet, +arousing the country to defend its freedom. Heaven seemed to have provided +a greater number of eloquent men than had appeared at any other period, in +order that the people might be fully instructed as to their wrongs, and +the method of resistance. + +"It is marvellous," said Grandfather, "to see how many powerful writers, +orators, and soldiers started up, just at the time when they were wanted. +There was a man for every kind of work. It is equally wonderful, that men +of such different characters were all made to unite in the one object of +establishing the freedom and independence of America. There was an +overruling Providence above them." + +"Here was another great man," remarked Laurence, pointing to the portrait +of John Adams. + +"Yes; an earnest, warm-tempered, honest, and most able man," said +Grandfather. "At the period of which we are now speaking, he was a lawyer +in Boston. He was destined, in after years, to be ruler over the whole +American people, whom he contributed so much to form into a nation." + +Grandfather here remarked, that many a New Englander, who had passed his +boyhood and youth in obscurity, afterward attained to a fortune, which he +never could have foreseen, even in his most ambitious dreams. John Adams, +the second president of the United States, and the equal of crowned kings, +was once a schoolmaster and country lawyer. Hancock, the first signer of +the Declaration of Independence, served his apprenticeship with a +merchant. Samuel Adams, afterward governor of Massachusetts, was a small +tradesman and a tax-gatherer. General Warren was a physician, General +Lincoln a farmer, and General Knox a bookbinder. General Nathaniel Greene, +the best soldier, except Washington, in the revolutionary army, was a +Quaker and a blacksmith. All these became illustrious men, and can never +be forgotten in American history. + +"And any boy, who is born in America, may look forward to the same +things," said our ambitious friend Charley. + +After these observations, Grandfather drew the book of portraits towards +him, and showed the children several British peers and members of +Parliament, who had exerted themselves either for or against the rights of +America. There were the Earl of Bute, Mr. Grenville, and Lord North. These +were looked upon as deadly enemies to our country. + +Among the friends of America was Mr. Pitt, afterward Earl of Chatham, who +spent so much of his wondrous eloquence in endeavoring to warn England of +the consequences of her injustice. He fell down on the floor of the House +of Lords, after uttering almost his dying words in defence of our +privileges as freemen. There was Edmund Burke, one of the wisest men and +greatest orators that ever the world produced. There was Colonel Barré, +who had been among our fathers, and knew that they had courage enough to +die for their rights. There was Charles James Fox, who never rested until +he had silenced our enemies in the House of Commons. + +"It is very remarkable to observe how many of the ablest orators in the +British Parliament were favorable to America," said Grandfather. "We ought +to remember these great Englishmen with gratitude; for their speeches +encouraged our fathers, almost as much as those of our own orators, in +Faneuil Hall, and under Liberty Tree. Opinions, which might have been +received with doubt, if expressed only by a native American, were set down +as true, beyond dispute, when they came from the lips of Chatham, Burke, +Barré, or Fox." + +"But, Grandfather," asked Laurence, "were there no able and eloquent men +in this country who took the part of King George?" + +"There were many men of talent, who said what they could in defence of the +king’s tyrannical proceedings," replied Grandfather. "But they had the +worst side of the argument, and therefore seldom said any thing worth +remembering. Moreover their hearts were faint and feeble; for they felt +that the people scorned and detested them. They had no friends, no +defence, except in the bayonets of the British troops. A blight fell upon +all their faculties, because they were contending against the rights of +their own native land." + +"What were the names of some of them?" inquired Charley. + +"Governor Hutchinson, Chief Justice Oliver, Judge Auchmuty, the Reverend +Mather Byles, and several other clergymen, were among the most noted +loyalists," answered Grandfather. + +"I wish the people had tarred and feathered every man of them!" cried +Charley. + +"That wish is very wrong, Charley," said Grandfather. "You must not think +that there was no integrity and honor, except among those who stood up for +the freedom of America. For aught I know, there was quite as much of these +qualities on one side as on the other. Do you see nothing admirable in a +faithful adherence to an unpopular cause? Can you not respect that +principle of loyalty, which made the royalists give up country, friends, +fortune, every thing, rather than be false to their king? It was a +mistaken principle; but many of them cherished it honorably, and were +martyrs to it." + +"Oh, I was wrong!" said Charley, ingenuously. "And I would risk my life, +rather than one of those good old royalists should be tarred and +feathered." + +"The time is now come, when we may judge fairly of them," continued +Grandfather. "Be the good and true men among them honored; for they were +as much our countrymen as the patriots were. And, thank Heaven! our +country need not be ashamed of her sons—of most of them, at least—whatever +side they took in the revolutionary contest." + +Among the portraits was one of King George the Third. Little Alice clapped +her hands, and seemed pleased with the bluff good nature of his +physiognomy. But Laurence thought it strange, that a man with such a face, +indicating hardly a common share of intellect, should have had influence +enough on human affairs, to convulse the world with war. Grandfather +observed, that this poor king had always appeared to him one of the most +unfortunate persons that ever lived. He was so honest and conscientious, +that, if he had been only a private man, his life would probably have been +blameless and happy. But his was that worst of fortunes, to be placed in a +station far beyond his abilities. + +"And so," said Grandfather, "his life, while he retained what intellect +Heaven had gifted him with, was one long mortification. At last, he grew +crazed with care and trouble. For nearly twenty years, the monarch of +England was confined as a madman. In his old age, too, God took away his +eyesight; so that his royal palace was nothing to him but a dark, lonesome +prison-house." + + + + +Chapter VII + + +"Our old chair," resumed Grandfather, "did not now stand in the midst of a +gay circle of British officers. The troops, as I told you, had been +removed to Castle William, immediately after the Boston Massacre. Still, +however, there were many tories, custom-house officers, and Englishmen, +who used to assemble in the British Coffee House, and talk over the +affairs of the period. Matters grew worse and worse; and in 1773, the +people did a deed, which incensed the king and ministry more than any of +their former doings." + +Grandfather here described the affair, which is known by the name of the +Boston Tea Party. The Americans, for some time past, had left off +importing tea, on account of the oppressive tax. The East India Company, +in London, had a large stock of tea on hand, which they had expected to +sell to the Americans, but could find no market for it. But, after a +while, the government persuaded this company of merchants to send the tea +to America. + +"How odd it is," observed Clara, "that the liberties of America should +have had any thing to do with a cup of tea!" + +Grandfather smiled, and proceeded with his narrative. When the people of +Boston heard that several cargoes of tea were coming across the Atlantic, +they held a great many meetings at Faneuil Hall, in the Old South church, +and under Liberty Tree. In the midst of their debates, three ships arrived +in the harbor with the tea on board. The people spent more than a +fortnight in consulting what should be done. At last, on the 16th of +December, 1773, they demanded of Governor Hutchinson, that he should +immediately send the ships back to England. + +The governor replied that the ships must not leave the harbor, until the +custom-house duties upon the tea should be paid. Now, the payment of these +duties was the very thing, against which the people had set their faces; +because it was a tax, unjustly imposed upon America by the English +government. Therefore, in the dusk of the evening, as soon as Governor +Hutchinson’s reply was received, an immense crowd hastened to Griffin’s +Wharf, where the tea-ships lay. The place is now called Liverpool Wharf. + +"When the crowd reached the wharf," said Grandfather, "they saw that a set +of wild-looking figures were already on board of the ships. You would have +imagined that the Indian warriors, of old times, had come back again; for +they wore the Indian dress, and had their faces covered with red and black +paint, like the Indians, when they go to war. These grim figures hoisted +the tea chests on the decks of the vessels, broke them open, and threw all +the contents into the harbor." + +"Grandfather," said little Alice, "I suppose Indians don’t love tea; else +they would never waste it so." + +"They were not real Indians, my child," answered Grandfather. "They were +white men, in disguise; because a heavy punishment would have been +inflicted on them, if the king’s officers had found who they were. But it +was never known. From that day to this, though the matter has been talked +of by all the world, nobody can tell the names of those Indian figures. +Some people say that there were very famous men among them, who afterwards +became governors and generals. Whether this be true, I cannot tell." + +When tidings of this bold deed were carried to England, King George was +greatly enraged. Parliament immediately passed an act, by which all +vessels were forbidden to take in or discharge their cargoes at the port +of Boston. In this way, they expected to ruin all the merchants, and +starve the poor people, by depriving them of employment. At the same time, +another act was passed, taking away many rights and privileges which had +been granted in the charter of Massachusetts. + +Governor Hutchinson, soon afterward, was summoned to England, in order +that he might give his advice about the management of American affairs. +General Gage, an officer of the Old French War, and since +commander-in-chief of the British forces in America, was appointed +governor in his stead. One of his first acts, was to make Salem, instead +of Boston, the metropolis of Massachusetts, by summoning the General Court +to meet there. + +According to Grandfather’s description, this was the most gloomy time that +Massachusetts had ever seen. The people groaned under as heavy a tyranny +as in the days of Sir Edmund Andros. Boston looked as if it were afflicted +with some dreadful pestilence,—so sad were the inhabitants, and so +desolate the streets. There was no cheerful hum of business. The merchants +shut up their warehouses, and the laboring men stood idle about the +wharves. But all America felt interested in the good town of Boston; and +contributions were raised, in many places, for the relief of the poor +inhabitants. + +"Our dear old chair!" exclaimed Clara. "How dismal it must have been now!" + +"Oh," replied Grandfather, "a gay throng of officers had now come back to +the British Coffee House; so that the old chair had no lack of mirthful +company. Soon after General Gage became governor, a great many troops had +arrived, and were encamped upon the Common. Boston was now a garrisoned +and fortified town; for the general had built a battery across the neck, +on the road to Roxbury, and placed guards for its defence. Every thing +looked as if a civil war were close at hand." + +"Did the people make ready to fight?" asked Charley. + +"A continental Congress assembled at Philadelphia," said Grandfather, "and +proposed such measures as they thought most conducive to the public good. +A provincial Congress was likewise chosen in Massachusetts. They exhorted +the people to arm and discipline themselves. A great number of minute men +were enrolled. The Americans called them minute men, because they engaged +to be ready to fight at a minute’s warning. The English officers laughed, +and said that the name was a very proper one, because the minute men would +run away the the minute they saw the enemy. Whether they would fight or +run, was soon to be proved." + +Grandfather told the children, that the first open resistance offered to +the British troops, in the province of Massachusetts was at Salem. Colonel +Timothy Pickering, with thirty or forty militia men, prevented the English +colonel, Leslie, with four times as many regular soldiers, from taking +possession of some military stores. No blood was shed on this occasion; +but, soon afterward, it began to flow. + +General Gage sent eight hundred soldiers to Concord, about eighteen miles +from Boston, to destroy some ammunition and provisions which the colonists +had collected there. They set out on their march in the evening of the +18th of April, 1775. The next morning, the General sent Lord Percy, with +nine hundred men, to strengthen the troops which had gone before. All that +day, the inhabitants of Boston heard various rumors. Some said, that the +British were making great slaughter among our countrymen. Others affirmed +that every man had turned out with his musket, and that not a single +soldier would ever get back to Boston. + +"It was after sunset," continued Grandfather, "when the troops, who had +marched forth so proudly, were seen entering Charlestown. They were +covered with dust, and so hot and weary that their tongues hung out of +their mouths. Many of them were faint with wounds. They had not all +returned. Nearly three hundred were strewn, dead or dying, along the road +from Concord. The yeomanry had risen upon the invaders, and driven them +back." + +"Was this the battle of Lexington?" asked Charley. + +"Yes," replied Grandfather; "it was so called, because the British, +without provocation, had fired upon a party of minute men, near Lexington +meeting-house, and killed eight of them. That fatal volley, which was +fired by order of Major Pitcairn, began the war of the Revolution." + +About this time, if Grandfather had been correctly informed, our chair +disappeared from the British Coffee House. The manner of its departure +cannot be satisfactorily ascertained. Perhaps the keeper of the Coffee +House turned it out of doors, on account of its old-fashioned aspect. +Perhaps he sold it as a curiosity. Perhaps it was taken, without leave, by +some person who regarded it as public property, because it had once +figured under Liberty Tree. Or, perhaps, the old chair, being of a +peaceable disposition, had made use of its four oaken legs, and run away +from the seat of war. + +"It would have made a terrible clattering over the pavement," said +Charley, laughing. + +"Meanwhile," continued Grandfather, "during the mysterious non-appearance +of our chair, an army of twenty thousand men had started up, and come to +the siege of Boston. General Gage and his troops were cooped up within the +narrow precincts of the peninsula. On the 17th of June, 1775, the famous +battle of Bunker Hill was fought. Here General Warren fell. The British +got the victory, indeed, but with the loss of more than a thousand +officers and men." + +"O, Grandfather," cried Charley, "you must tell us about that famous +battle." + +"No, Charley," said Grandfather, "I am not like other historians. Battles +shall not hold a prominent place in the history of our quiet and +comfortable old chair. But, to-morrow evening, Laurence, Clara, and +yourself, and dear little Alice too, shall visit the Diorama of Bunker +Hill. There you shall see the whole business, the burning of Charlestown +and all, with your own eyes, and hear the cannon and musketry with your +own ears." + + + + +Chapter VIII + + +The next evening but one, when the children had given Grandfather a full +account of the Diorama of Bunker Hill, they entreated him not to keep them +any longer in suspense about the fate of his chair. The reader will +recollect, that at the last accounts, it had trotted away upon its poor +old legs, nobody knew whither. But, before gratifying their curiosity, +Grandfather found it necessary to say something about public events. + +The continental Congress, which was assembled at Philadelphia, was +composed of delegates from all the colonies. They had now appointed George +Washington, of Virginia, to be commander-in-chief of all the American +armies. He was, at that time, a member of Congress, but immediately left +Philadelphia, and began his journey to Massachusetts. On the 3d of July, +1775, he arrived at Cambridge, and took command of the troops which were +besieging General Gage. + +"O, Grandfather," exclaimed Laurence, "it makes my heart throb to think +what is coming now. We are to see General Washington himself." + +The children crowded around Grandfather, and looked earnestly into his +face. Even little Alice opened her sweet blue eyes, with her lips apart, +and almost held her breath to listen; so instinctive is the reverence of +childhood for the father of his country. Grandfather paused a moment; for +he felt as if it might be irreverent to introduce the hallowed shade of +Washington into a history, where an ancient elbow chair occupied the most +prominent place. However, he determined to proceed with his narrative, and +speak of the hero when it was needful, but with an unambitious simplicity. + +So Grandfather told his auditors, that, on General Washington’s arrival at +Cambridge, his first care was, to reconnoitre the British troops with his +spy-glass, and to examine the condition of his own army. He found that the +American troops amounted to about fourteen thousand men. They were +extended all round the peninsula of Boston, a space of twelve miles, from +the high grounds of Roxbury on the right, to Mystic river on the left. +Some were living in tents of sail-cloth, some in shanties, rudely +constructed of boards, some in huts of stone or turf, with curious windows +and doors of basket-work. + +In order to be near the centre, and oversee the whole of this +wide-stretched army, the commander-in-chief made his head-quarters at +Cambridge, about half a mile from the colleges. A mansion-house, which +perhaps had been the country-seat of some tory gentleman, was provided for +his residence. + +"When General Washington first entered this mansion," said Grandfather, +"he was ushered up the stair-case, and shown into a handsome apartment. He +sat down in a large chair, which was the most conspicuous object in the +room. The noble figure of Washington would have done honor to a throne. As +he sat there, with his hand resting on the hilt of his sheathed sword, +which was placed between his knees, his whole aspect well befitted the +chosen man on whom his country leaned for the defence of her dearest +rights. America seemed safe, under his protection. His face was grander +than any sculptor had ever wrought in marble; none could behold him +without awe and reverence. Never before had the lion’s head, at the summit +of the chair, looked down upon such a face and form as Washington’s!" + +"Why! Grandfather," cried Clara, clasping her hands in amazement, "was it +really so? Did General Washington sit in our great chair?" + +"I knew how it would be," said Laurence; "I foresaw it, the moment +Grandfather began to speak." + +Grandfather smiled. But, turning from the personal and domestic life of +the illustrious leader, he spoke of the methods which Washington adopted +to win back the metropolis of New England from the British. + +The army, when he took command of it, was without any discipline or order. +The privates considered themselves as good as their officers, and seldom +thought it necessary to obey their commands, unless they understood the +why and wherefore. Moreover, they were enlisted for so short a period, +that, as soon as they began to be respectable soldiers, it was time to +discharge them. Then came new recruits, who had to be taught their duty, +before they could be of any service. Such was the army, with which +Washington had to contend against more than twenty veteran British +regiments. + +Some of the men had no muskets, and almost all were without bayonets. +Heavy cannon, for battering the British fortifications, were much wanted. +There was but a small quantity of powder and ball, few tools to build +entrenchments with, and a great deficiency of provisions and clothes for +the soldiers. Yet, in spite of these perplexing difficulties, the eyes of +the whole people were fixed on General Washington, expecting him to +undertake some great enterprise against the hostile army. + +The first thing that he found necessary, was to bring his own men into +better order and discipline. It is wonderful how soon he transformed this +rough mob of country people into the semblance of a regular army. One of +Washington’s most invaluable characteristics, was the faculty of bringing +order out of confusion. All business, with which he had any concern, +seemed to regulate itself, as if by magic. The influence of his mind was +like light, gleaming through an unshaped world. It was this faculty, more +than any other, that made him so fit to ride upon the storm of the +Revolution, when every thing was unfixed, and drifting about in a troubled +sea. + +"Washington had not been long at the head of the army," proceeded +Grandfather, "before his soldiers thought as highly of him, as if he had +led them to a hundred victories. They knew that he was the very man whom +the country needed, and the only one who could bring them safely through +the great contest against the might of England. They put entire confidence +in his courage, wisdom, and integrity." + +"And were not they eager to follow him against the British?" asked +Charley. + +"Doubtless they would have gone whithersoever his sword pointed the way," +answered Grandfather; "and Washington was anxious to make a decisive +assault upon the enemy. But as the enterprise was very hazardous, he +called a council of all the generals in the army. Accordingly, they came +from their different posts, and were ushered into the reception room. The +commander-in-chief arose from our great chair to greet them." + +"What were their names?" asked Charley. + +"There was General Artemas Ward," replied Grandfather, a "lawyer by +profession. He had commanded the troops before Washington’s arrival. +Another was General Charles Lee, who had been a colonel in the English +army, and was thought to possess vast military science. He came to the +council, followed by two or three dogs, who were always at his heels. +There was General Putnam, too, who was known all over New England by the +name of Old Put." + +"Was it he who killed the wolf?" inquired Charley. + +"The same," said Grandfather; "and he had done good service in the Old +French War. His occupation was that of a farmer; but he left his plough in +the furrow, at the news of Lexington battle. Then there was General Gates, +who afterward gained great renown at Saratoga, and lost it again at +Camden. General Greene, of Rhode Island, was likewise at the council. +Washington soon discovered him to be one of the best officers in the +army." + +When the Generals were all assembled, Washington consulted them about a +plan for storming the English batteries. But it was their unanimous +opinion that so perilous an enterprise ought not to be attempted. The +army, therefore, continued to besiege Boston, preventing the enemy from +obtaining supplies of provisions, but without taking any immediate +measures to get possession of the town. In this manner, the summer, +autumn, and winter passed away. + +"Many a night, doubtless," said Grandfather, "after Washington had been +all day on horseback, galloping from one post of the army to another, he +used to sit in our great chair, wrapt in earnest thought. Had you seen +him, you might have supposed that his whole mind was fixed on the blue +china tiles, which adorned the old fashioned fire-place. But, in reality, +he was meditating how to capture the British army, or drive it out of +Boston. Once, when there was a hard frost, he formed a scheme to cross the +Charles River on the ice. But the other Generals could not be persuaded +that there was any prospect of success." + +"What were the British doing, all this time?" inquired Charley. + +"They lay idle in the town," replied Grandfather. "General Gage had been +recalled to England, and was succeeded by Sir William Howe. The British +army, and the inhabitants of Boston, were now in great distress. Being +shut up in the town so long, they had consumed almost all their +provisions, and burnt up all their fuel. The soldiers tore down the Old +North church, and used its rotten boards and timbers for fire-wood. To +heighten their distress, the small pox broke out. They probably lost far +more men by cold, hunger, and sickness, than had been slain at Lexington +and Bunker Hill." + +"What a dismal time for the poor women and children!" exclaimed Clara. + +"At length," continued Grandfather, "in March, 1776, General Washington, +who had now a good supply of powder, began a terrible cannonade and +bombardment from Dorchester heights. One of the cannon balls which he +fired into the town, struck the tower of the Brattle Street church, where +it may still be seen. Sir William Howe made preparations to cross over in +boats, and drive the Americans from their batteries, but was prevented by +a violent gale and storm. General Washington next erected a battery on +Nook’s hill, so near the enemy, that it was impossible for them to remain +in Boston any longer." + +"Hurra! Hurra!" cried Charley, clapping his hands triumphantly. "I wish I +had been there, to see how sheepish the Englishmen looked." + +And, as Grandfather thought that Boston had never witnessed a more +interesting period than this, when the royal power was in its death agony, +he determined to take a peep into the town, and imagine the feelings of +those who were quitting it forever. + + + + +Chapter IX + + +"Alas! for the poor tories!" said Grandfather. "Until the very last +morning after Washington’s troops had shown themselves on Nook’s hill, +these unfortunate persons could not believe that the audacious rebels, as +they called the Americans, would ever prevail against King George’s army. +But, when they saw the British soldiers preparing to embark on board of +the ships of war, then they knew that they had lost their country. Could +the patriots have known how bitter were their regrets, they would have +forgiven them all their evil deeds, and sent a blessing after them as they +sailed away from their native shore." + +In order to make the children sensible of the pitiable condition of these +men, Grandfather singled out Peter Oliver, chief justice of Massachusetts +under the crown, and imagined him walking through the streets of Boston, +on the morning before he left it forever. + +This effort of Grandfather’s fancy may be called— + + + +THE TORY’S FAREWELL + + +Old Chief Justice Oliver threw on his red cloak, and placed his +three-cornered hat on the top of his white wig. In this garb he intended +to go forth and take a parting look at objects that had been familiar to +him from his youth. Accordingly, he began his walk in the north part of +the town, and soon came to Faneuil Hall. This edifice, the cradle of +liberty, had been used by the British officers as a play-house. + +"Would that I could see its walls crumble to dust!" thought the chief +justice; and, in the bitterness of his heart, he shook his fist at the +famous hall. "There began the mischief which now threatens to rend asunder +the British empire. The seditious harangues of demagogues in Faneuil Hall, +have made rebels of a loyal people, and deprived me of my country." + +He then passed through a narrow avenue, and found himself in King Street, +almost in the very spot which, six years before, had been reddened by the +blood of the Boston Massacre. The chief justice stept cautiously, and +shuddered, as if he were afraid, that, even now, the gore of his +slaughtered countrymen might stain his feet. + +Before him rose the town house, on the front of which were still displayed +the royal arms. Within that edifice he had dispensed justice to the +people, in the days when his name was never mentioned without honor. +There, too, was the balcony whence the trumpet had been sounded, and the +proclamation read to an assembled multitude, whenever a new king of +England ascended the throne. + +"I remember—I remember," said Chief Justice Oliver to himself, "when his +present most sacred majesty was proclaimed. Then how the people shouted. +Each man would have poured out his life-blood to keep a hair of King +George’s head from harm. But now, there is scarcely a tongue in all New +England that does not imprecate curses on his name. It is ruin and +disgrace to love him. Can it be possible that a few fleeting years have +wrought such a change!" + +It did not occur to the chief justice, that nothing but the most grievous +tyranny could so soon have changed the people’s hearts. Hurrying from the +spot, he entered Cornhill, as the lower part of Washington Street was then +called. Opposite to the town house was the waste foundation of the Old +North church. The sacrilegious hands of the British soldiers had torn it +down, and kindled their barrack fires with the fragments. + +Further on, he passed beneath the tower of the Old South. The threshold of +this sacred edifice was worn by the iron tramp of horse’s feet: for the +interior had been used as a riding-school and rendezvous, for a regiment +of dragoons. As the chief justice lingered an instant at the door, a +trumpet sounded within, and the regiment came clattering forth, and +galloped down the street. They were proceeding to the place of +embarkation. + +"Let them go!" thought the chief justice, with somewhat of an old puritan +feeling in his breast. "No good can come of men who desecrate the house of +God." + +He went on a few steps further, and paused before the Province House. No +range of brick stores had then sprung up to hide the mansion of the royal +governors from public view. It had a spacious court-yard, bordered with +trees, and enclosed with a wrought-iron fence. On the cupola, that +surmounted the edifice, was the gilded figure of an Indian chief, ready to +let fly an arrow from his bow. Over the wide front door was a balcony, in +which the chief justice had often stood, when the governor and high +officers of the province showed themselves to the people. + +While Chief Justice Oliver gazed sadly at the Province House, before which +a sentinel was pacing, the double leaves of the door were thrown open, and +Sir William Howe made his appearance. Behind him came a throng of +officers, whose steel scabbards clattered against the stones, as they +hastened down the court-yard. Sir William Howe was a dark-complexioned +man, stern and haughty in his deportment. He stepped as proudly, in that +hour of defeat, as if he were going to receive the submission of the rebel +general. + +The chief justice bowed and accosted him. + +"This is a grievous hour for both of us, Sir William," said he. + +"Forward! gentlemen," said Sir William Howe to the officers who attended +him: "we have no time to hear lamentations now!" + +And, coldly bowing, he departed. Thus, the chief justice had a foretaste +of the mortifications which the exiled New Englanders afterwards suffered +from the haughty Britons. They were despised even by that country which +they had served more faithfully than their own. + +A still heavier trial awaited Chief Justice Oliver, as he passed onward +from the Province House. He was recognized by the people in the street. +They had long known him as the descendant of an ancient and honorable +family. They had seen him sitting, in his scarlet robes, upon the judgment +seat. All his life long, either for the sake of his ancestors, or on +account of his own dignified station and unspotted character, he had been +held in high respect. The old gentry of the province were looked upon +almost as noblemen, while Massachusetts was under royal government. + +But now, all hereditary reverence for birth and rank was gone. The +inhabitants shouted in derision, when they saw the venerable form of the +old chief justice. They laid the wrongs of the country, and their own +sufferings during the siege—their hunger, cold, and sickness—partly to his +charge, and to that of his brother Andrew, and his kinsman Hutchinson. It +was by their advice that the king had acted, in all the colonial troubles. +But the day of recompense was come. + +"See the old tory!" cried the people, with bitter laughter. "He is taking +his last look at us. Let him show his white wig among us an hour hence, +and we’ll give him a coat of tar and feathers!" + +The chief justice, however, knew that he need fear no violence, so long as +the British troops were in possession of the town. But alas! it was a +bitter thought, that he should leave no loving memory behind him. His +forefathers, long after their spirits left the earth, had been honored in +the affectionate remembrance of the people. But he, who would henceforth +be dead to his native land, would have no epitaph save scornful and +vindictive words. The old man wept. + +"They curse me—they invoke all kinds of evil on my head!" thought he, in +the midst of his tears. "But, if they could read my heart, they would know +that I love New England well. Heaven bless her, and bring her again under +the rule of our gracious king! A blessing, too, on these poor, misguided +people!" + +The chief justice flung out his hands with a gesture, as if he were +bestowing a parting benediction on his countrymen. He had now reached the +southern portion of the town, and was far within the range of cannon shot +from the American batteries. Close beside him was the broad stump of a +tree, which appeared to have been recently cut down. Being weary and heavy +at heart, he was about to sit down upon the stump. + +Suddenly, it flashed upon his recollection, that this was the stump of +Liberty Tree! The British soldiers had cut it down, vainly boasting that +they could as easily overthrow the liberties of America. Under its shadowy +branches, ten years before, the brother of Chief Justice Oliver had been +compelled to acknowledge the supremacy of the people, by taking the oath +which they prescribed. This tree was connected with all the events that +had severed America from England. + +"Accursed tree!" cried the chief justice, gnashing his teeth: for anger +overcame his sorrow. "Would that thou hadst been left standing, till +Hancock, Adams, and every other traitor, were hanged upon thy branches! +Then fitly mightest thou have been hewn down, and cast into the flames." + +He turned back, hurried to Long Wharf without looking behind him, embarked +with the British troops for Halifax, and never saw his country more. +Throughout the remainder of his days, Chief Justice Oliver was agitated +with those same conflicting emotions, that had tortured him, while taking +his farewell walk through the streets of Boston. Deep love and fierce +resentment burned in one flame within his breast. Anathemas struggled with +benedictions. He felt as if one breath of his native air would renew his +life, yet would have died, rather than breathe the same air with rebels. + +And such, likewise, were the feelings of the other exiles, a thousand in +number, who departed with the British army. Were they not the most +unfortunate of men? + + + +"The misfortunes of these exiled tories," observed Laurence, "must have +made them think of the poor exiles of Acadia." + +"They had a sad time of it, I suppose," said Charley. "But I choose to +rejoice with the patriots, rather than be sorrowful with the tories. +Grandfather, what did General Washington do now?" + +"As the rear of the British army embarked from the wharf," replied +Grandfather, "General Washington’s troops marched over the neck, through +the fortification gates, and entered Boston in triumph. And now, for the +first time since the pilgrims landed, Massachusetts was free from the +dominion of England. May she never again be subjected to foreign +rule—never again feel the rod of oppression!" + +"Dear Grandfather," asked little Alice, "did General Washington bring our +chair back to Boston?" + +"I know not how long the chair remained at Cambridge," said Grandfather. +"Had it staid there till this time, it could not have found a better or +more appropriate shelter. The mansion which General Washington occupied is +still standing; and his apartments have since been tenanted by several +eminent men. Governor Everett, while a professor in the university, +resided there. So at an after period, did Mr. Sparks, whose invaluable +labors have connected his name with the immortality of Washington. And, at +this very time, a venerable friend and contemporary of your Grandfather, +after long pilgrimages beyond the sea, has set up his staff of rest at +Washington’s head-quarters." + +"You mean Professor Longfellow, Grandfather," said Laurence. "Oh, how I +should love to see the author of those beautiful VOICES OF THE NIGHT!" + +"We will visit him next summer," answered Grandfather, "and take Clara and +little Alice with us—and Charley, too, if he will be quiet." + + + + +Chapter X + + +When Grandfather resumed his narrative, the next evening, he told the +children that he had some difficulty in tracing the movements of the +chair, during a short period after General Washington’s departure from +Cambridge. + +Within a few months, however, it made its appearance at a shop in Boston, +before the door of which was seen a striped pole. In the interior was +displayed a stuffed alligator, a rattlesnake’s skin, a bundle of Indian +arrows, an old-fashioned matchlock gun, a walking-stick of Governor +Winthrop’s, a wig of old Cotton Mather’s, and a colored print of the +Boston Massacre. In short, it was a barber’s shop, kept by a Mr. Pierce, +who prided himself on having shaved General Washington, Old Put, and many +other famous persons. + +"This was not a very dignified situation for our venerable chair," +continued Grandfather; "but, you know, there is no better place for news, +than a barber’s shop. All the events of the revolutionary war were heard +of there, sooner than anywhere else. People used to sit in the chair, +reading the newspaper or talking, and waiting to be shaved, while Mr. +Pierce with his scissors and razor, was at work upon the heads or chins of +his other customers." + +"I am sorry the chair could not betake itself to some more suitable place +of refuge," said Laurence. "It was old now, and must have longed for +quiet. Besides, after it had held Washington in its arms, it ought not to +have been compelled to receive all the world. It should have been put into +the pulpit of the Old South Church, or some other consecrated place." + +"Perhaps so," answered Grandfather. "But the chair, in the course of its +varied existence, had grown so accustomed to general intercourse with +society, that I doubt whether it would have contented itself in the pulpit +of the Old South. There it would have stood solitary, or with no livelier +companion than the silent organ, in the opposite gallery, six days out of +seven. I incline to think, that it had seldom been situated more to its +mind, than on the sanded floor of the snug little barber’s shop." + +Then Grandfather amused his children and himself, with fancying all the +different sorts of people who had occupied our chair, while they awaited +the leisure of the barber. + +There was the old clergyman, such as Dr. Chauncey, wearing a white wig, +which the barber took from his head, and placed upon a wig-block. Half an +hour, perhaps, was spent in combing and powdering this reverend appendage +to a clerical skull. There too, were officers of the continental army, who +required their hair to be pomatumed and plastered, so as to give them a +bold and martial aspect. There, once in a while, was seen the thin, +care-worn, melancholy visage of an old tory, with a wig that, in times +long past, had perhaps figured at a Province House ball. And there, not +unfrequently, sat the rough captain of a privateer, just returned from a +successful cruise, in which he had captured half a dozen richly laden +vessels, belonging to King George’s subjects. And, sometimes, a rosy +little school-boy climbed into our chair, and sat staring, with wide-open +eyes, at the alligator, the rattlesnake, and the other curiosities of the +barber’s shop. His mother had sent him, with sixpence in his hand, to get +his glossy curls cropped off. The incidents of the Revolution plentifully +supplied the barber’s customers with topics of conversation. They talked +sorrowfully of the death of General Montgomery, and the failure of our +troops to take Quebec; for the New Englanders were now as anxious to get +Canada from the English, as they had formerly been to conquer it from the +French. + +"But, very soon," said Grandfather, "came news from Philadelphia, the most +important that America had ever heard of. On the 4th of July, 1776, +Congress had signed the Declaration of Independence. The thirteen colonies +were now free and independent states. Dark as our prospects were, the +inhabitants welcomed these glorious tidings, and resolved to perish, +rather than again bear the yoke of England!" + +"And I would perish too!" cried Charley. + +"It was a great day—a glorious deed!" said Laurence, coloring high with +enthusiasm. "And, Grandfather, I love to think that the sages in Congress +showed themselves as bold and true as the soldiers in the field. For it +must have required more courage to sign the Declaration of Independence, +than to fight the enemy in battle." + +Grandfather acquiesced in Laurence’s view of the matter. He then touched +briefly and hastily upon the prominent events of the Revolution. The +thunder-storm of war had now rolled southward, and did not again burst +upon Massachusetts, where its first fury had been felt. But she +contributed her full share to the success of the contest. Wherever a +battle was fought—whether at Long Island, White Plains, Trenton, +Princeton, Brandywine, or German-town—some of her brave sons were found +slain upon the field. + +In October, 1777, General Burgoyne surrendered his army, at Saratoga, to +the American general, Gates. The captured troops were sent to +Massachusetts. Not long afterwards, Doctor Franklin and other American +commissioners made a treaty at Paris, by which France bound herself to +assist our countrymen. The gallant Lafayette was already fighting for our +freedom, by the side of Washington. In 1778, a French fleet, commanded by +Count d’Estaing, spent a considerable time in Boston Harbor. It marks the +vicissitudes of human affairs, that the French, our ancient enemies, +should come hither as comrades and brethren, and that kindred England +should be our foe. + +"While the war was raging in the Middle and Southern States," proceeded +Grandfather, "Massachusetts had leisure to settle a new constitution of +government, instead of the royal charter. This was done in 1780. In the +same year, John Hancock, who had been president of Congress, was chosen +governor of the state. He was the first whom the people had elected, since +the days of old Simon Bradstreet." + +"But, Grandfather, who had been governor since the British were driven +away?" inquired Laurence. "General Gage and Sir William Howe were the last +whom you have told us of." + +"There had been no governor for the last four years," replied Grandfather. +"Massachusetts had been ruled by the legislature, to whom the people paid +obedience of their own accord. It is one of the most remarkable +circumstances in our history, that, when the charter government was +overthrown by the war, no anarchy, nor the slightest confusion ensued. +This was a great honor to the people. But now, Hancock was proclaimed +governor by sound of trumpet; and there was again a settled government." + +Grandfather again adverted to the progress of the war. In 1781, General +Greene drove the British from the Southern States. In October, of the same +year, General Washington compelled Lord Cornwallis to surrender his army, +at Yorktown, in Virginia. This was the last great event of the +revolutionary contest. King George and his ministers perceived, that all +the might of England could not compel America to renew her allegiance to +the crown. After a great deal of discussion, a treaty of peace was signed, +in September, 1783. + +"Now, at last," said Grandfather, "after weary years of war, the regiments +of Massachusetts returned in peace to their families. Now, the stately and +dignified leaders, such as General Lincoln and General Knox, with their +pondered hair and their uniforms of blue and buff, were seen moving about +the streets." + +"And little boys ran after them, I suppose," remarked Charley; "and the +grown people bowed respectfully." + +"They deserved respect, for they were good men, as well as brave," +answered Grandfather. "Now, too, the inferior officers and privates came +home, to seek some peaceful occupation. Their friends remembered them as +slender and smooth-cheeked young men; but they returned with the erect and +rigid mien of disciplined soldiers. Some hobbled on crutches and wooden +legs; others had received wounds, which were still rankling in their +breasts. Many, alas! had fallen in battle, and perhaps were left unburied +on the bloody field." + +"The country must have been sick of war," observed Laurence. + +"One would have thought so," said Grandfather. "Yet only two or three +years elapsed, before the folly of some misguided men caused another +mustering of soldiers. This affair was called Shays’ War, because a +Captain Shays was the chief leader of the insurgents." + +"O Grandfather, don’t let there be another war!" cried little Alice, +piteously. + +Grandfather comforted his dear little girl, by assuring her that there was +no great mischief done. Shays’s War happened in the latter part of 1786, +and the beginning of the following year. Its principal cause was the +badness of the times. The State of Massachusetts, in its public capacity, +was very much in debt. So, likewise, were many of the people. An +insurrection took place, the object of which seems to have been, to +interrupt the course of law, and get rid of debts and taxes. + +James Bowdoin, a good and able man, was now governor of Massachusetts. He +sent General Lincoln, at the head of four thousand men, to put down the +insurrection. This general, who had fought through several hard campaigns +in the Revolution, managed matters like an old soldier, and totally +defeated the rebels, at the expense of very little blood. + +"There is but one more public event to be recorded in the history of our +chair," proceeded Grandfather. "In the year 1794, Samuel Adams was elected +governor of Massachusetts. I have told you what a distinguished patriot he +was, and how much he resembled the stern old Puritans. Could the ancient +freemen of Massachusetts, who lived in the days of the first charter, have +arisen from their graves, they would probably have voted for Samuel Adams +to be governor." + +"Well, Grandfather, I hope he sat in our chair!" said Clara. + +"He did," replied Grandfather. "He had long been in the habit of visiting +the barber’s shop, where our venerable chair, philosophically forgetful of +its former dignities, had now spent nearly eighteen not uncomfortable +years. Such a remarkable piece of furniture, so evidently a relic of +long-departed times, could not escape the notice of Samuel Adams. He made +minute researches into its history, and ascertained what a succession of +excellent and famous people had occupied it." + +"How did he find it out?" asked Charley. "For I suppose the chair could +not tell its own history." + +"There used to be a vast collection of ancient letters and other +documents, in the tower of the old South Church," answered Grandfather. +"Perhaps the history of our chair was contained among these. At all +events, Samuel Adams appears to have been well acquainted with it. When he +became governor, he felt that he could have no more honorable seat, than +that which had been the ancient Chair of State. He therefore purchased it +for a trifle, and filled it worthily for three years, as governor of +Massachusetts." + +"And what next?" asked Charley. + +"That is all," said Grandfather, heaving a sigh; for he could not help +being a little sad, at the thought that his stories must close here. +"Samuel Adams died in 1803, at the age of above threescore and ten. He was +a great patriot but a poor man. At his death, he left scarcely property +enough to pay the expenses of his funeral. This precious chair, among his +other effects, was sold at auction; and your Grandfather, who was then in +the strength of his years, became the purchaser." + +Laurence, with a mind full of thoughts, that struggled for expression, but +could find none, looked steadfastly at the chair. + +He had now learned all its history, yet was not satisfied. + +"Oh, how I wish that the chair could speak!" cried he. "After its long +intercourse with mankind—after looking upon the world for ages—what +lessons of golden wisdom it might utter! It might teach a private person +how to lead a good and happy life—or a statesman how to make his country +prosperous!" + + + + +Chapter XI + + +Grandfather was struck by Laurence’s idea, that the historic chair should +utter a voice, and thus pour forth the collected wisdom of two centuries. +The old gentleman had once possessed no inconsiderable share of fancy; +and, even now, its fading sunshine occasionally glimmered among his more +sombre reflections. + +As the history of the chair had exhausted all his facts, Grandfather +determined to have recourse to fable. So, after warning the children that +they must not mistake this story for a true one, he related what we shall +call,— + + + +GRANDFATHER’S DREAM + + +Laurence and Clara, where were you last night? Where were you, Charley, +and dear little Alice? You had all gone to rest, and left old Grandfather +to meditate alone, in his great chair. The lamp had grown so dim, that its +light hardly illuminated the alabaster shade. The wood fire had crumbled +into heavy embers, among which the little flames danced, and quivered, and +sported about, like fairies. + +And here sat Grandfather, all by himself. He knew that it was bedtime; yet +he could not help longing to hear your merry voices, or to hold a +comfortable chat with some old friend; because then his pillow would be +visited by pleasant dreams. But, as neither children nor friends were at +hand, Grandfather leaned back in the great chair, and closed his eyes, for +the sake of meditating more profoundly. + +And, when Grandfather’s meditations had grown very profound indeed, he +fancied that he heard a sound over his head, as if somebody were preparing +to speak. + +"Hem!" it said, in a dry, husky tone. "H-e-m! Hem!" + +As Grandfather did not know that any person was in the room, he started up +in great surprise, and peeped hither and thither, behind the chair, and +into the recess by the fireside, and at the dark nook yonder, near the +bookcase. Nobody could he see. + +"Pooh!" said Grandfather to himself, "I must have been dreaming." + +But, just as he was going to resume his seat, Grandfather happened to look +at the great chair. The rays of fire-light were flickering upon it in such +a manner that it really seemed as if its oaken frame were all alive. What! +Did it not move its elbow? There, too! It certainly lifted one of its +ponderous fore-legs, as if it had a notion of drawing itself a little +nearer to the fire. Meanwhile, the lion’s head nodded at Grandfather, with +as polite and sociable a look as a lion’s visage, carved in oak, could +possibly be expected to assume. Well, this is strange! + +"Good evening, my old friend," said the dry and husky voice, now a little +clearer than before. "We have been intimately acquainted so long, that I +think it high time we have a chat together." + +Grandfather was looking straight at the lion’s head, and could not be +mistaken in supposing that it moved its lips. So here the mystery was all +explained. + +"I was not aware," said Grandfather, with a civil salutation to his oaken +companion, "that you possessed the faculty of speech. Otherwise, I should +often have been glad to converse with such a solid, useful, and +substantial, if not brilliant member of society." + +"Oh!" replied the ancient chair, in a quiet and easy tone, for it had now +cleared its throat of the dust of ages. "I am naturally a silent and +incommunicative sort of character. Once or twice, in the course of a +century, I unclose my lips. When the gentle Lady Arbella departed this +life, I uttered a groan. When the honest mint-master weighed his plump +daughter against the pine-tree shillings, I chuckled audibly at the joke. +When old Simon Bradstreet took the place of the tyrant Andros, I joined in +the general huzza, and capered upon my wooden legs, for joy. To be sure, +the bystanders were so fully occupied with their own feelings, that my +sympathy was quite unnoticed." + +"And have you often held a private chat with your friends?" asked +Grandfather. + +"Not often," answered the chair. "I once talked with Sir William Phips, +and communicated my ideas about the witchcraft delusion. Cotton Mather had +several conversations with me, and derived great benefit from my +historical reminiscences. In the days of the Stamp Act, I whispered in the +ear of Hutchinson, bidding him to remember what stock his countrymen were +descended of, and to think whether the spirit of their forefathers had +utterly departed from them. The last man whom I favored with a colloquy, +was that stout old republican, Samuel Adams." + +"And how happens it," inquired Grandfather, "that there is no record nor +tradition of your conversational abilities? It is an uncommon thing to +meet with a chair that can talk." + +"Why, to tell you the truth," said the chair, giving itself a hitch nearer +to the hearth, "I am not apt to choose the most suitable moments for +unclosing my lips. Sometimes I have inconsiderately begun to speak, when +my occupant, lolling back in my arms, was inclined to take an after-dinner +nap. Or, perhaps, the impulse to talk may be felt at midnight, when the +lamp burns dim, and the fire crumbles into decay, and the studious or +thoughtful man finds that his brain is in a mist. Oftenest, I have +unwisely uttered my wisdom in the ears of sick persons, when the +inquietude of fever made them toss about, upon my cushion. And so it +happens, that, though my words make a pretty strong impression at the +moment, yet my auditors invariably remember them only as a dream. I should +not wonder if you, my excellent friend, were to do the same, to-morrow +morning." + +"Nor I either," thought Grandfather to himself. However, he thanked this +respectable old chair for beginning the conversation, and begged to know +whether it had any thing particular to communicate. + +"I have been listening attentively to your narrative of my adventures," +replied the chair, "and it must be owned, that your correctness entitles +you to be held up as a pattern to biographers. Nevertheless, there are a +few omissions, which I should be glad to see supplied. For instance, you +make no mention of the good knight, Sir Richard Saltonstall, nor of the +famous Hugh Peters, nor of those old regicide judges, Whalley, Goffe, and +Dixwell. Yet I have borne the weight of all these distinguished +characters, at one time or another." + +Grandfather promised amendment, if ever he should have an opportunity to +repeat his narrative. The good old chair, which still seemed to retain a +due regard for outward appearance, then reminded him how long a time had +passed, since it had been provided with a new cushion. It likewise +expressed the opinion, that the oaken figures on its back would show to +much better advantage, by the aid of a little varnish. + +"And I have had a complaint in this joint," continued the chair, +endeavoring to lift one of its legs, "ever since Charley trundled his +wheelbarrow against me." + +"It shall be attended to," said Grandfather. "And now, venerable chair, I +have a favor to solicit. During an existence of more than two centuries, +you have had a familiar intercourse with men who were esteemed the wisest +of their day. Doubtless, with your capacious understanding, you have +treasured up many an invaluable lesson of wisdom. You certainly have had +time enough to guess the riddle of life. Tell us poor mortals, then, how +we may be happy!" + +The lion’s head fixed its eyes thoughtfully upon the fire, and the whole +chair assumed an aspect of deep meditation. Finally, it beckoned to +Grandfather with its elbow, and made a step sideways towards him, as if it +had a very important secret to communicate. + +"As long as I have stood in the midst of human affairs," said the chair, +with a very oracular enunciation, "I have constantly observed that +JUSTICE, TRUTH, and LOVE, are the chief ingredients of every happy life." + +"Justice, Truth, and Love!" exclaimed Grandfather. "We need not exist two +centuries to find out that these qualities are essential to our happiness. +This is no secret. Every human being is born with the instinctive +knowledge of it." + +"Ah!" cried the chair, drawing back in surprise. "From what I have +observed of the dealings of man with man, and nation with nation, I never +should have suspected that they knew this all-important secret. And, with +this eternal lesson written in your soul, do you ask me to sift new wisdom +for you, out of my petty existence of two or three centuries?" + +"But, my dear chair—" said Grandfather. + +"Not a word more," interrupted the chair; "here I close my lips for the +next hundred years. At the end of that period, if I shall have discovered +any new precepts of happiness, better than what Heaven has already taught +you, they shall assuredly be given to the world." + +In the energy of its utterance, the oaken chair seemed to stamp its foot, +and trod, (we hope unintentionally) upon Grandfather’s toe. The old +gentleman started, and found that he had been asleep in the great chair, +and that his heavy walking stick had fallen down across his foot. + + + +"Grandfather," cried little Alice, clapping her hands, "you must dream a +new dream, every night, about our chair!" + +Laurence, and Clara, and Charley, said the same. But the good old +gentleman shook his head, and declared that here ended the history, real +or fabulous, of GRANDFATHER’S CHAIR. + + + + + +BIOGRAPHICAL STORIES + + +BENJAMIN WEST, +SIR ISAAC NEWTON, +SAMUEL JOHNSON +OLIVER CROMWELL, +BENJAMIN FRANKLIN, +QUEEN CHRISTINA. + + + This small volume, and others of a similar character, from the + same hand, have not been composed without a deep sense of + responsibility. The author regards children as sacred, and would + not, for the world, cast any thing into the fountain of a young + heart, that might embitter and pollute its waters. And, even in + point of the reputation to be aimed at, juvenile literature is as + well worth cultivating as any other. The writer, if he succeed in + pleasing his little readers, may hope to be remembered by them + till their own old age—a far longer period of literary existence + than is generally attained, by those who seek immortality from the + judgments of full grown men. + + + + +Chapter I + + +When Edward Temple was about eight or nine years old, he was afflicted +with a disorder of the eyes. It was so severe, and his sight was naturally +so delicate, that the surgeon felt some apprehensions lest the boy should +become totally blind. He therefore gave strict directions to keep him in a +darkened chamber, with a bandage over his eyes. Not a ray of the blessed +light of Heaven could be suffered to visit the poor lad. + +This was a sad thing for Edward! It was just the same as if there were to +be no more sunshine, nor moonlight, nor glow of the cheerful fire, nor +light of lamps. A night had begun which was to continue perhaps for +months,—a longer and drearier night than that which voyagers are compelled +to endure, when their ship is ice-bound, throughout the winter, in the +Arctic Ocean. His dear father and mother, his brother George, and the +sweet face of little Emily Robinson, must all vanish, and leave him in +utter darkness and solitude. Their voices and footsteps, it is true, would +be heard around him; he would feel his mother’s embrace, and the kind +pressure of all their hands; but still it would seem as if they were a +thousand miles away. + +And then his studies! They were to be entirely given up. This was another +grievous trial; for Edward’s memory hardly went back to the period when he +had not known how to read. Many and many a holiday had he spent at his +book, poring over its pages until the deepening twilight confused the +print, and made all the letters run into long words. Then would he press +his hands across his eyes, and wonder why they pained him so, and, when +the candles were lighted, what was the reason that they burned so dimly, +like the moon in a foggy night. Poor little fellow! So far as his eyes +were concerned, he was already an old man, and needed a pair of spectacles +almost as much as his own grandfather did. + +And now, alas! the time was come, when even grandfather’s spectacles could +not have assisted Edward to read. After a few bitter tears, which only +pained his eyes the more, the poor boy submitted to the surgeon’s orders. +His eyes were bandaged, and, with his mother on one side, and his little +friend Emily on the other, he was led into a darkened chamber. + +"Mother, I shall be very miserable," said Edward, sobbing. + +"Oh, no, my dear child!" replied his mother, cheerfully. "Your eyesight +was a precious gift of Heaven, it is true; but you would do wrong to be +miserable for its loss, even if there were no hope of regaining it. There +are other enjoyments, besides what come to us through our eyes." + +"None that are worth having," said Edward. + +"Ah! but you will not think so long," rejoined Mrs. Temple, with +tenderness. "All of us—your father, and myself, and George, and our sweet +Emily—will try to find occupation and amusement for you. We will use all +our eyes to make you happy. Will not they be better than a single pair?" + +"I will sit by you all day long," said Emily, in her low, sweet voice, +putting her hand into that of Edward. + +"And so will I, Ned," said George, his elder brother,—"school time and +all, if my father will permit me." + +Edward’s brother George was three or four years older than himself, a +fine, hardy lad, of a bold and ardent temper. He was the leader of his +comrades in all their enterprises and amusements. As to his proficiency at +study, there was not much to be said. He had sense and ability enough to +have made himself a scholar, but found so many pleasanter things to do, +that he seldom took hold of a book with his whole heart. So fond was +George of boisterous sports and exercises, that it was really a great +token of affection and sympathy, when he offered to sit all day long in a +dark chamber, with his poor brother Edward. + +As for little Emily Robinson, she was the daughter of one of Mr. Temple’s +dearest friends. Ever since her mother went to Heaven, (which was soon +after Emily’s birth,) the little girl had dwelt in the household where we +now find her. Mr. and Mrs. Temple seemed to love her as well as their own +children; for they had no daughter except Emily; nor would the boys have +known the blessing of a sister, had not this gentle stranger come to teach +them what it was. If I could show you Emily’s face, with her dark hair +smoothed away from her forehead, you would be pleased with her look of +simplicity and loving-kindness, but might think that she was somewhat too +grave for a child of seven years old. But you would not love her the less +for that. + +So brother George, and this loving little girl, were to be Edward’s +companions and playmates, while he should be kept prisoner in the dark +chamber. When the first bitterness of his grief was over, he began to feel +that there might be some comforts and enjoyments in life, even for a boy +whose eyes were covered with a bandage. + +"I thank you, dear mother," said he, with only a few sobs, "and you, +Emily; and you too, George. You will all be very kind to me, I know. And +my father—will not he come and see me, every day?" + +"Yes, my dear boy," said Mr. Temple; for, though invisible to Edward, he +was standing close beside him. "I will spend some hours of every day with +you. And as I have often amused you by relating stories and adventures, +while you had the use of your eyes, I can do the same, now that you are +unable to read. Will this please you, Edward?" + +"Oh, very much!" replied Edward. + +"Well then," said his father, "this evening we will begin the series of +Biographical Stories, which I promised you some time ago." + + + + +Chapter II + + +When evening came, Mr. Temple found Edward considerably revived in +spirits, and disposed to be resigned to his misfortune. Indeed, the figure +of the boy, as it was dimly seen by the fire-light, reclining in a well +stuffed easy-chair, looked so very comfortable that many people might have +envied him. When a man’s eyes have grown old with gazing at the ways of +the world, it does not seem such a terrible misfortune to have them +bandaged. + +Little Emily Robinson sat by Edward’s side, with the air of an +accomplished nurse. As well as the duskiness of the chamber would permit, +she watched all his motions, and each varying expression of his face, and +tried to anticipate her patient’s wishes, before his tongue could utter +them. Yet it was noticeable, that the child manifested an indescribable +awe and disquietude, whenever she fixed her eyes on the bandage; for to +her simple and affectionate heart, it seemed as if her dear friend Edward +was separated from her, because she could not see his eyes. A friend’s +eyes tell us many things, which could never be spoken by the tongue. + +George, likewise, looked awkward and confused, as stout and healthy boys +are accustomed to do, in the society of the sick or afflicted. Never +having felt pain or sorrow, they are abashed, from not knowing how to +sympathize with the sufferings of others. + +"Well, my dear Edward," inquired Mrs. Temple, "is your chair quite +comfortable? and has your little nurse provided for all your wants? If so, +your father is ready to begin his stories." + +"Oh, I am very well now," answered Edward, with a faint smile. "And my +ears have not forsaken me, though my eyes are good for nothing. So, pray, +dear father, begin!" + +It was Mr. Temple’s design to tell the children a series of true stories, +the incidents of which should be taken from the childhood and early life +of eminent people. Thus he hoped to bring George, and Edward, and Emily, +into closer acquaintance with the famous persons who have lived in other +times, by showing that they also had been children once. Although Mr. +Temple was scrupulous to relate nothing but what was founded on fact, yet +he felt himself at liberty to clothe the incidents of his narrative in a +new coloring, so that his auditors might understand them the better. + +"My first story," said he, "shall be about a painter of pictures." + +"Dear me!" cried Edward, with a sigh. "I am afraid I shall never look at +pictures any more." + +"We will hope for the best," answered his father. "In the mean time, you +must try to see things within your own mind." + +Mr. Temple then began the following story: + + + +BENJAMIN WEST + + +BORN 1738. DIED 1820. + +In the year 1738, there came into the world, in the town of Springfield, +Pennsylvania, a Quaker infant, from whom his parents and neighbors looked +for wonderful things. A famous preacher of the Society of Friends had +prophesied about little Ben, and foretold that he would be one of the most +remarkable characters that had appeared on earth since the days of William +Penn. On this account, the eyes of many people were fixed upon the boy. +Some of his ancestors had won great renown in the old wars of England and +France; but it was probably expected that Ben would become a preacher, and +would convert multitudes to the peaceful doctrines of the Quakers. Friend +West and his wife were thought to be very fortunate in having such a son. + +Little Ben lived to the ripe age of six years, without doing any thing +that was worthy to be told in history. But, one summer afternoon, in his +seventh year, his mother put a fan into his hand, and bade him keep the +flies away from the face of a little babe, who lay fast asleep in the +cradle. She then left the room. + +The boy waved the fan to-and-fro, and drove away the buzzing flies +whenever they had the impertinence to come near the baby’s face. When they +had all flown out of the window, or into distant parts of the room, he +bent over the cradle, and delighted himself with gazing at the sleeping +infant. It was, indeed, a very pretty sight. The little personage in the +cradle slumbered peacefully, with its waxen hands under its chin, looking +as full of blissful quiet as if angels were singing lullabies in its ear. +Indeed, it must have been dreaming about Heaven; for, while Ben stooped +over the cradle, the little baby smiled. + +"How beautiful she looks!" said Ben to himself. "What a pity it is, that +such a pretty smile should not last forever!" + +Now Ben, at this period of his life, had never heard of that wonderful +art, by which a look, that appears and vanishes in a moment, may be made +to last for hundreds of years. But, though nobody had told him of such an +art, he may be said to have invented it for himself. On a table, near at +hand, there were pens and paper, and ink of two colors, black and red. The +boy seized a pen and sheet of paper, and kneeling down beside the cradle, +began to draw a likeness of the infant. While he was busied in this +manner, he heard his mother’s step approaching, and hastily tried to +conceal the paper. + +"Benjamin, my son, what hast thou been doing?" inquired his mother, +observing marks of confusion in his face. + +At first, Ben was unwilling to tell; for he felt as if there might be +something wrong in stealing the baby’s face, and putting it upon a sheet +of paper. However, as his mother insisted, he finally put the sketch into +her hand, and then hung his head, expecting to be well scolded. But when +the good lady saw what was on the paper, in lines of red and black ink, +she uttered a scream of surprise and joy. + +"Bless me!" cried she. "It is a picture of little Sally!" + +And then she threw her arms round our friend Benjamin, and kissed him so +tenderly, that he never afterwards was afraid to show his performances to +his mother. + +As Ben grew older, he was observed to take vast delight in looking at the +hues and forms of nature. For instance, he was greatly pleased with the +blue violets of spring, the wild roses of summer, and the scarlet +cardinal-flowers of early autumn. In the decline of the year, when the +woods were variegated with all the colors of the rainbow, Ben seemed to +desire nothing better than to gaze at them from morn till night. The +purple and golden clouds of sunset were a joy to him. And he was +continually endeavoring to draw the figures of trees, men, mountains, +houses, cattle, geese, ducks, and turkeys, with a piece of chalk, on +barn-doors, or on the floor. + +In these old times, the Mohawk Indians were still numerous in +Pennsylvania. Every year a party of them used to pay a visit to +Springfield, because the wigwams of their ancestors had formerly stood +there. These wild men grew fond of little Ben, and made him very happy by +giving him some of the red and yellow paint with which they were +accustomed to adorn their faces. His mother, too, presented him with a +piece of indigo. Thus he now had three colors,—red, blue, and yellow—and +could manufacture green, by mixing the yellow with the blue. Our friend +Ben was overjoyed, and doubtless showed his gratitude to the Indians by +taking their likenesses, in the strange dresses which they wore, with +feathers, tomahawks, and bows and arrows. + +But, all this time, the young artist had no paint-brushes, nor were there +any to be bought, unless he had sent to Philadelphia on purpose. However, +he was a very ingenious boy, and resolved to manufacture paint-brushes for +himself. With this design, he laid hold upon—what do you think? why, upon +a respectable old black cat, who was sleeping quietly by the fireside. + +"Puss," said little Ben to the cat, "pray give me some of the fur from the +tip of thy tail!" + +Though he addressed the black cat so civilly, yet Ben was determined to +have the fur, whether she were willing or not. Puss, who had no great zeal +for the fine arts, would have resisted if she could; but the boy was armed +with his mother’s scissors, and very dexterously clipped off fur enough to +make a paint-brush. This was of so much use to him, that he applied to +Madam Puss again and again, until her warm coat of fur had become so thin +and ragged, that she could hardly keep comfortable through the winter. +Poor thing! she was forced to creep close into the chimney-corner, and +eyed Ben with a very rueful physiognomy. But Ben considered it more +necessary that he should have paint-brushes, than that Puss should be +warm. + +About this period, Friend West received a visit from Mr. Pennington, a +merchant of Philadelphia, who was likewise a member of the Society of +Friends. The visitor, on entering the parlor, was surprised to see it +ornamented with drawings of Indian chiefs, and of birds with beautiful +plumage, and of the wild flowers of the forest. Nothing of the kind was +ever seen before in the habitation of a Quaker farmer. + +"Why, Friend West," exclaimed the Philadelphia merchant, "what has +possessed thee to cover thy walls with all these pictures? Where on earth +didst thou get them?" + +Then Friend West explained, that all these pictures were painted by little +Ben, with no better materials than red and yellow ochre and a piece of +indigo, and with brushes made of the black cat’s fur. + +"Verily," said Mr. Pennington, "the boy hath a wonderful faculty. Some of +our friends might look upon these matters as vanity; but little Benjamin +appears to have been born a painter; and Providence is wiser than we are." + +The good merchant patted Benjamin on the head, and evidently considered +him a wonderful boy. When his parents saw how much their son’s +performances were admired, they no doubt remembered the prophecy of the +old Quaker preacher, respecting Ben’s future eminence. Yet they could not +understand how he was ever to become a very great and useful man, merely +by making pictures. + +One evening, shortly after Mr. Pennington’s return to Philadelphia, a +package arrived at Springfield, directed to our little friend Ben. + +"What can it possibly be?" thought Ben, when it was put into his hands. +"Who can have sent me such a great square package as this!" + +On taking off the thick brown paper which enveloped it, behold! there was +a paint-box, with a great many cakes of paint, and brushes of various +sizes. It was the gift of good Mr. Pennington. There were likewise several +squares of canvas, such as artists use for painting pictures upon, and, in +addition to all these treasures, some beautiful engravings of landscapes. +These were the first pictures that Ben had ever seen, except those of his +own drawing. + +What a joyful evening was this for the little artist! At bedtime, he put +the paint-box under his pillow, and got hardly a wink of sleep; for, all +night long, his fancy was painting pictures in the darkness. In the +morning, he hurried to the garret, and was seen no more till the +dinner-hour; nor did he give himself time to eat more than a mouthful or +two of food, before he hurried back to the garret again. The next day, and +the next, he was just as busy as ever; until at last his mother thought it +time to ascertain what he was about. She accordingly followed him to the +garret. + +On opening the door, the first object that presented itself to her eyes +was our friend Benjamin, giving the last touches to a beautiful picture. +He had copied portions of two of the engravings, and made one picture out +of both, with such admirable skill that it was far more beautiful than the +originals. The grass, the trees, the water, the sky, and the houses, were +all painted in their proper colors. There, too, was the sunshine and the +shadow, looking as natural as life. + +"My dear child, thou hast done wonders!" cried his mother. + +The good lady was in an ecstasy of delight. And well might she be proud of +her boy; for there were touches in this picture, which old artists, who +had spent a lifetime in the business, need not have been ashamed of. Many +a year afterwards, this wonderful production was exhibited at the Royal +Academy in London. + +When Benjamin was quite a large lad, he was sent to school at +Philadelphia. Not long after his arrival, he had a slight attack of fever, +which confined him to his bed. The light, which would otherwise have +disturbed him, was excluded from his chamber by means of closed wooden +shutters. At first, it appeared so totally dark, that Ben could not +distinguish any object in the room. By degrees, however, his eyes became +accustomed to the scanty light. + +He was lying on his back, looking up towards the ceiling, when suddenly he +beheld the dim apparition of a white cow, moving slowly over his head! Ben +started, and rubbed his eyes, in the greatest amazement. + +"What can this mean?" thought he. + +The white cow disappeared; and next came several pigs, who trotted along +the ceiling, and vanished into the darkness of the chamber. So lifelike +did these grunters look, that Ben almost seemed to hear them squeak. + +"Well, this is very strange!" said Ben to himself. + +When the people of the house came to see him, Benjamin told them of the +marvellous circumstance which had occurred. But they would not believe +him. + +"Benjamin, thou art surely out of thy senses!" cried they. "How is it +possible that a white cow and a litter of pigs should be visible on the +ceiling of a dark chamber?" + +Ben, however, had great confidence in his own eyesight, and was determined +to search the mystery to the bottom. For this purpose, when he was again +left alone, he got out of bed, and examined the window-shutters. He soon +perceived a small chink in one of them, through which a ray of light found +its passage, and rested upon the ceiling. Now the science of optics will +inform us, that the pictures of the white cow and the pigs, and of other +objects out of doors, came into the dark chamber, through this narrow +chink, and were painted over Benjamin’s head. It is greatly to his credit, +that he discovered the scientific principle of this phenomenon, and, by +means of it, constructed a Camera Obscura, or Magic Lantern, out of a +hollow box. This was of great advantage to him in drawing landscapes. + +Well; time went on, and Benjamin continued to draw and paint pictures, +until he had now reached the age when it was proper that he should choose +a business for life. His father and mother were in considerable perplexity +about him. According to the ideas of the Quakers it is not right for +people to spend their lives in occupations that are of no real and +sensible advantage to the world. Now, what advantage could the world +expect from Benjamin’s pictures? This was a difficult question; and, in +order to set their minds at rest, his parents determined to consult the +preachers and wise men of their society. Accordingly, they all assembled +in the meeting-house, and discussed the matter from beginning to end. + +Finally, they came to a very wise decision. It seemed so evident that +Providence had created Benjamin to be a painter, and had given him +abilities which would be thrown away in any other business, that the +Quakers resolved not to oppose his inclination. They even acknowledged +that the sight of a beautiful picture might convey instruction to the +mind, and might benefit the heart, as much as a good book or a wise +discourse. They therefore committed the youth to the direction of God, +being well assured that he best knew what was his proper sphere of +usefulness. The old men laid their hands upon Benjamin’s head, and gave +him their blessing, and the women kissed him affectionately. All consented +that he should go forth into the world, and learn to be a painter, by +studying the best pictures of ancient and modern times. + +So our friend Benjamin left the dwelling of his parents, and his native +woods and streams, and the good Quakers of Springfield, and the Indians +who had given him his first colors,—he left all the places and persons +whom he had hitherto known,—and returned to them no more. He went first to +Philadelphia, and afterwards to Europe. Here he was noticed by many great +people, but retained all the sobriety and simplicity which he had learned +among the Quakers. It is related of him, that, when he was presented at +the court of the Prince of Parma, he kept his hat upon his head, even +while kissing the Prince’s hand. + +When he was twenty-five years old, he went to London, and established +himself there as an artist. In due course of time, he acquired great fame +by his pictures, and was made chief painter to King George the Third, and +President of the Royal Academy of Arts. When the Quakers of Pennsylvania +heard of his success, they felt that the prophecy of the old preacher, as +to little Ben’s future eminence, was now accomplished. It is true, they +shook their heads at his pictures of battle and bloodshed, such as the +Death of Wolfe,—thinking that these terrible scenes should not be held up +to the admiration of the world. + +But they approved of the great paintings in which he represented the +miracles and sufferings of the Redeemer of Mankind. King George employed +him to adorn a large and beautiful chapel, at Windsor Castle, with +pictures of these sacred subjects. He likewise painted a magnificent +picture of Christ Healing the Sick, which he gave to the Hospital at +Philadelphia. It was exhibited to the public, and produced so much profit +that the Hospital was enlarged, so as to accommodate thirty more patients. +If Benjamin West had done no other good deed than this, yet it would have +been enough to entitle him to an honorable remembrance forever. At this +very day, there are thirty poor people in the Hospital, who owe all their +comforts to that same picture. + +We shall mention only a single incident more. The picture of Christ +Healing the Sick was exhibited at the Royal Academy in London, where it +covered a vast space, and displayed a multitude of figures as large as +life. On the wall, close beside this admirable picture, hung a small and +faded landscape. It was the same that little Ben had painted in his +father’s garret, after receiving the paint-box and engravings from good +Mr. Pennington. + +He lived many years, in peace and honor, and died in 1820, at the age of +eighty-two. The story of his life is almost as wonderful as a fairy tale; +for there are few stranger transformations than that of a little unknown +Quaker boy, in the wilds of America, into the most distinguished English +painter of his day. Let us each make the best use of our natural +abilities, as Benjamin West did; and with the blessing of Providence, we +shall arrive at some good end. As for fame, it is but little matter +whether we acquire it or not. + + + +"Thank you for the story, my dear father," said Edward, when it was +finished. "Do you know, that it seems as if I could see things without the +help of my eyes? While you were speaking, I have seen little Ben, and the +baby in its cradle, and the Indians, and the white cow and the pigs, and +kind Mr. Pennington, and all the good old Quakers, almost as plainly as if +they were in this very room." + +"It is because your attention was not disturbed by outward objects," +replied Mr. Temple. "People, when deprived of sight, often have more vivid +ideas than those who possess the perfect use of their eyes. I will venture +to say that George has not attended to the story quite so closely." + +"No indeed," said George, "but it was a very pretty story for all that. +How I should have laughed to see Ben making a paint-brush out of the black +cat’s tail! I intend to try the experiment with Emily’s kitten." + +"Oh, no, no, George!" cried Emily, earnestly. "My kitten cannot spare her +tail." + +Edward being an invalid, it was now time for him to retire to bed. When +the family bade him good night, he turned his face towards them, looking +very loth to part. + +"I shall not know when morning comes," said he sorrowfully. "And besides I +want to hear your voices all the time; for, when nobody is speaking, it +seems as if I were alone in a dark world!" + +"You must have faith, my dear child," replied his mother. "Faith is the +soul’s eyesight; and when we possess it, the world is never dark nor +lonely." + + + + +Chapter III + + +The next day, Edward began to get accustomed to his new condition of life. +Once, indeed, when his parents were out of the way, and only Emily was +left to take care of him, he could not resist the temptation to thrust +aside the bandage, and peep at the anxious face of his little nurse. But, +in spite of the dimness of the chamber, the experiment caused him so much +pain, that he felt no inclination to take another look. So, with a deep +sigh, he resigned himself to his fate. + +"Emily, pray talk to me!" said he, somewhat impatiently. + +Now, Emily was a remarkably silent little girl, and did not possess that +liveliness of disposition which renders some children such excellent +companions. She seldom laughed, and had not the faculty of making many +words about small matters. But the love and earnestness of her heart +taught her how to amuse poor Edward, in his darkness. She put her +knitting-work into his hands. + +"You must learn how to knit," said she. + +"What! without using my eyes?" cried Edward. + +"I can knit with my eyes shut," replied Emily. + +Then, with her own little hands, she guided Edward’s fingers, while he set +about this new occupation. So awkward were his first attempts, that any +other little girl would have laughed heartily. But Emily preserved her +gravity, and showed the utmost patience in taking up the innumerable +stitches which he let down. In the course of an hour or two, his progress +was quite encouraging. + +When evening came, Edward acknowledged that the day had been far less +wearisome than he anticipated. But he was glad, nevertheless, when his +father and mother, and George and Emily, all took their seats around his +chair. He put out his hand to grasp each of their hands, and smiled with a +very bright expression upon his lips. + +"Now I can see you all, with my mind’s eye," said he; "and now, father, +pray tell us another story." + +So Mr. Temple began. + + + +SIR ISAAC NEWTON + + +BORN 1642. DIED 1727. + +On Christmas-day, in the year 1642, Isaac Newton was born, at the small +village of Woolsthorpe, in England. Little did his mother think, when she +beheld her new-born babe, that he was destined to explain many matters +which had been a mystery ever since the creation of the world. + +Isaac’s father being dead, Mrs. Newton was married again to a clergyman, +and went to reside at North Witham. Her son was left to the care of his +good old grandmother, who was very kind to him, and sent him to school. In +his early years, Isaac did not appear to be a very bright scholar, but was +chiefly remarkable for his ingenuity in all mechanical occupations. He had +a set of little tools, and saws of various sizes, manufactured by himself. +With the aid of these, Isaac contrived to make many curious articles, at +which he worked with so much skill, that he seemed to have been born with +a saw or chisel in his hand. + +The neighbors looked with vast admiration at the things which Isaac +manufactured. And his old grandmother, I suppose, was never weary of +talking about him. + +"He’ll make a capital workman, one of these days," she would probably say. +"No fear but what Isaac will do well in the world, and be a rich man +before he dies." + +It is amusing to conjecture what were the anticipations of his grandmother +and the neighbors, about Isaac’s future life. Some of them, perhaps, +fancied that he would make beautiful furniture of mahogany, rose-wood, or +polished oak, inlaid with ivory and ebony, and magnificently gilded. And +then, doubtless, all the rich people would purchase these fine things, to +adorn their drawing-rooms. Others probably thought that little Isaac was +destined to be an architect, and would build splendid mansions for the +nobility and gentry, and churches too, with the tallest steeples that had +ever been seen in England. + +Some of his friends, no doubt, advised Isaac’s grandmother to apprentice +him to a clockmaker; for, besides his mechanical skill, the boy seemed to +have a taste for mathematics, which would be very useful to him in that +profession. And then, in due time, Isaac would set up for himself, and +would manufacture curious clocks, like those that contain sets of dancing +figures, which issue from the dial-plate when the hour is struck; or like +those, where a ship sails across the face of the clock, and is seen +tossing up and down on the waves, as often as the pendulum vibrates. + +Indeed, there was some ground for supposing that Isaac would devote +himself to the manufacture of clocks; since he had already made one, of a +kind which nobody had ever heard of before. It was set a-going, not by +wheels and weights, like other clocks, but by the dropping of water. This +was an object of great wonderment to all the people roundabout; and it +must be confessed that there are few boys, or men either, who could +contrive to tell what o’clock it is, by means of a bowl of water. + +Besides the water-clock, Isaac made a sun-dial. Thus his grandmother was +never at a loss to know the hour; for the water-clock would tell it in the +shade, and the dial in the sunshine. The sun-dial is said to be still in +existence at Woolsthorpe, on the corner of the house where Isaac dwelt. If +so, it must have marked the passage of every sunny hour that has elapsed, +since Isaac Newton was a boy. It marked all the famous moments of his +life; it marked the hour of his death; and still the sunshine creeps +slowly over it, as regularly as when Isaac first set it up. + +Yet we must not say that the sun-dial has lasted longer than its maker; +for Isaac Newton will exist, long after the dial—yea, and long after the +sun itself—shall have crumbled to decay. + +Isaac possessed a wonderful faculty of acquiring knowledge by the simplest +means. For instance, what method do you suppose he took, to find out the +strength of the wind? You will never guess how the boy could compel that +unseen, inconstant, and ungovernable wanderer, the wind, to tell him the +measure of its strength. Yet nothing can be more simple. He jumped against +the wind; and by the length of his jump, he could calculate the force of a +gentle breeze, a brisk gale, or a tempest. Thus, even in his boyish +sports, he was continually searching out the secrets of philosophy. + +Not far from his grandmother’s residence there was a windmill, which +operated on a new plan. Isaac was in the habit of going thither +frequently, and would spend whole hours in examining its various parts. +While the mill was at rest, he pryed into its internal machinery. When its +broad sails were set in motion by the wind, he watched the process by +which the mill-stones were made to revolve, and crush the grain that was +put into the hopper. After gaining a thorough knowledge of its +construction, he was observed to be unusually busy with his tools. + +It was not long before his grandmother, and all the neighborhood, knew +what Isaac had been about. He had constructed a model of the windmill. +Though not so large, I suppose as one of the box-traps which boys set to +catch squirrels, yet every part of the mill and its machinery was +complete. Its little sails were neatly made of linen, and whirled round +very swiftly when the mill was placed in a draught of air. Even a puff of +wind from Isaac’s mouth, or from a pair of bellows, was sufficient to set +the sails in motion. And—what was most curious—if a handful of grains of +wheat were put into the little hopper, they would soon be converted into +snow-white flour. + +Isaac’s playmates were enchanted with his new windmill. They thought that +nothing so pretty, and so wonderful, had ever been seen in the whole +world. + +"But, Isaac," said one of them, "you have forgotten one thing that belongs +to a mill." + +"What is that?" asked Isaac; for he supposed, that, from the roof of the +mill to its foundation, he had forgotten nothing. + +"Why, where is the miller?" said his friend. + +"That is true!—I must look out for one," said Isaac; and he set himself to +consider how the deficiency should be supplied. + +He might easily have made the miniature figure of a man; but then it would +not have been able to move about, and perform the duties of a miller. As +Captain Lemuel Gulliver had not yet discovered the island of Lilliput, +Isaac did not know that there were little men in the world, whose size was +just suited to his windmill. It so happened, however, that a mouse had +just been caught in the trap; and, as no other miller could be found, Mr. +Mouse was appointed to that important office. The new miller made a very +respectable appearance in his dark gray coat. To be sure, he had not a +very good character for honesty, and was suspected of sometimes stealing a +portion of the grain which was given him to grind. But perhaps some +two-legged millers are quite as dishonest as this small quadruped. + +As Isaac grew older, it was found that he had far more important matters +in his mind than the manufacture of toys, like the little windmill. All +day long, if left to himself, he was either absorbed in thought, or +engaged in some book of mathematics, or natural philosophy. At night, I +think it probable, he looked up with reverential curiosity to the stars, +and wondered whether they were worlds, like our own,—and how great was +their distance from the earth,—and what was the power that kept them in +their courses. Perhaps, even so early in life, Isaac Newton felt a +presentiment that he should be able, hereafter, to answer all these +questions. + +When Isaac was fourteen years old, his mother’s second husband being now +dead, she wished her son to leave school, and assist her in managing the +farm at Woolsthorpe. For a year or two, therefore, he tried to turn his +attention to farming. But his mind was so bent on becoming a scholar, that +his mother sent him back to school, and afterwards to the University of +Cambridge. + +I have now finished my anecdotes of Isaac Newton’s boyhood. My story would +be far too long, were I to mention all the splendid discoveries which he +made, after he came to be a man. He was the first that found out the +nature of Light; for, before his day, nobody could tell what the sunshine +was composed of. You remember, I suppose, the story of an apple’s falling +on his head, and thus leading him to discover the force of gravitation, +which keeps the heavenly bodies in their courses. When he had once got +hold of this idea, he never permitted his mind to rest, until he had +searched out all the laws, by which the planets are guided through the +sky. This he did as thoroughly as if he had gone up among the stars, and +tracked them in their orbits. The boy had found out the mechanism of a +windmill; the man explained to his fellow-men the mechanism of the +universe. + +While making these researches he was accustomed to spend night after night +in a lofty tower, gazing at the heavenly bodies through a telescope. His +mind was lifted far above the things of this world. He may be said, +indeed, to have spent the greater part of his life in worlds that lie +thousands and millions of miles away; for where the thoughts and the heart +are, there is our true existence. + +Did you never hear the story of Newton and his little dog Diamond? One +day, when he was fifty years old, and had been hard at work more than +twenty years, studying the theory of Light, he went out of his chamber, +leaving his little dog asleep before the fire. On the table lay a heap of +manuscript papers, containing all the discoveries which Newton had made +during those twenty years. When his master was gone, up rose little +Diamond, jumped upon the table, and overthrew the lighted candle. The +papers immediately caught fire. + +Just as the destruction was completed, Newton opened the chamber-door, and +perceived that the labors of twenty years were reduced to a heap of ashes. +There stood little Diamond, the author of all the mischief. Almost any +other man would have sentenced the dog to immediate death. But Newton +patted him on the head with his usual kindness, although grief was at his +heart. + +"Oh, Diamond, Diamond," exclaimed he, "thou little knowest the mischief +thou hast done." + +This incident affected his health and spirits for some time afterwards; +but, from his conduct towards the little dog, you may judge what was the +sweetness of his temper. + +Newton lived to be a very old man, and acquired great renown, and was made +a Member of Parliament, and received the honor of knighthood from the +king. But he cared little for earthly fame and honors, and felt no pride +in the vastness of his knowledge. All that he had learned only made him +feel how little he knew in comparison to what remained to be known. + +"I seem to myself like a child," observed he, "playing on the sea-shore, +and picking up here and there a curious shell or a pretty pebble, while +the boundless ocean of Truth lies undiscovered before me." + +At last, in 1727, when he was fourscore and five years old, Sir Isaac +Newton died,—or rather he ceased to live on earth. We may be permitted to +believe that he is still searching out the infinite wisdom and goodness of +the Creator, as earnestly, and with even more success, than while his +spirit animated a mortal body. He has left a fame behind him, which will +be as endurable as if his name were written in letters of light, formed by +the stars upon the midnight sky. + + + +"I love to hear about mechanical contrivances—such as the water-clock and +the little windmill," remarked George. "I suppose if Sir Isaac Newton had +only thought of it, he might have found out the steam-engine, and +railroads, and all the other famous inventions that have come into use +since his day." + +"Very possibly he might," replied Mr. Temple; "and, no doubt, a great many +people would think it more useful to manufacture steam-engines, than to +search out the system of the universe. Other great astronomers, besides +Newton, have been endowed with mechanical genius. There was David +Rittenhouse, an American,—he made a perfect little water-mill, when he was +only seven or eight years old. But this sort of ingenuity is but a mere +trifle in comparison with the other talents of such men." + +"It must have been beautiful," said Edward, "to spend whole nights in a +high tower, as Newton did, gazing at the stars, and the comets, and the +meteors. But what would Newton have done, had he been blind? or if his +eyes had been no better than mine?" + +"Why, even then, my dear child," observed Mrs. Temple, "he would have +found out some way of enlightening his mind, and of elevating his soul. +But, come! little Emily is waiting to bid you good night. You must go to +sleep, and dream of seeing all our faces." + +"But how sad it will be, when I awake!" murmured Edward. + + + + +Chapter IV + + +In the course of the next day, the harmony of our little family was +disturbed by something like a quarrel between George and Edward. + +The former, though he loved his brother dearly, had found it quite too +great a sacrifice of his own enjoyments, to spend all his playtime in a +darkened chamber. Edward, on the other hand, was inclined to be despotic. +He felt as if his bandaged eyes entitled him to demand that everybody, who +enjoyed the blessing of sight, should contribute to his comfort and +amusement. He therefore insisted that George, instead of going out to play +at foot-ball, should join with himself and Emily in a game of questions +and answers. + +George resolutely refused, and ran out of the house. He did not revisit +Edward’s chamber till the evening, when he stole in, looking confused, yet +somewhat sullen, and sat down beside his father’s chair. It was evident, +by a motion of Edward’s head and a slight trembling of his lips, that he +was aware of George’s entrance, though his footsteps had been almost +inaudible. Emily, with her serious and earnest little face, looked from +one to the other, as if she longed to be a messenger of peace between +them. + +Mr. Temple, without seeming to notice any of these circumstances, began a +story. + + + +SAMUEL JOHNSON + + +BORN 1709. DIED 1784. + +"Sam," said Mr. Michael Johnson of Lichfield, one morning, "I am very +feeble and ailing to-day. You must go to Uttoxeter in my stead, and tend +the bookstall in the market-place there." + +This was spoken, above a hundred years ago, by an elderly man, who had +once been a thriving bookseller at Lichfield, in England. Being now in +reduced circumstances, he was forced to go, every market-day, and sell +books at a stall, in the neighboring village of Uttoxeter. + +His son, to whom Mr. Johnson spoke, was a great boy of very singular +aspect. He had an intelligent face; but it was seamed and distorted by a +scrofulous humor, which affected his eyes so badly, that sometimes he was +almost blind. Owing to the same cause, his head would often shake with a +tremulous motion, as if he were afflicted with the palsy. When Sam was an +infant, the famous Queen Anne had tried to cure him of this disease, by +laying her royal hands upon his head. But though the touch of a king or +Queen was supposed to be a certain remedy for scrofula, it produced no +good effect upon Sam Johnson. + +At the time which we speak of, the poor lad was not very well dressed, and +wore shoes from which his toes peeped out; for his old father had barely +the means of supporting his wife and children. But, poor as the family +were, young Sam Johnson had as much pride as any nobleman’s son in +England. The fact was, he felt conscious of uncommon sense and ability, +which, in his own opinion, entitled him to great respect from the world. +Perhaps he would have been glad, if grown people had treated him as +reverentially as his school-fellows did. Three of them were accustomed to +come for him, every morning; and while he sat upon the back of one, the +two others supported him on each side, and thus he rode to school in +triumph! + +Being a personage of so much importance, Sam could not bear the idea of +standing all day in Uttoxeter market, offering books to the rude and +ignorant country-people. Doubtless he felt the more reluctant on account +of his shabby clothes, and the disorder of his eyes, and the tremulous +motion of his head. + +When Mr. Michael Johnson spoke, Sam pouted, and made an indistinct +grumbling in his throat; then he looked his old father in the face, and +answered him loudly and deliberately. + +"Sir," said he, "I will not go to Uttoxeter market!" + +Mr. Johnson had seen a great deal of the lad’s obstinacy ever since his +birth; and while Sam was younger, the old gentleman had probably used the +rod, whenever occasion seemed to require. But he was now too feeble, and +too much out of spirits, to contend with this stubborn and +violent-tempered boy. He therefore gave up the point at once, and prepared +to go to Uttoxeter himself. + +"Well Sam," said Mr. Johnson, as he took his hat and staff, "If, for the +sake of your foolish pride, you can suffer your poor sick father to stand +all day in the noise and confusion of the market, when he ought to be in +his bed, I have no more to say. But you will think of this, Sam, when I am +dead and gone!" + +So the poor old man (perhaps with a tear in his eye, but certainly with +sorrow in his heart) set forth towards Uttoxeter. The gray-haired, feeble, +melancholy Michael Johnson! How sad a thing it was, that he should be +forced to go, in his sickness, and toil for the support of an ungrateful +son, who was too proud to do any thing for his father, or his mother, or +himself! Sam looked after Mr. Johnson, with a sullen countenance, till he +was out of sight. + +But when the old man’s figure, as he went stooping along the street, was +no more to be seen, the boy’s heart began to smite him. He had a vivid +imagination, and it tormented him with the image of his father, standing +in the market-place of Uttoxeter and offering his books to the noisy crowd +around him, Sam seemed to behold him, arranging his literary merchandise +upon the stall in such a way as was best calculated to attract notice. +Here was Addison’s Spectator, a long row of little volumes; here was +Pope’s translation of the Iliad and Odyssey; here were Dryden’s poems, or +those of Prior. Here, likewise, were Gulliver’s Travels, and a variety of +little gilt-covered children’s books, such as Tom Thumb, Jack the +Giant-queller, Mother Goose’s Melodies, and others which our +great-grandparents used to read in their childhood. And here were sermons +for the pious, and pamphlets for the politicians, and ballads, some merry +and some dismal ones, for the country people to sing. + +Sam, in imagination, saw his father offer these books, pamphlets, and +ballads, now to the rude yeomen, who perhaps could not read a word,—now to +the country squires, who cared for nothing but to hunt hares and +foxes,—now to the children, who chose to spend their coppers for +sugar-plums or gingerbread, rather than for picture-books. And if Mr. +Johnson should sell a book to man, woman, or child, it would cost him an +hour’s talk to get a profit of only sixpence. + +"My poor father!" thought Sam to himself. "How his head will ache, and how +heavy his heart will be! I am almost sorry that I did not do as he bade +me!" + +Then the boy went to his mother, who was busy about the house. She did not +know of what had passed between Mr. Johnson and Sam. + +"Mother," said he, "did you think father seemed very ill to-day?" + +"Yes, Sam," answered his mother, turning with a flushed face from the +fire, where she was cooking their scanty dinner. "Your father did look +very ill; and it is a pity he did not send you to Uttoxeter in his stead. +You are a great boy now, and would rejoice, I am sure, to do something for +your poor father, who has done so much for you." + +The lad made no reply. But again his imagination set to work, and conjured +up another picture of poor Michael Johnson. He was standing in the hot +sunshine of the market-place, and looking so weary, sick, and +disconsolate, that the eyes of all the crowd were drawn to him. "Had this +old man no son," the people would say among themselves, "who might have +taken his place at the bookstall, while the father kept his bed?" And +perhaps—but this was a terrible thought for Sam!—perhaps his father would +faint away, and fall down in the market-place, with his gray hair in the +dust, and his venerable face as deathlike as that of a corpse. And there +would be the bystanders gazing earnestly at Mr. Johnson, and whispering, +"Is he dead? Is he dead?" + +And Sam shuddered, as he repeated to himself: "Is he dead?" + +"Oh, I have been a cruel son!" thought he, within his own heart. "God +forgive me! God forgive me!" + +But God could not yet forgive him; for he was not truly penitent. Had he +been so, he would have hastened away that very moment to Uttoxeter, and +have fallen at his father’s feet, even in the midst of the crowded +market-place. There he would have confessed his fault, and besought Mr. +Johnson to go home, and leave the rest of the day’s work to him. But such +was Sam’s pride and natural stubbornness, that he could not bring himself +to this humiliation. Yet he ought to have done so, for his own sake, and +for his father’s sake, and for God’s sake. + +After sunset, old Michael Johnson came slowly home, and sat down in his +customary chair. He said nothing to Sam; nor do I know that a single word +ever passed between them, on the subject of the son’s disobedience. In a +few years, his father died and left Sam to fight his way through the world +by himself. It would make our story much too long were I to tell you even +a few of the remarkable events of Sam’s life. Moreover, there is the less +need of this, because many books have been written about that poor boy, +and the fame that he acquired, and all that he did or talked of doing, +after he came to be a man. + +But one thing I must not neglect to say. From his boyhood upward, until +the latest day of his life, he never forgot the story of Uttoxeter market. +Often when he was a scholar of the University of Oxford, or master of an +Academy at Edial, or a writer for the London booksellers,—in all his +poverty and toil, and in all his success,—while he was walking the streets +without a shilling to buy food, or when the greatest men of England were +proud to feast him at their table,—still that heavy and remorseful thought +came back to him:—"I was cruel to my poor father in his illness!" Many and +many a time, awake or in his dreams, he seemed to see old Michael Johnson, +standing in the dust and confusion of the market-place, and pressing his +withered hand to his forehead as if it ached. + +Alas! my dear children, it is a sad thing to have such a thought as this +to bear us company through life. + + + +Though the story was but half finished, yet, as it was longer than usual, +Mr. Temple here made a short pause. He perceived that Emily was in tears, +and Edward turned his half-veiled face towards the speaker, with an air of +great earnestness and interest. As for George he had withdrawn into the +dusky shadow behind his father’s chair. + + + + +Chapter V + + +In a few moments Mr. Temple resumed the story, as follows: + + + +SAMUEL JOHNSON—CONTINUED. + + +Well, my children, fifty years had passed away since young Sam Johnson had +shown himself so hard-hearted towards his father. It was now market-day in +the village of Uttoxeter. + +In the street of the village, you might see cattle-dealers with cows and +oxen for sale, and pig-drovers, with herds of squeaking swine, and +farmers, with cart-loads of cabbages, turnips, onions, and all other +produce of the soil. Now and then a farmer’s red-faced wife trotted along +on horseback, with butter and cheese in two large panniers. The people of +the village, with country squires and other visitors from the +neighborhood, walked hither and thither, trading, jesting, quarrelling, +and making just such a bustle as their fathers and grandfathers had made +half a century before. + +In one part of the street, there was a puppet-show, with a ridiculous +Merry-Andrew, who kept both grown people and children in a roar of +laughter. On the opposite side was the old stone church of Uttoxeter, with +ivy climbing up its walls, and partly obscuring its Gothic windows. + +There was a clock in the gray tower of the ancient church; and the hands +on the dial-plate had now almost reached the hour of noon. At this busiest +hour of the market, a strange old gentleman was seen making his way among +the crowd. He was very tall and bulky, and wore a brown coat and small +clothes, with black worsted stockings and buckled shoes. On his head was a +three-cornered hat, beneath which a bushy gray wig thrust itself out, all +in disorder. The old gentleman elbowed the people aside, and forced his +way through the midst of them with a singular kind of gait, rolling his +body hither and thither, so that he needed twice as much room as any other +person there. + +"Make way, sir!" he would cry out, in a loud, harsh voice, when somebody +happened to interrupt his progress.—"Sir, you intrude your person into the +public thoroughfare!" + +"What a queer old fellow this is!" muttered the people among themselves, +hardly knowing whether to laugh or to be angry. + +But, when they looked into the venerable stranger’s face, not the most +thoughtless among them dared to offer him the least impertinence. Though +his features were scarred and distorted with the scrofula, and though his +eyes were dim and bleared, yet there was something of authority and wisdom +in his look, which impressed them all with awe. So they stood aside to let +him pass; and the old gentleman made his way across the market-place, and +paused near the corner of the ivy-mantled church. Just as he reached it, +the clock struck twelve. + +On the very spot of ground, where the stranger now stood, some aged people +remembered that old Michael Johnson had formerly kept his bookstall. The +little children, who had once bought picture-books of him, were +grandfathers now. + +"Yes; here is the very spot!" muttered the old gentleman to himself. + +There this unknown personage took his stand, and removed the +three-cornered hat from his head. It was the busiest hour of the day. What +with the hum of human voices, the lowing of cattle, the squeaking of pigs, +and the laughter caused by the Merry-Andrew, the market-place was in very +great confusion. But the stranger seemed not to notice it, any more than +if the silence of a desert were around him. He was wrapt in his own +thoughts. Sometimes he raised his furrowed brow to heaven, as if in +prayer; sometimes he bent his head, as if an insupportable weight of +sorrow were upon him. It increased the awfulness of his aspect that there +was a motion of his head, and an almost continual tremor throughout his +frame, with singular twitchings and contortions of his features. + +The hot sun blazed upon his unprotected head; but he seemed not to feel +its fervor. A dark cloud swept across the sky, and rain-drops pattered +into the market-place; but the stranger heeded not the shower. The people +began to gaze at the mysterious old gentleman, with superstitious fear and +wonder. Who could he be? Whence did he come? Wherefore was he standing +bare-headed in the market-place? Even the school-boys left the +Merry-Andrew, and came to gaze, with wide open eyes, at this tall, +strange-looking old man. + +There was a cattle-drover in the village, who had recently made a journey +to the Smithfield market, in London. No sooner had this man thrust his way +through the throng, and taken a look at the unknown personage, than he +whispered to one of his acquaintances: + +"I say, neighbor Hutchins, would ye like to know who this old gentleman +is?" + +"Ay, that I would," replied neighbor Hutchins; "for a queerer chap I never +saw in my life! Somehow, it makes me feel small to look at him. He’s more +than a common man." + +"You may well say so," answered the cattle-drover. "Why, that’s the famous +Doctor Samuel Johnson, who, they say, is the greatest and learnedest man +in England. I saw him in London Streets, walking with one Mr. Boswell." + +Yes; the poor boy—the friendless Sam—with, whom we began our story, had +become the famous Doctor Samuel Johnson! He was universally acknowledged +as the wisest man and greatest writer in all England. He had given shape +and permanence to his native language, by his Dictionary. Thousands upon +thousands of people had read his Idler, his Rambler, and his Rasselas. +Noble and wealthy men, and beautiful ladies, deemed it their highest +privilege to be his companions. Even the king of Great Britain had sought +his acquaintance, and told him what an honor he considered it, that such a +man had been born in his dominions. He was now at the summit of literary +renown. + +But all his fame could not extinguish the bitter remembrance, which had +tormented him through life. Never, never, had he forgotten his father’s +sorrowful and upbraiding look. Never—though the old man’s troubles had +been over so many years—had he forgiven himself for inflicting such a pang +upon his heart. And now, in his old age, he had come hither to do penance, +by standing at noon-day in the market-place of Uttoxeter, on the very spot +where Michael Johnson had once kept his bookstall. The aged and +illustrious man had done what the poor boy refused to do. By thus +expressing his deep repentance and humiliation of heart, he hoped to gain +peace of conscience, and the forgiveness of God. + +My dear children, if you have grieved—I will not say, your parents—but, if +you have grieved the heart of any human being, who has a claim upon your +love, then think of Samuel Johnson’s penance! Will it not be better to +redeem the error now, than to endure the agony of remorse for fifty years? +Would you not rather say to a brother—"I have erred! Forgive me!"—than +perhaps to go hereafter, and shed bitter tears upon his grave? + + + +Hardly was the story concluded, when George hastily arose, and Edward +likewise, stretching forth his hands into the darkness that surrounded +him, to find his brother. Both accused themselves of unkindness; each +besought the other’s forgiveness; and having, done so, the trouble of +their hearts vanished away like a dream. + +"I am glad! I am so glad!" said Emily, in a low, earnest voice. "Now I +shall sleep quietly to-night." + +"My sweet child," thought Mrs. Temple, as she kissed her, "mayest thou +never know how much strife there is on earth! It would cost thee many a +night’s rest." + + + + +Chapter VI + + +About this period, Mr. Temple found it necessary to take a journey, which +interrupted the series of Biographical Stories for several evenings. In +the interval, Edward practised various methods of employing and amusing +his mind. + +Sometimes he meditated upon beautiful objects which he had formerly seen, +until the intensity of his recollection seemed to restore him the gift of +sight, and place every thing anew before his eyes. Sometimes he repeated +verses of poetry, which he did not know to be in his memory, until he +found them there, just at the time of need. Sometimes he attempted to +solve arithmetical questions, which had perplexed him while at school. + +Then, with his mother’s assistance, he learned the letters of the +string-alphabet, which is used in some of the Institutions for the Blind, +in Europe. When one of his friends gave him a leaf of Saint Mark’s Gospel, +printed in embossed characters, he endeavored to read it by passing his +fingers over the letters, as blind children do. + +His brother George was now very kind, and spent so much time in the +darkened chamber, that Edward often insisted upon his going out to play. +George told him all about the affairs at school, and related many amusing +incidents that happened among his comrades, and informed him what sports +were now in fashion, and whose kite soared the highest, and whose little +ship sailed fleetest on the Frog Pond. As for Emily, she repeated stories +which she had learned from a new book, called THE FLOWER PEOPLE, in which +the snow-drops, the violets, the columbines, the roses, and all that +lovely tribe, are represented as telling their secrets to a little girl. +The flowers talked sweetly, as flowers should; and Edward almost fancied +that he could behold their bloom and smell their fragrant breath. + +Thus, in one way or another, the dark days of Edward’s confinement passed +not unhappily. In due time, his father returned; and the next evening, +when the family were assembled, he began a story. + +"I must first observe, children," said he, "that some writers deny the +truth of the incident which I am about to relate to you. There certainly +is but little evidence in favor of it. Other respectable writers, however, +tell it for a fact; and, at all events, it is an interesting story, and +has an excellent moral." + +So Mr. Temple proceeded to talk about the early days of + + + +OLIVER CROMWELL + + +BORN 1599. DIED 1658. + +Not long after King James the First took the place of Queen Elizabeth on +the throne of England, there lived an English knight at a place called +Hinchinbrooke. His name was Sir Oliver Cromwell. He spent his life, I +suppose, pretty much like other English knights and squires in those days, +hunting hares and foxes, and drinking large quantities of ale and wine. +The old house in which he dwelt, had been occupied by his ancestors before +him, for a good many years. In it there was a great hall, hung round with +coats of arms, and helmets, cuirasses and swords which his forefathers had +used in battle, and with horns of deer and tails of foxes, which they or +Sir Oliver himself had killed in the chase. + +This Sir Oliver Cromwell had a nephew, who had been called Oliver, after +himself, but who was generally known in the family by the name of little +Noll. His father was a younger brother of Sir Oliver. The child was often +sent to visit his uncle, who probably found him a troublesome little +fellow to take care of. He was forever in mischief, and always running +into some danger or other from which he seemed to escape only by miracle. + +Even while he was an infant in the cradle a strange accident had befallen +him. A huge ape which was kept in the family, snatched up little Noll in +his forepaws and clambered with him to the roof of the house. There this +ugly beast sat grinning at the affrighted spectators, as if he had done +the most praiseworthy thing imaginable. Fortunately, however, he brought +the child safe down again; and the event was afterwards considered an omen +that Noll would reach a very elevated station in the world. + +One morning, when Noll was five or six years old, a royal messenger +arrived at Hinchinbrooke, with tidings that King James was coming to dine +with Sir Oliver Cromwell. This was a high honor to be sure, but a very +great trouble; for all the lords and ladies, knights, squires, guards, and +yeomen, who waited on the king, were to be feasted as well as himself; and +more provisions would be eaten, and more wine drunk, in that one day, than +generally in a month. However, Sir Oliver expressed much thankfulness for +the king’s intended visit, and ordered his butler and cook to make the +best preparations in their power. So a great fire was kindled in the +kitchen; and the neighbors knew by the smoke which poured out of the +chimney, that boiling, baking, stewing, roasting, and frying, were going +on merrily. + +By and by the sound of trumpets was heard, approaching nearer and nearer; +and a heavy, old-fashioned coach, surrounded by guards on horseback, drove +up to the house. Sir Oliver, with his hat in his hand, stood at the gate +to receive the king. His Majesty was dressed in a suit of green, not very +new; he had a feather in his hat, and a triple ruff round his neck; and +over his shoulder was slung a hunting horn, instead of a sword. +Altogether, he had not the most dignified aspect in the world; but the +spectators gazed at him as if there was something superhuman and divine in +his person. They even shaded their eyes with their hands, as if they were +dazzled by the glory of his countenance. + +"How are ye, man?" cried King James, speaking in a Scotch accent; for +Scotland was his native country. "By my crown, Sir Oliver, but I am glad +to see ye!" + +The good knight thanked the king, at the same time kneeling down, while +his Majesty alighted. When King James stood on the ground, he directed Sir +Oliver’s attention to a little boy, who had come with him in the coach. He +was six or seven years old, and wore a hat and feather, and was more +richly dressed than the king himself. Though by no means an ill-looking +child; he seemed shy, or even sulky; and his cheeks were rather pale, as +if he had been kept moping within doors, instead of being sent out to play +in the sun and wind. + +"I have brought my son Charlie to see ye," said the king. "I hope, Sir +Oliver, ye have a son of your own, to be his playmate?" + +Sir Oliver Cromwell made a reverential bow to the little prince, whom one +of the attendants had now taken out of the coach. It was wonderful to see +how all the spectators, even the aged men, with their gray beards, humbled +themselves before this child. They bent their bodies till their beards +almost swept the dust. They looked as if they were ready to kneel down and +worship him. + +The poor little prince! From his earliest infancy not a soul had dared to +contradict him; everybody around him had acted as if he were a superior +being; so that, of course, he had imbibed the same opinion of himself. He +naturally supposed that the whole kingdom of Great Britain and all its +inhabitants, had been created solely for his benefit and amusement. This +was a sad mistake; and it cost him dear enough after he had ascended his +father’s throne. + +"What a noble little prince he is!" exclaimed Sir Oliver, lifting his +hands in admiration. "No, please your Majesty, I have no son to be the +playmate of his Royal Highness; but there is a nephew of mine, somewhere +about the house. He is near the prince’s age, and will be but too happy to +wait upon his Royal Highness." + +"Send for him, man! send for him!" said the king. + +But, as it happened, there was no need of sending for Master Noll. While +King James was speaking, a rugged, bold-faced, sturdy little urchin thrust +himself through the throng of courtiers and attendants, and greeted the +prince with a broad stare. His doublet and hose (which had been put on new +and clean in honor of the king’s visit) were already soiled and torn with +the rough play in which he had spent the morning. He looked no more +abashed than if King James were his uncle, and the prince one of his +customary playfellows. + +This was little Noll himself. + +"Here, please your Majesty, is my nephew," said sir Oliver, somewhat +ashamed of Noll’s appearance and demeanor. "Oliver, make your obeisance to +the king’s Majesty!" + +The boy made a pretty respectful obeisance to the king; for, in those +days, children were taught to pay reverence to their elders. King James, +who prided himself greatly on his scholarship, asked Noll a few questions +in the Latin Grammar, and then introduced him to his son. The little +prince in a very grave and dignified manner, extended his hand, not for +Noll to shake, but that he might kneel down and kiss it. + +"Nephew," said Sir Oliver, "pay your duty to the prince." + +"I owe him no duty," cried Noll, thrusting aside the prince’s hand, with a +rude laugh. "Why should I kiss that boy’s hand?" + +All the courtiers were amazed and confounded, and Sir Oliver the most of +all. But the king laughed heartily, saying that little Noll had a stubborn +English spirit, and that it was well for his son to learn betimes what +sort of a people he was to rule over. + +So King James and his train entered the house; and the prince, with Noll +and some other children, was sent to play in a separate room while his +Majesty was at dinner. The young people soon became acquainted; for boys, +whether the sons of monarchs or of peasants, all like play, and are +pleased with one another’s society. What games they diverted themselves +with, I cannot tell. Perhaps they played at ball—perhaps at blindman’s +buff—perhaps at leap-frog—perhaps at prison-bars. Such games have been in +use for hundreds of years; and princes as well as poor children have spent +some of their happiest hours in playing at them. + +Meanwhile, King James and his nobles were feasting with Sir Oliver, in the +great hall. The king sat in a gilded chair, under a canopy, at the head of +a long table. Whenever any of the company addressed him, it was with the +deepest reverence. If the attendants offered him wine, or the various +delicacies of the festival, it was upon their bended knees. You would have +thought, by these tokens of worship, that the monarch was a supernatural +being; only he seemed to have quite as much need of those vulgar matters, +food and drink, as any other person at the table. But fate had ordained +that good King James should not finish his dinner in peace. + +All of a sudden, there arose a terrible uproar in the room where the +children were at play. Angry shouts and shrill cries of alarm were mixed +up together; while the voices of elder persons were likewise heard, trying +to restore order among the children. The king, and everybody else at +table, looked aghast; for perhaps the tumult made them think that a +general rebellion had broken out. + +"Mercy on us!" muttered Sir Oliver; "that graceless nephew of mine is in +some mischief or other. The naughty little whelp!" + +Getting up from table, he ran to see what was the matter, followed by many +of the guests, and the king among them. They all crowded to the door of +the play-room. + +On looking in, they beheld the little Prince Charles, with his rich dress +all torn, and covered with the dust of the floor. His royal blood was +streaming from his nose in great abundance. He gazed at Noll with a +mixture of rage and affright, and at the same time a puzzled expression, +as if he could not understand how any mortal boy should dare to give him a +beating. As for Noll, there stood his sturdy little figure, bold as a +lion, looking as if he were ready to fight not only the prince, but the +king and kingdom too. + +"You little villain!" cried his uncle. "What have you been about? Down on +your knees, this instant, and ask the prince’s pardon. How dare you lay +your hands on the king’s Majesty’s royal son?" + +"He struck me first," grumbled the valiant little Noll; "and I’ve only +given him his due." + +Sir Oliver and the guests lifted up their hands in astonishment and +horror. No punishment seemed severe enough for this wicked little varlet, +who had dared to resent a blow from the king’s own son. Some of the +courtiers were of opinion that Noll should be sent prisoner to the Tower +of London, and brought to trial for high treason. Others, in their great +zeal for the king’s service, were about to lay hands on the boy, and +chastise him in the royal presence. + +But King James, who sometimes showed a good deal of sagacity, ordered them +to desist. + +"Thou art a bold boy," said he, looking fixedly at little Noll; "and, if +thou live to be a man, my son Charlie would do wisely to be friends with +thee." + +"I never will!" cried the little prince, stamping his foot. + +"Peace, Charlie, peace!" said the king; then addressing Sir Oliver and the +attendants, "Harm not the urchin; for he has taught my son a good lesson, +if Heaven do but give him grace to profit by it. Hereafter, should he be +tempted to tyrannize over the stubborn race of Englishmen, let him +remember little Noll Cromwell, and his own bloody nose!" + +So the king finished his dinner and departed; and, for many a long year, +the childish quarrel between Prince Charles and Noll Cromwell was +forgotten. The prince, indeed, might have lived a happier life, and have +met a more peaceful death, had he remembered that quarrel, and the moral +which his father drew from it. But, when old King James was dead, and +Charles sat upon his throne, he seemed to forget that he was but a man, +and that his meanest subjects were men as well as he. He wished to have +the property and lives of the people of England entirely at his own +disposal. But the Puritans, and all who loved liberty, rose against him, +and beat him in many battles, and pulled him down from his throne. + +Throughout this war between the king and nobles on one side, and the +people of England on the other, there was a famous leader, who did more +towards the ruin of royal authority, than all the rest. The contest seemed +like a wrestling-match between King Charles and this strong man. And the +king was overthrown. + +When the discrowned monarch was brought to trial, that warlike leader sat +in the judgment-hall. Many judges were present, besides himself; but he +alone had the power to save King Charles, or to doom him to the scaffold. +After sentence was pronounced, this victorious general was entreated by +his own children, on their knees, to rescue his Majesty from death. + +"No!" said he sternly. "Better that one man should perish, than that the +whole country should be ruined for his sake. It is resolved that he shall +die!" + +When Charles, no longer a king, was led to the scaffold, his great enemy +stood at a window of the royal palace of Whitehall. He beheld the poor +victim of pride, and an evil education, and misused power, as he laid his +head upon the block. He looked on, with a steadfast gaze, while a +black-veiled executioner lifted the fatal axe, and smote off that anointed +head at a single blow. + +"It is a righteous deed," perhaps he said to himself. "Now Englishmen may +enjoy their rights." + +At night, when the body of Charles was laid in the coffin, in a gloomy +chamber, the general entered, lighting himself with a torch. Its gleam +showed that he was now growing old; his visage was scarred with the many +battles in which he had led the van; his brow was wrinkled with care, and +with the continual exercise of stern authority. Probably there was not a +single trait, either of aspect or manner, that belonged to the little +Noll, who had battled so stoutly with Prince Charles. Yet this was he! + +He lifted the coffin-lid, and caused the light of his torch to fall upon +the dead monarch’s face. Then, probably, his mind went back over all the +marvellous events, that had brought the hereditary king of England to this +dishonored coffin, and had raised himself, an humble individual, to the +possession of kingly power. He was a king, though without the empty title, +or the glittering crown. + +"Why was it," said Cromwell to himself—or might have said—as he gazed at +the pale features in the coffin,—"Why was it, that this great king fell, +and that poor Noll Cromwell has gained all the power of the realm?" + +And, indeed, why was it? + +King Charles had fallen, because, in his manhood the same as when a child, +he disdained to feel that every human creature was his brother. He deemed +himself a superior being, and fancied that his subjects were created only +for a king to rule over. And Cromwell rose, because, in spite of his many +faults, he mainly fought for the rights and freedom of his fellow-men; and +therefore the poor and the oppressed all lent their strength to him. + + + +"Dear father, how I should hate to be a king!" exclaimed Edward. + +"And would you like to be a Cromwell?" inquired his father. + +"I should like it well," replied George, "only I would not have put the +poor old king to death. I would have sent him out of the kingdom, or +perhaps have allowed him to live in a small house, near the gate of the +royal palace. It was too severe, to cut off his head." + +"Kings are in such an unfortunate position," said Mr. Temple, "that they +must either be almost deified by their subjects, or else be dethroned and +beheaded. In either case it is a pitiable lot." + +"Oh, I had rather be blind than be a king!" said Edward. + +"Well, my dear Edward," observed his mother, with a smile, "I am glad you +are convinced that your own lot is not the hardest in the world." + + + + +Chapter VII + + +It was a pleasant sight (for those who had eyes) to see how patiently the +blinded little boy now submitted to what he had at first deemed an +intolerable calamity. The beneficent Creator has not allowed our comfort +to depend on the enjoyment of any single sense. Though he has made the +world so very beautiful, yet it is possible to be happy without ever +beholding the blue sky, or the green and flowery earth, or the kind faces +of those whom we love. Thus it appears that all the external beauty of the +universe is a free gift from God, over and above what is necessary to our +comfort. How grateful, then, should we be to that Divine Benevolence, +which showers even superfluous bounties upon us! + +One truth, therefore, which Edward’s blindness had taught him, was, that +his mind and soul could dispense with the assistance of his eyes. +Doubtless, however, he would have found this lesson far more difficult to +learn, had it not been for the affection of those around him. His parents, +and George and Emily, aided him to bear his misfortune; if possible, they +would have lent him their own eyes. And this, too, was a good lesson for +him. It taught him how dependent on one another God has ordained us to be; +insomuch that all the necessities of mankind should incite them to mutual +love. + +So Edward loved his friends, and perhaps all the world, better than he +ever did before. And he felt grateful towards his father for spending the +evenings in telling him stories—more grateful, probably, than any of my +little readers will feel towards me for so carefully writing those same +stories down. + +"Come, dear father," said he, the next evening, "now tell us all about +some other little boy, who was destined to be a famous man." + +"How would you like a story of a Boston boy?" asked his father. + +"Oh, pray let us have it!" cried George eagerly. "It will be all the +better if he has been to our schools, and has coasted on the Common, and +sailed boats in the Frog Pond. I shall feel acquainted with him then." + +"Well, then," said Mr. Temple, "I will introduce you to a Boston boy, whom +all the world became acquainted with, after he grew to be a man." + +The story was as follows:— + + + +BENJAMIN FRANKLIN + + +BORN 1706. DIED 1790. + +In the year 1716, or about that period, a boy used to be seen in the +streets of Boston, who was known among his schoolfellows and playmates by +the name of Ben Franklin. Ben was born in 1706; so that he was now about +ten years old. His father, who had come over from England, was a +soap-boiler and tallow-chandler, and resided in Milk Street, not far from +the old South Church. + +Ben was a bright boy at his book, and even a brighter one when at play +with his comrades. He had some remarkable qualities which always seemed to +give him the lead, whether at sport or in more serious matters. I might +tell you a number of amusing anecdotes about him. You are acquainted, I +suppose, with his famous story of the WHISTLE, and how he bought it with a +whole pocketful of coppers, and afterwards repented of his bargain. But +Ben had grown a great boy since those days, and had gained wisdom by +experience; for it was one of his peculiarities, that no incident ever +happened to him without teaching him some valuable lesson. Thus he +generally profited more by his misfortunes, than many people do by the +most favorable events that could befall them. + +Ben’s face was already pretty well known to the inhabitants of Boston. The +selectmen, and other people of note, often used to visit his father, for +the sake of talking about the affairs of the town or province. Mr. +Franklin was considered a person of great wisdom and integrity, and was +respected by all who knew him, although he supported his family by the +humble trade of boiling soap, and making tallow-candles. + +While his father and the visitors were holding deep consultations about +public affairs, little Ben would sit on his stool in a corner, listening +with the greatest interest, as if he understood every word. Indeed, his +features were so full of intelligence, that there could be but little +doubt, not only that he understood what was said, but that he could have +expressed some very sagacious opinions out of his own mind. But, in those +days, boys were expected to be silent in the presence of their elders. +However, Ben Franklin was looked upon as a very promising lad, who would +talk and act wisely by and by. + +"Neighbor Franklin," his father’s friends would sometimes say, "you ought +to send this boy to college and make a minister of him." + +"I have often thought of it," his father would reply; "and my brother +Benjamin promises to give him a great many volumes of manuscript sermons +in case he should be educated for the church. But I have a large family to +support, and cannot afford the expense." + +In fact, Mr. Franklin found it so difficult to provide bread for his +family, that, when the boy was ten years old, it became necessary to take +him from school. Ben was then employed in cutting candlewicks into equal +lengths, and filling the moulds with tallow; and many families in Boston +spent their evenings by the light of the candles which he had helped to +make. Thus, you see, in his early days, as well as in his manhood his +labors contributed to throw light upon dark matters. + +Busy as his life now was, Ben still found time to keep company with his +former schoolfellows. He and the other boys were very fond of fishing, and +spent any of their leisure hours on the margin of the mill-pond, catching +flounders, perch, eels, and tom-cod, which came up thither with the tide. +The place where they fished is now, probably, covered with stone-pavements +and brick buildings, and thronged with people, and with vehicles of all +kinds. But, at that period, it was a marshy spot on the outskirts of the +town, where gulls flitted and screamed overhead, and salt meadow-grass +grew under foot. On the edge of the water there was a deep bed of clay, in +which the boys were forced to stand, while they caught their fish. Here +they dabbled in mud and mire like a flock of ducks. + +"This is very uncomfortable," said Ben Franklin one day to his comrades, +while they were standing mid-leg deep in the quagmire. + +"So it is," said the other boys. "What a pity we have no better place to +stand!" + +If it had not been for Ben, nothing more would have been done or said +about the matter. But it was not in his nature to be sensible of an +inconvenience, without using his best efforts to find a remedy. So, as he +and his comrades were returning from the water-side, Ben suddenly threw +down his string of fish with a very determined air: + +"Boys," cried he, "I have thought of a scheme, which will be greatly for +our benefit, and for the public benefit!" + +It was queer enough, to be sure, to hear this little chap—this +rosy-cheeked, ten-year-old boy—talking about schemes for the public +benefit! Nevertheless, his companions were ready to listen, being assured +that Ben’s scheme, whatever it was, would be well worth their attention. +They remembered how sagaciously he had conducted all their enterprises, +ever since he had been old enough to wear small-clothes. + +They remembered, too, his wonderful contrivance of sailing across the +mill-pond by lying flat on his back, in the water, and allowing himself to +be drawn along by a paper-kite. If Ben could do that, he might certainly +do any thing. + +"What is your scheme, Ben?—what is it?" cried they all. + +It so happened that they had now come to a spot of ground where a new +house was to be built. Scattered round about lay a great many large +stones, which were to be used for the cellar and foundation. Ben mounted +upon the highest of these stones, so that he might speak with the more +authority. + +"You know, lads," said he, "what a plague it is, to be forced to stand in +the quagmire yonder—over shoes and stockings (if we wear any) in mud and +water. See! I am bedaubed to the knees of my small-clothes, and you are +all in the same pickle. Unless we can find some remedy for this evil, our +fishing-business must be entirely given up. And, surely, this would be a +terrible misfortune!" + +"That it would!—that it would!" said his comrades, sorrowfully. + +"Now I propose," continued Master Benjamin, "that we build a wharf, for +the purpose of carrying on our fisheries. You see these stones. The +workmen mean to use them for the underpinning of a house; but that would +be for only one man’s advantage. My plan is to take these same stones, and +carry them to the edge of the water and build a wharf with them. This will +not only enable us to carry on the fishing business with comfort, and to +better advantage, but it will likewise be a great convenience to boats +passing up and down the stream. Thus, instead of one man, fifty, or a +hundred, or a thousand, besides ourselves, may be benefited by these +stones. What say you, lads?—shall we build the wharf?" + +Ben’s proposal was received with one of those uproarious shouts, wherewith +boys usually express their delight at whatever completely suits their +views. Nobody thought of questioning the right and justice of building a +wharf, with stones that belonged to another person. + +"Hurrah, hurrah!" shouted they. "Let’s set about it!" + +It was agreed that they should all be on the spot, that evening, and +commence their grand public enterprise by moonlight. Accordingly, at the +appointed time, the whole gang of youthful laborers assembled, and eagerly +began to remove the stones. They had not calculated how much toil would be +requisite, in this important part of their undertaking. The very first +stone which they laid hold of, proved so heavy, that it almost seemed to +be fastened to the ground. Nothing but Ben Franklin’s cheerful and +resolute spirit could have induced them to persevere. + +Ben, as might be expected, was the soul of the enterprise. By his +mechanical genius, he contrived methods to lighten the labor of +transporting the stones; so that one boy, under his directions, would +perform as much as half a dozen, if left to themselves. Whenever their +spirits flagged, he had some joke ready, which seemed to renew their +strength by setting them all into a roar of laughter. And when, after an +hour or two of hard work, the stones were transported to the water-side, +Ben Franklin was the engineer, to superintend the construction of the +wharf. + +The boys, like a colony of ants, performed a great deal of labor by their +multitude, though the individual strength of each could have accomplished +but little. Finally, just as the moon sank below the horizon, the great +work was finished. + +"Now, boys," cried Ben, "let’s give three cheers, and go home to bed. +To-morrow, we may catch fish at our ease!" "Hurrah! hurrah! hurrah!" +shouted his comrades. + +Then they all went home, in such an ecstasy of delight that they could +hardly get a wink of sleep. + +The story was not yet finished; but George’s impatience caused him to +interrupt it. + +"How I wish that I could have helped to build that wharf!" exclaimed he. +"It must have been glorious fun. Ben Franklin for ever, say I!" + +"It was a very pretty piece of work," said Mr. Temple. "But wait till you +hear the end of the story." + +"Father," inquired Edward, "whereabouts in Boston was the mill-pond, on +which Ben built his wharf?" + +"I do not exactly know," answered Mr. Temple; "but I suppose it to have +been on the northern verge of the town, in the vicinity of what are now +called Merrimack and Charlestown streets. That thronged portion of the +city was once a marsh. Some of it, in fact, was covered with water." + + + + +Chapter VIII + + +As the children had no more questions to ask, Mr. Temple proceeded to +relate what consequences ensued from the building of Ben Franklin’s wharf. + + + +BENJAMIN FRANKLIN—CONTINUED + + +In the morning, when the early sunbeams were gleaming on the steeples and +roofs of the town, and gilding the water that surrounded it, the masons +came, rubbing their eyes, to begin their work at the foundation of the new +house. But, on reaching the spot, they rubbed their eyes so much the +harder. What had become of their heap of stones! + +"Why, Sam," said one to another, in great perplexity, "here’s been some +witchcraft at work, while we were asleep. The stones must have flown away +through the air!" + +"More likely they have been stolen!" answered Sam. + +"But who on earth would think of stealing a heap of stones?" cried a +third. "Could a man carry them away in his pocket?" + +The master-mason, who was a gruff kind of man, stood scratching his head, +and said nothing, at first. But, looking carefully on the ground, he +discerned innumerable tracks of little feet, some with shoes, and some +barefoot. Following these tracks with his eye, he saw that they formed a +beaten path towards the water-side. + +"Ah, I see what the mischief is," said he, nodding his head. "Those little +rascals, the boys! they have stolen our stones to build a wharf with!" + +The masons immediately went to examine the new structure. And to say the +truth, it was well worth looking at, so neatly, and with such admirable +skill, had it been planned and finished. The stones were put together so +securely, that there was no danger of their being loosened by the tide, +however swiftly it might sweep along. There was a broad and safe platform +to stand upon, whence the little fishermen might cast their lines into +deep water, and draw up fish in abundance. Indeed, it almost seemed as if +Ben and his comrades might be forgiven for taking the stones, because they +had done their job in such a workmanlike manner. + +"The chaps, that built this wharf, understood their business pretty well," +said one of the masons. "I should not be ashamed of such a piece of work +myself." + +But the master-mason did not seem to enjoy the joke. He was one of those +unreasonable people, who care a great deal more for their own rights and +privileges, than for the convenience of all the rest of the world. + +"Sam," said he, more gruffly than usual, "go call a constable." + +So Sam called a constable, and inquiries were set on foot to discover the +perpetrators of the theft. In the course of the day, warrants were issued, +with the signature of a Justice of the Peace, to take the bodies of +Benjamin Franklin and other evil-disposed persons, who had stolen a heap +of stones. If the owner of the stolen property had not been more merciful +than the master-mason, it might have gone hard with our friend Benjamin +and his fellow-laborers. But, luckily for them, the gentleman had a +respect for Ben’s father, and moreover, was amused with the spirit of the +whole affair. He therefore let the culprits off pretty easily. + +But, when the constables were dismissed, the poor boys had to go through +another trial, and receive sentence, and suffer execution too, from their +own fathers. Many a rod I grieve to say, was worn to the stump, on that +unlucky night. + +As for Ben, he was less afraid of a whipping than of his father’s +disapprobation. Mr. Franklin, as I have mentioned before, was a sagacious +man, and also an inflexibly upright one. He had read much, for a person in +his rank of life, and had pondered upon the ways of the world, until he +had gained more wisdom than a whole library of books could have taught +him. Ben had a greater reverence for his father, than for any other person +in the world, as well on account of his spotless integrity, as of his +practical sense and deep views of things. + +Consequently, after being released from the clutches of the law, Ben came +into his father’s presence, with no small perturbation of mind. + +"Benjamin, come hither," began Mr. Franklin, in his customary solemn and +weighty tone. + +The boy approached, and stood before his father’s chair, waiting +reverently to hear what judgment this good man would pass upon his late +offence. He felt that now the right and wrong of the whole matter would be +made to appear. + +"Benjamin," said his father, "what could induce you to take property which +did not belong to you?" + +"Why, father," replied Ben, hanging his head, at first, but then lifting +his eyes to Mr. Franklin’s face, "if it had been merely for my own +benefit, I never should have dreamed of it. But I knew that the wharf +would be a public convenience. If the owner of the stones should build a +house with them, nobody will enjoy any advantage except himself. Now, I +made use of them in a way that was for the advantage of many persons. I +thought it right to aim at doing good to the greatest number." + +"My son," said Mr. Franklin, solemnly, "so far as it was in your power, +you have done a greater harm to the public, than to the owner of the +stones." + +"How can that be, father?" asked Ben. + +"Because," answered his father, "in building your wharf with stolen +materials, you have committed a moral wrong. There is no more terrible +mistake, than to violate what is eternally right, for the sake of a +seeming expediency. Those who act upon such a principle, do the utmost in +their power to destroy all that is good in the world." + +"Heaven forbid!" said Benjamin. + +"No act," continued Mr. Franklin, "can possibly be for the benefit of the +public generally, which involves injustice to any individual. It would be +easy to prove this by examples. But, indeed, can we suppose that our +all-wise and just Creator would have so ordered the affairs of the world, +that a wrong act should be the true method of attaining a right end? It is +impious to think so! And I do verily believe, Benjamin, that almost all +the public and private misery of mankind arises from a neglect of this +great truth—that evil can produce only evil—that good ends must be wrought +out by good means." + +"I will never forget it again," said Benjamin, bowing his head. + +"Remember," concluded his father, "that, whenever we vary from the highest +rule of right, just so far we do an injury to the world. It may seem +otherwise for the moment; but, both in Time and in Eternity, it will be +found so." + +To the close of his life, Ben Franklin never forgot this conversation with +his father; and we have reason to suppose, that in most of his public and +private career, he endeavored to act upon the principles which that good +and wise man had then taught him. + +After the great event of building the wharf, Ben continued to cut +wick-yarn and fill candle-moulds for about two years. But, as he had no +love for that occupation, his father often took him to see various +artisans at their work, in order to discover what trade he would prefer. +Thus Ben learned the use of a great many tools, the knowledge of which +afterwards proved very useful to him. But he seemed much inclined to go to +sea. In order to keep him at home, and likewise to gratify his taste for +letters, the lad was bound apprentice to his elder brother, who had lately +set up a printing-office in Boston. + +Here he had many opportunities of reading new books, and of hearing +instructive conversation. He exercised himself so successfully in writing +composition, that, when no more than thirteen or fourteen years old, he +became a contributor to his brother’s newspaper. Ben was also a versifier, +if not a poet. He made two doleful ballads; one about the shipwreck of +Captain Worthilake, and the other about the pirate Black Beard, who not +long before, infested the American seas. + +When Ben’s verses were printed, his brother sent him to sell them to the +town’s-people, wet from the press. "Buy my ballads!" shouted Benjamin, as +he trudged through the streets, with a basketful on his arm. "Who’ll buy a +ballad about Black Beard? A penny a piece! a penny a piece! who’ll buy my +ballads?" + +If one of those roughly composed and rudely printed ballads could be +discovered now, it would be worth more than its weight in gold. + +In this way our friend Benjamin spent his boyhood and youth, until, on +account of some disagreement with his brother, he left his native town and +went to Philadelphia. He landed in the latter city, a homeless and hungry +young man, and bought three-pence worth of bread to satisfy his appetite. +Not knowing where else to go, he entered a Quaker meeting-house, sat down, +and fell fast asleep. He has not told us whether his slumbers were visited +by any dreams. But it would have been a strange dream, indeed, and an +incredible one, that should have foretold how great a man he was destined +to become, and how much he would be honored in that very city, where he +was now friendless, and unknown. + +So here we finish our story of the childhood of Benjamin Franklin. One of +these days, if you would know what he was in his manhood, you must read +his own works, and the history of American Independence. + + + +"Do let us hear a little more of him!" said Edward; "not that I admire him +so much as many other characters; but he interests me, because he was a +Yankee boy." + +"My dear son," replied Mr. Temple, "it would require a whole volume of +talk, to tell you all that is worth knowing about Benjamin Franklin. There +is a very pretty anecdote of his flying a kite in the midst of a +thunder-storm, and thus drawing down the lightning from the clouds, and +proving that it was the same thing as electricity. His whole life would be +an interesting story, if we had time to tell it." + +"But, pray, dear father, tell us what made him so famous," said George. "I +have seen his portrait a great many times. There is a wooden bust of him +in one of our streets, and marble ones, I suppose, in some other places. +And towns, and ships of war, and steamboats, and banks, and academies, and +children, are often named after Franklin. Why should he have grown so very +famous?" + +"Your question is a reasonable one, George," answered his father. "I doubt +whether Franklin’s philosophical discoveries, important as they were, or +even his vast political services, would have given him all the fame which +he acquired. It appears to me that Poor Richard’s Almanac did more than +any thing else towards making him familiarly known to the public. As the +writer of those proverbs, which Poor Richard was supposed to utter, +Franklin became the counsellor and household friend of almost every family +in America. Thus, it was the humblest of all his labors that has done the +most for his fame." + +"I have read some of those proverbs," remarked Edward; "but I do not like +them. They are all about getting money, or saving it." + +"Well," said his father, "they were suited to the condition of the +country; and their effect, upon the whole, has doubtless been +good,—although they teach men but a very small portion of their duties." + + + + +Chapter IX + + +Hitherto, Mr. Temple’s narratives had all been about boys and men. But, +the next evening, he bethought himself that the quiet little Emily would +perhaps be glad to hear the story of a child of her own sex. He therefore +resolved to narrate the youthful adventures of Christina of Sweden, who +began to be a Queen at the age of no more than six years. If we have any +little girls among our readers, they must not suppose that Christina is +set before them as a pattern of what they ought to be. On the contrary, +the tale of her life is chiefly profitable as showing the evil effects of +a wrong education, which caused this daughter of a king to be both useless +and unhappy. + +Here follows the story. + + + +QUEEN CHRISTINA + + +BORN 1626. DIED 1689. + +In the royal palace at Stockholm, the capital city of Sweden, there was +born, in 1626, a little princess. The king, her father, gave her the name +of Christina, in memory of a Swedish girl with whom he had been in love. +His own name was Gustavus Adolphus; and he was also called the Lion of the +North, because he had gained greater fame in war than any other prince or +general then alive. With this valiant king for their commander, the Swedes +had made themselves terrible to the Emperor of Germany and to the King of +France, and were looked upon as the chief defence of the Protestant +religion. + +The little Christina was by no means a beautiful child. To confess the +truth, she was remarkably plain. The queen, her mother, did not love her +so much as she ought; partly, perhaps, on account of Christina’s want of +beauty, and also, because both the king and queen had wished for a son, +who might have gained as great renown in battle as his father had. + +The king, however, soon became exceedingly fond of the infant princess. +When Christina was very young, she was taken violently sick. Gustavus +Adolphus, who was several hundred miles from Stockholm, travelled night +and day, and never rested until he held the poor child in his arms. On her +recovery, he made a solemn festival, in order to show his joy to the +people of Sweden and express his gratitude to Heaven. After this event, he +took his daughter with him in all the journeys which he made through his +kingdom. + +Christina soon proved herself a bold and sturdy little girl. When she was +two years old, the king and herself, in the course of a journey, came to +the strong fortress of Colmar. On the battlements were soldiers clad in +steel armor, which glittered in the sunshine. There were likewise great +cannons, pointing their black mouths at Gustavus and little Christina, and +ready to belch out their smoke and thunder; for whenever a king enters a +fortress it is customary to receive him with a royal salute of artillery. + +But the captain of the fortress met Gustavus and his daughter, as they +were about to enter the gateway. + +"May it please your Majesty," said he, taking off his steel cap and bowing +profoundly, "I fear that if we receive you with a salute of cannon, the +little princess will be frightened almost to death." + +Gustavus looked earnestly at his daughter, and was indeed apprehensive +that the thunder of so many cannon might perhaps throw her into +convulsions. He had almost a mind to tell the captain to let them enter +the fortress quietly, as common people might have done, without all this +head-splitting racket. But no; this would not do. + +"Let them fire," said he, waving his hand. "Christina is a soldier’s +daughter, and must learn to bear the noise of cannon." + +So the captain uttered the word of command, and immediately there was a +terrible peal of thunder from the cannon, and such a gush of smoke that it +enveloped the whole fortress in its volumes. But, amid all the din and +confusion, Christina was seen clapping her little hands, and laughing in +an ecstasy of delight. Probably nothing ever pleased her father so much as +to see that his daughter promised to be fearless as himself. He determined +to educate her exactly as if she had been a boy, and to teach her all the +knowledge needful to the ruler of a kingdom and the commander of an army. + +But Gustavus should have remembered that Providence had created her to be +a woman, and that it was not for him to make a man of her. + +However, the king derived great happiness from his beloved Christina. It +must have been a pleasant sight to see the powerful monarch of Sweden +playing in some magnificent hall of the palace with this merry little +girl. Then he forgot that the weight of a kingdom rested upon his +shoulders. He forgot that the wise Chancellor Oxenstiern was waiting to +consult with him how to render Sweden the greatest nation of Europe. He +forgot that the Emperor of Germany and the King of France were plotting +together how they might pull him down from his throne. + +Yes; Gustavus forgot all the perils and cares and pompous irksomeness of a +royal life, and was as happy, while playing with his child, as the +humblest peasant in the realm of Sweden. How gayly did they dance along +the marble floor of the palace, this valiant king, with his upright, +martial figure, his warworn visage, and commanding aspect, and the small, +round form of Christina, with her rosy face of childish merriment! Her +little fingers were clasped in her father’s hand, which had held the +leading-staff in many famous victories. His crown and sceptre were her +playthings. She could disarm Gustavus of his sword, which was so terrible +to the princes of Europe. + +But alas! the king was not long permitted to enjoy Christina’s society. +When she was four years old, Gustavus was summoned to take command of the +allied armies of Germany, which were fighting against the Emperor. His +greatest affliction was the necessity of parting with his child; but +people in such high stations have but little opportunity for domestic +happiness. He called an assembly of the Senators of Sweden, and confided +Christina to their care, saying that each one of them must be a father to +her, if he himself should fall in battle. + +At the moment of his departure Christina ran towards him, and began to +address him with a speech which somebody had taught her for the occasion. +Gustavus was busied with thoughts about the affairs of the kingdom, so +that he did not immediately attend to the childish voice of his little +girl. Christina, who did not love to be unnoticed, immediately stopped +short, and pulled him by the coat. + +"Father," said she, "why do not you listen to my speech?" + +In a moment, the king forgot every thing, except that he was parting with +what he loved best in all the world. He caught the child in his arms, +pressed her to his bosom, and burst into tears. Yes; though he was a brave +man, and though he wore a steel corselet on his breast, and though armies +were waiting for him to lead them to battle,—still, his heart melted +within him, and he wept. Christina, too, was so afflicted that her +attendants began to fear that she would actually die of grief. But +probably she was soon comforted; for children seldom remember their +parents quite so faithfully as their parents remember them. + +For two years more, Christina remained in the palace at Stockholm. The +queen, her mother, had accompanied Gustavus to the wars. The child, +therefore, was left to the guardianship of five of the wisest men in the +kingdom. But these wise men knew better how to manage the affairs of +state, than how to govern and educate a little girl so as to render her a +good and happy woman. + +When two years had passed away, tidings were brought to Stockholm which +filled everybody with triumph and sorrow at the same time. The Swedes had +won a glorious victory at Lutzen. But alas! the warlike king of Sweden, +the Lion of the North, the father of our little Christina,—had been slain +at the foot of a great stone, which still marks the spot of that hero’s +death. + +Soon after this sad event, a General Assembly, or Congress, consisting of +deputations from the nobles, the clergy, the burghers, and the peasants of +Sweden was summoned to meet at Stockholm. It was for the purpose of +declaring little Christina to be Queen of Sweden, and giving her the crown +and sceptre of her deceased father. Silence being proclaimed, the +Chancellor Oxenstiern arose. + +"We desire to know," said he, "whether the people of Sweden will take the +daughter of our dead king, Gustavus Adolphus, to be their Queen." + +When the Chancellor had spoken, an old man with white hair, and in coarse +apparel, stood up in the midst of the assembly. He was a peasant, Lars +Larrson by name, and had spent most of his life in laboring on a farm. + +"Who is this daughter of Gustavus?" asked the old man. "We do not know +her. Let her be shown to us." + +Then Christina was brought into the hall, and placed before the old +peasant. It was strange, no doubt, to see a child—a little girl of six +years old—offered to the Swedes as their ruler, instead of the brave king, +her father, who had led them to victory so many times. Could her baby +fingers wield a sword in war? Could her childish mind govern the nation +wisely in peace? + +But the Swedes do not appear to have asked themselves these questions. Old +Lars Larrson took Christina up in his arms, and gazed earnestly into her +face. He had known the great Gustavus well; and his heart was touched, +when he saw the likeness which the little girl bore to that heroic +monarch. + +"Yes," cried he, with the tears gushing down his furrowed cheeks, "this is +truly the daughter of our Gustavus! Here is her father’s brow!—here is his +piercing eye! She is his very picture. This child shall be our queen!" + + [Image #4] + +Then all the proud nobles of Sweden, and the reverend clergy, and the +burghers, and the peasants, knelt down at the child’s feet, and kissed her +hand. + +"Long live Christina, queen of Sweden!" shouted they. + +Even after she was a woman grown, Christina remembered the pleasure which +she felt in seeing all these men at her feet, and hearing them acknowledge +her as their supreme ruler. Poor child! she was yet to learn that power +does not insure happiness. As yet, however, she had not any real power. +All the public business, it is true, was transacted in her name; but the +kingdom was governed by a number of the most experienced statesmen, who +were called a Regency. + +But it was considered necessary that the little queen should be present at +the public ceremonies, and should behave just as if she were in reality +the ruler of the nation. When she was seven years of age, some ambassadors +from the Czar of Muscovy came to the Swedish court. They wore long beards, +and were clad in a strange fashion, with furs, and other outlandish +ornaments; and as they were inhabitants of a half-civilized country, they +did not behave like other people. The Chancellor Oxenstiern was afraid +that the young queen would burst out a-laughing, at the first sight of +these queer ambassadors; or else that she would be frightened by their +unusual aspect. + +"Why should I be frightened?" said the little queen;—"and do you suppose +that I have no better manners than to laugh? Only tell me how I must +behave; and I will do it." + +Accordingly, the Muscovite ambassadors were introduced; and Christina +received them, and answered their speeches, with as much dignity and +propriety as if she had been a grown woman. + +All this time, though Christina was now a queen, you must not suppose that +she was left to act as she pleased. She had a preceptor, named John +Mathias, who was a very learned man, and capable of instructing her in all +the branches of science. But there was nobody to teach her the delicate +graces and gentle virtues of a woman. She was surrounded almost entirely +by men; and had learned to despise the society of her own sex. At the age +of nine years, she was separated from her mother, whom the Swedes did not +consider a proper person to be entrusted with the charge of her. No little +girl, who sits by a New England fireside, has cause to envy Christina, in +the royal palace at Stockholm. + +Yet she made great progress in her studies. She learned to read the +classical authors of Greece and Rome, and became a great admirer of the +heroes and poets of old times. Then, as for active exercises, she could +ride on horseback as well as any man in her kingdom. She was fond of +hunting, and could shoot at a mark with wonderful skill. But dancing was +the only feminine accomplishment with which she had any acquaintance. + +She was so restless in her disposition, that none of her attendants were +sure of a moment’s quiet, neither day nor night. She grew up, I am sorry +to say, a very unamiable person, ill-tempered, proud, stubborn, and, in +short, unfit to make those around her happy, or to be happy herself. Let +every little girl, who has been taught self-control, and a due regard for +the rights of others, thank heaven that she has had better instruction +than this poor little queen of Sweden. + +At the age of eighteen, Christina was declared free to govern the kingdom +by herself, without the aid of a regency. At this period of her life, she +was a young woman of striking aspect, a good figure and intelligent face, +but very strangely dressed. She wore a short habit of gray cloth, with a +man’s vest over it, and a black scarf around her neck, but no jewels, nor +ornaments of any kind. + +Yet, though Christina was so negligent of her appearance, there was +something in her air and manner that proclaimed her as the ruler of a +kingdom. Her eyes, it is said, had a very fierce and haughty look. Old +General Wrangel, who had often caused the enemies of Sweden to tremble in +battle, actually trembled himself, when he encountered the eyes of the +queen. But it would have been better for Christina if she could have made +people love her, by means of soft and gentle looks, instead of affrighting +them by such terrible glances. + +And now I have told you almost all that is amusing or instructive, in the +childhood of Christina. Only a few more words need be said about her; for +it is neither pleasant nor profitable to think of many things that she +did, after she grew to be a woman. + +When she had worn the crown a few years, she began to consider it beneath +her dignity to be called a queen, because the name implied that she +belonged to the weaker sex. She therefore caused herself to be proclaimed +KING, thus declaring to the world that she despised her own sex, and was +desirous of being ranked among men. But in the twenty-eighth year of her +age, Christina grew tired of royalty, and resolved to be neither a king +nor a queen any longer. She took the crown from her head, with her own +hands, and ceased to be the ruler of Sweden. The people did not greatly +regret her abdication; for she had governed them ill, and had taken much +of their property to supply her extravagance. + +Having thus given up her hereditary crown, Christina left Sweden and +travelled over many of the countries of Europe. Everywhere, she was +received with great ceremony, because she was the daughter of the renowned +Gustavus, and had herself been a powerful queen. Perhaps you would like to +know something about her personal appearance, in the latter part of her +life. She is described as wearing a man’s vest, a short gray petticoat, +embroidered with gold and silver, and a black wig, which was thrust awry +upon her head. She wore no gloves, and so seldom washed her hands that +nobody could tell what had been their original color. In this strange +dress, and, I suppose, without washing her hands or face, she visited the +magnificent court of Louis the Fourteenth. + +She died in 1689. None loved her while she lived, nor regretted her death, +nor planted a single flower upon her grave. Happy are the little girls of +America, who are brought up quietly and tenderly, at the domestic hearth, +and thus become gentle and delicate women! May none of them ever lose the +loveliness of their sex, by receiving such an education as that of Queen +Christina! + + + +Emily, timid, quiet, and sensitive, was the very reverse of little +Christina. She seemed shocked at the idea of such a bold and masculine +character as has been described in the foregoing story. + +"I never could have loved her," whispered she to Mrs. Temple; and then she +added, with that love of personal neatness, which generally accompanies +purity of heart:—"It troubles me to think of her unclean hands!" + +"Christina was a sad specimen of womankind, indeed," said Mrs. Temple. +"But it is very possible for a woman to have a strong mind, and to be +fitted for the active business of life, without losing any of her natural +delicacy. Perhaps, some time or other, Mr. Temple will tell you a story of +such a woman." + +It was now time for Edward to be left to repose. His brother George shook +him heartily by the hand, and hoped, as he had hoped twenty times before, +that to-morrow or the next day, Ned’s eyes would be strong enough to look +the sun right in the face. + +"Thank you, George," replied Edward, smiling; "but I am not half so +impatient as at first. If my bodily eyesight were as good as yours, +perhaps I could not see things so distinctly with my mind’s eye. But now +there is a light within which shows me the little Quaker artist, Ben West, +and Isaac Newton with his windmill, and stubborn Sam Johnson, and stout +Noll Cromwell, and shrewd Ben Franklin, and little Queen Christina with +the Swedes kneeling at her feet. It seems as if I really saw these +personages face to face. So I can bear the darkness outside of me pretty +well." + +When Edward ceased speaking, Emily put up her mouth and kissed him as her +farewell for the night. + +"Ah, I forgot!" said Edward, with a sigh. "I cannot see any of your faces. +What would it signify to see all the famous people in the world, if I must +be blind to the faces that I love?" + +"You must try to see us with your heart, my dear child," said his mother. + +Edward went to bed, somewhat dispirited, but quickly falling asleep, was +visited with such a pleasant dream of the sunshine and of his dearest +friends that he felt the happier for it all the next day. And we hope to +find him still happy when we meet again. + +THE END. + + + + + + +JUVENILE BOOKS + + +PUBLISHED BY + +TICKNOR, REED, AND FIELDS. + +JUST OUT, + +_History of my Pets_. +By Grace Greenwood. A beautiful little volume, with fine plates. 50 cents. + +_Barbauld’s (Mrs.) Lessons for Children_. +With a large number of engravings. 16mo. 40 cents. + +_Jonas’s Stories. Related to Rollo and Lucy_. +By Jacob Abbott. With engravings. 18mo. 38 cents. + +_Jonas a Judge; or Law among the Boys_. +By Jacob Abbott. With engravings. 18mo. 38 cents. + +_Jonas on a Farm in Summer_. +By Jacob Abbott. With engravings. 18mo. 38 cents. + +_Jonas on a Farm in Winter_. +By Jacob Abbott. With engravings. 18mo. 38 cents. + +_Jack Halliard. Voyages and adventures in the Arctic Ocean_. +With engravings. 18mo. 38 cents. + +_Lambert Lilly’s History of the New England States_. +With numerous engravings. 18mo. 38 cents. + +_Lambert Lilly’s History of the Middle States_. With numerous engravings. +18mo. 38 cents. + +_Lambert Lilly’s History of the Southern States_, _Virginia_, _North and +South Carolina_, _and Georgia_. +With numerous engravings. 18mo. 38 cents. + +_Lambert Lilly’s History of the Western States_. +With numerous engravings. 18mo. 38 cents. + +_Lambert Lilly’s Story of the American Revolution._ +With numerous engravings. 18mo. 38 cents. + +_Little Stories for Little Folks_. +Translated from the German. With twelve fine steel engravings. 16mo. 60 +cents. + +_Mary Howitt’s Birds and Flowers, and other_ _Country Things_. +With engravings. 12mo. 50 cents. + +_Mother’s Lessons, for Little Girls and Boys_. +By a Lady of Boston. With eight beautiful steel engravings. 16mo. 50 +cents. + +_Olympic Games. A Gift for the Holidays_. +By the Author of "Poetry for Home and School," &c. 16mo. 50 cents. + +_Parley’s Short Stories for Long Nights_. +With eight colored engravings, 16mo. 50 cents; uncolored engravings, 40 +cents. + +_Lights and Shadows of Domestic Life, and other Stories_. +By the authors of "Rose and her Lamb." + +TICKNOR, REED, AND FIELDS + +HAVE PUBLISHED + +_Greenwood Leaves_. +A Collection of Stories and Letters, by Grace Greenwood. Second edition. 1 +vol. 12mo. $1.25; gilt $1.75. + + + We suppose most of our readers are familiar with the name of Grace + Greenwood. For some half dozen of years she has been one of the + most acceptable contributors to our American monthlies, and she + possesses such liveliness and vivacity that it does one good to + read her productions. There is an ease and _grace_ about her, too, + that makes us feel acquainted with her, although we have never + seen her. The volume before us is filled with tales, sketches, + letters, and poems. We predict that every lady’s library will + contain this volume.—BOSTON ATLAS. + + + The name of Grace Greenwood has now become a household word in the + popular literature of our country and our day. Of the intellectual + woman we are not called to say much, as her writings speak for + themselves, and they have spoken widely. They are eminently + characteristic; they are strictly national; they are likewise + decisively individual. All true individuality is honestly social; + and also, in Miss Clarke’s writings, nothing is sectional, and + nothing sectarian. There is much in them that is subjective, much + that is drawn from personal experience, but nothing that is merely + vain or selfish. A genuine human being, she is at the same time a + genuine American girl. And the spirit of her country finds in her + utterance a voice that must stir an earnest life in the brothers + and sisters of her nation. She is one of the spiritual products of + the soil, which has of late given evidence of spiritual fertility; + and she promises not to be the least healthy, as she is not the + least choice among them; she is only putting out her spring buds; + if no untimely frost shall nip them, when the summer suns are warm + they will be splendid blossoms, and long before autumn begins to + dim the sky with its mellow shootings they will be luxuriant + fruit.—HENRY GILES. + + +_Alderbrook_. +_A Collection of Fanny Forester’s Village Sketches, Poems, &c_. With a +fine Mezzotinto Portrait of the Author, engraved by Sartain. Ninth +edition, enlarged. + +2 vols. 12mo, $1.75; gilt $2.50; gilt extra $3.00. The same in 1 vol. +$1.62; gilt $2.25; gilt extra $2.75. + + + Who has not heard of Fanny Forester,—’charming Fanny Forester,’ as + she is deservedly called? Her sketches have been more generally + read and admired than those of almost any other periodical writer + of our day. There is a freshness, grace, sprightliness, purity, + and actualness about them, which charms and invigorates; and we + are glad to find them collected and published in a form both + elegant and convenient. Miss Chubbuck, it will be remembered, was + married a few months ago to the Rev. Dr. Judson, and is now on her + way, with that devoted missionary, to the scene of his former + labors. The dedicatory preface of these volumes, to her husband, + is one of the most graceful and touching we have ever seen. A + beautifully engraved portrait of the lady, by Sartain, is prefixed + to the first volume. This collection will make a very acceptable + and suitable present in the approaching Holidays.—SALEM REGISTER. + + + This is one of those charming books which well deserves a place in + every family library, and which has already won a place in + thousands of hearts. The Sketches comprised in these beautiful + volumes are so full of grace and tenderness, so pure in their + style and so elevated in their tone, that none can read them + without delight and profit. We hazard little in saying that the + touching story of "Grace Linden," which properly leads the + collection, is scarcely surpassed in beauty by any thing in the + works of Maria Edgeworth, or Mary Russell Mitford. There are a + great many other Sketches, in the volumes, that deserve special + praise; but we will not deal in particulars when all are so + admirable. + + The authoress of "Alderbrook" is now a self-denying, zealous + missionary of the Cross, in Asia, and, as Mrs. Judson, has written + many very charming things. She is best known, however, under her + _nomme de plume_; and however honored may be the revered name she + now bears, that of Fanny Forester will be cherished with pride and + pleasure by her friends and readers.—So. LIT. GAZETTE. + + + + + +***END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK TRUE STORIES FROM HISTORY AND BIOGRAPHY*** + + + +CREDITS + + +March 2005 + + Project Gutenberg Edition + Josephine Paolucci Joshua Hutchinson Internet Archive + Children’s Library Online Distributed Proofreading Team + +August 2005 + + Converted to PGTEI v0.3 + Joshua Hutchinson + +June 2006 + + Added PGHeader/PGFooter. + Joshua Hutchinson + + + +A WORD FROM PROJECT GUTENBERG + + +This file should be named 15697-0.txt or 15697-0.zip. + +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + + + http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/1/5/6/9/15697/ + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one — the old editions will be +renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no one +owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation (and +you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without permission +and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, set forth in the +General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to copying and +distributing Project Gutenberg™ electronic works to protect the Project +Gutenberg™ concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered +trademark, and may not be used if you charge for the eBooks, unless you +receive specific permission. If you do not charge anything for copies of +this eBook, complying with the rules is very easy. You may use this eBook +for nearly any purpose such as creation of derivative works, reports, +performances and research. They may be modified and printed and given away +— you may do practically _anything_ with public domain eBooks. +Redistribution is subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE + + +_Please read this before you distribute or use this work._ + +To protect the Project Gutenberg™ mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work (or +any other work associated in any way with the phrase “Project Gutenberg”), +you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project Gutenberg™ +License (available with this file or online at +http://www.gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. + + +General Terms of Use & Redistributing Project Gutenberg™ electronic works + + +1.A. + + +By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg™ electronic work, +you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to and accept all the +terms of this license and intellectual property (trademark/copyright) +agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all the terms of this +agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy all copies of +Project Gutenberg™ electronic works in your possession. If you paid a fee +for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project Gutenberg™ electronic work +and you do not agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement, you may +obtain a refund from the person or entity to whom you paid the fee as set +forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + + +1.B. + + +“Project Gutenberg” is a registered trademark. It may only be used on or +associated in any way with an electronic work by people who agree to be +bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few things that you can +do with most Project Gutenberg™ electronic works even without complying +with the full terms of this agreement. See paragraph 1.C below. There are +a lot of things you can do with Project Gutenberg™ electronic works if you +follow the terms of this agreement and help preserve free future access to +Project Gutenberg™ electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below. + + +1.C. + + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation (“the Foundation” or +PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg™ electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an individual +work is in the public domain in the United States and you are located in +the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from copying, +distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative works based on +the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of +course, we hope that you will support the Project Gutenberg™ mission of +promoting free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project +Gutenberg™ works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for +keeping the Project Gutenberg™ name associated with the work. You can +easily comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the +same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg™ License when you +share it without charge with others. + + +1.D. + + +The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern what you +can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in a constant +state of change. If you are outside the United States, check the laws of +your country in addition to the terms of this agreement before +downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or creating +derivative works based on this work or any other Project Gutenberg™ work. +The Foundation makes no representations concerning the copyright status of +any work in any country outside the United States. + + +1.E. + + +Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + + +1.E.1. + + +The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate access +to, the full Project Gutenberg™ License must appear prominently whenever +any copy of a Project Gutenberg™ work (any work on which the phrase +“Project Gutenberg” appears, or with which the phrase “Project Gutenberg” +is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, copied or +distributed: + + + This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with + almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away + or re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License + included with this eBook or online at http://www.gutenberg.org + + +1.E.2. + + +If an individual Project Gutenberg™ electronic work is derived from the +public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is posted with +permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied and +distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees or +charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work with the +phrase “Project Gutenberg” associated with or appearing on the work, you +must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 +or obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg™ +trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + + +1.E.3. + + +If an individual Project Gutenberg™ electronic work is posted with the +permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution must comply +with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional terms imposed +by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked to the Project +Gutenberg™ License for all works posted with the permission of the +copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + + +1.E.4. + + +Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg™ License +terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this work or any +other work associated with Project Gutenberg™. + + +1.E.5. + + +Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this electronic +work, or any part of this electronic work, without prominently displaying +the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with active links or immediate +access to the full terms of the Project Gutenberg™ License. + + +1.E.6. + + +You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, compressed, +marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any word +processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg™ work in a format other than +“Plain Vanilla ASCII” or other format used in the official version posted +on the official Project Gutenberg™ web site (http://www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original “Plain Vanilla ASCII” or other form. +Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg™ License as +specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + + +1.E.7. + + +Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, performing, +copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg™ works unless you comply +with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + + +1.E.8. + + +You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing access to or +distributing Project Gutenberg™ electronic works provided that + + - You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg™ works calculated using the method you + already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed to + the owner of the Project Gutenberg™ trademark, but he has agreed to + donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project Gutenberg + Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid within 60 + days following each date on which you prepare (or are legally + required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty payments + should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project Gutenberg + Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in Section 4, + “Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary + Archive Foundation.” + + - You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg™ License. + You must require such a user to return or destroy all copies of the + works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue all use of and + all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg™ works. + + - You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of + any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of + receipt of the work. + + - You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg™ works. + + +1.E.9. + + +If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg™ electronic +work or group of works on different terms than are set forth in this +agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from both the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael Hart, the owner of the +Project Gutenberg™ trademark. Contact the Foundation as set forth in +Section 3 below. + + +1.F. + + +1.F.1. + + +Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable effort to +identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread public domain +works in creating the Project Gutenberg™ collection. Despite these +efforts, Project Gutenberg™ electronic works, and the medium on which they +may be stored, may contain “Defects,” such as, but not limited to, +incomplete, inaccurate or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright +or other intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk +or other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot +be read by your equipment. + + +1.F.2. + + +LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES — Except for the “Right of +Replacement or Refund” described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project Gutenberg™ +trademark, and any other party distributing a Project Gutenberg™ +electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all liability to you for +damages, costs and expenses, including legal fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE +NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH +OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE +FOUNDATION, THE TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT +WILL NOT BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, +PUNITIVE OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY +OF SUCH DAMAGE. + + +1.F.3. + + +LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND — If you discover a defect in this +electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can receive a refund +of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a written explanation to +the person you received the work from. If you received the work on a +physical medium, you must return the medium with your written explanation. +The person or entity that provided you with the defective work may elect +to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a refund. If you received the +work electronically, the person or entity providing it to you may choose +to give you a second opportunity to receive the work electronically in +lieu of a refund. If the second copy is also defective, you may demand a +refund in writing without further opportunities to fix the problem. + + +1.F.4. + + +Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth in +paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you ’AS-IS,’ WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + + +1.F.5. + + +Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied warranties or the +exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. If any disclaimer or +limitation set forth in this agreement violates the law of the state +applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be interpreted to make +the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by the applicable state +law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any provision of this agreement +shall not void the remaining provisions. + + +1.F.6. + + +INDEMNITY — You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the trademark +owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone providing copies of +Project Gutenberg™ electronic works in accordance with this agreement, and +any volunteers associated with the production, promotion and distribution +of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs +and expenses, including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from +any of the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of +this or any Project Gutenberg™ work, (b) alteration, modification, or +additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg™ work, and (c) any Defect +you cause. + + +Section 2. + + + Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg™ + + +Project Gutenberg™ is synonymous with the free distribution of electronic +works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers including +obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists because of the +efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from people in all walks +of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the assistance +they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg™’s goals and ensuring +that the Project Gutenberg™ collection will remain freely available for +generations to come. In 2001, the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation was created to provide a secure and permanent future for +Project Gutenberg™ and future generations. To learn more about the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations +can help, see Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation web page at +http://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. + + + Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation + + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the state of +Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal Revenue Service. +The Foundation’s EIN or federal tax identification number is 64-6221541. +Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/pglaf. Contributions to the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full +extent permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state’s laws. + +The Foundation’s principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. +S. Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at 809 North +1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact information +can be found at the Foundation’s web site and official page at +http://www.pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + + + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. + + + Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive + Foundation + + +Project Gutenberg™ depends upon and cannot survive without wide spread +public support and donations to carry out its mission of increasing the +number of public domain and licensed works that can be freely distributed +in machine readable form accessible by the widest array of equipment +including outdated equipment. Many small donations ($1 to $5,000) are +particularly important to maintaining tax exempt status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United States. +Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a considerable +effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up with these +requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations where we have not +received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND DONATIONS or +determine the status of compliance for any particular state visit +http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/donate + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we have +not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition against +accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who approach us +with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make any +statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from outside the +United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation methods +and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other ways including +checks, online payments and credit card donations. To donate, please +visit: http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/donate + + +Section 5. + + + General Information About Project Gutenberg™ electronic works. + + +Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg™ +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared with +anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project Gutenberg™ +eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + +Project Gutenberg™ eBooks are often created from several printed editions, +all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. unless a copyright +notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily keep eBooks in compliance +with any particular paper edition. + +Each eBook is in a subdirectory of the same number as the eBook’s eBook +number, often in several formats including plain vanilla ASCII, compressed +(zipped), HTML and others. + +Corrected _editions_ of our eBooks replace the old file and take over the +old filename and etext number. The replaced older file is renamed. +_Versions_ based on separate sources are treated as new eBooks receiving +new filenames and etext numbers. + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + + http://www.gutenberg.org + + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg™, including how +to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, +how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to subscribe to our email +newsletter to hear about new eBooks. + + + + + + +***FINIS*** +
\ No newline at end of file |